Autobag 500 and 550 User Manual ENGLISH

Autobag® 500™and 550™
User’s Manual
ORGINAL INSTRUCTIONS
Part No. AB5-UM
Rev. A
30 June 2019
10175 Philipp Parkway, Streetsboro, OH 44241

World Headquarters: 1 (800) 527-0733 Field Service: 1 (888) 277-0785
customerservice@autobag.com
www.autobag.com
BLANK PAGE
Copyright
Copyright© 2019 by Automated Packaging Systems. All rights reserved. This material may not be
reproduced, displayed, modified or distributed without the express prior written permission of the
copyright holder. For permission, contact: permission@autobag.com
The use of the ® or ™ symbol indicates that Automated Packaging Systems, Inc. has registered or is
otherwise claiming trademark rights in the United States. These marks may also be registered in other
countries and common law rights may apply in countries where such rights are recognized.
Revision History
Part Description / Affected
Date Rev. Document
Number Pages
30 June 2019 A AB5-UM User’s Manual All
Trademark Disclaimer
All trademarks mentioned within this manual are the property of their respective owners. Use by
Automated Packaging Systems is for identification of the manufacturers’ products only and does not
imply any affiliation or endorsement by said companies.
• Teflon™
• Scotch-Brite™
• Loctite®
BLANK PAGE
Regional Contact Information
Country/Region Office Information
North America
United States, World Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
Headquarters 10175 Philipp Parkway
Streetsboro, OH 44241
USA
Toll Free: 1-800-527-0733

Local Phone: 330-342-2000
Fax: 330-342-2400
Nationwide Technical Support: 1-800-527-0733
Field Service Support: 1-888-277-0785
Web: www.autobag.com
E-mail: info@autobag.com or
customerservice@autobag.com
Canada Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
10175 Philipp Parkway
USA
Téléphone: +1-330-342-2000
Fax: +1-330-342-2400
Télécopie: +1-330-342-2400
Courriel: info@autobag.com
Mexico Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
USA
Línea gratuita: 1-800-527-0733

Teléfono: 330-342-2000
Fax: 330-342-2400
Servicio de campo y asistencia telefónica en todo el país:
1-800-527-0733
Correo electrónico: info@autobag.com

Caribbean
Dominican Republic Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
USA

Teléfono: 330-342-2000
Fax: 330-342-2400
1-800-527-0733

Puerto Rico Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.
USA

Teléfono: 330-342-2000
Fax: 330-342-2400
1-800-527-0733

South America
Brazil APS do Brasil Ltda.
Av. Ipiranga, 318 – Bl.B – cj.302 – sala 01
São Paulo - SP - Brasil
CEP 01046-010
Telefone: +55 11 3231 0956

E-mail: apsbrasil@autobag.com.br
Europe
United Kingdom, EU Automated Packaging Systems
Corp Office Enigma Business Park
Sandys Road
Malvern
WR14 1JJ
United Kingdom
Free Phone: 0800 731 3643

Phone: +44 0 1684 891 400
Fax: +44 0 1684 891 401
E-mail: mktonline@autobag.co.uk
Austria Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
Heinrich-Eberhardt-Str. 10
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Kostenlose Hotline: 0800 526 526 0

Tel: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
E-mail: kontakt@autobag.de
Belarus Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Бесплатная горячая линия: 0800 526 526 0

телефон: 05331-90383-0
факс: 05331-90383-33
Эл. адрес: kontakt@autobag.de

Europe (continued)
Belgium Dutch:
Automated Packaging Systems
Leuvensesteenweg 542 C2-4
1930 Zaventem, België
Telefoon: 0032/27.25.31.00
Fax: 0032/27.25.33.62
E-mail: info@autobag.be
French:
Téléphone: 0032/27.25.31.00
Fax: 0032/27.25.33.62
Courriel: info@autobag.be
Bulgaria No Russian Translation available. Use German
Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel

Tel: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Czech Republic Automated Packaging Systems Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Telefon: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
E-Mail: kontakt@autobag.de
Europe (continued)
Denmark Automated Packaging Systems
Enigma Business Park
Sandys Road
Malvern
WR14 1JJ
United Kingdom
Telefon: +44 (0) 1684 891 400

Fax: +44 (0) 1684 891 401
Email: sales@autobag.co.ukTelefon
Finland Automated Packaging Systems
Sandys Road
Malvern
WR14 1JJ
United Kingdom
Puhelin: +44 (0) 1684 891 400

Faksi: +44 (0) 1684 891 401
Sähköposti: sales@autobag.co.uk
France Automated Packaging Systems
25B Rue du 35ème Régiment d’Aviation
69500 BRON
FRANCE
Tel: 04 72 15 86 50
Fax: 04 72 15 86 59
E-mail: info@autobag.com
Germany Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel

Tel: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Europe (continued)
Greece Automated Packaging Systems
Leuvensesteenweg 542, Blok C, nr 4
1930 Zaventem
België
Τηλέφωνο: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Φάξ: +32 0(2)725 33 62
E-mail: sales@autobag.be
Hungary Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Telefon: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Ireland Automated Packaging Systems
Sandys Road
Malvern
WR14 1JJ
United Kingdom
Free Phone: 0800 731 3643

Phone: +44 01684 891 400
Fax: +44 01684 891 401
E-mail: mktonline@autobag.co.uk
Italy Automated Packaging Systems
Leuvensesteenweg 542, Blok C, nr 4
1930 Zaventem
België
Telefono: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Fax: +32 0(2)725 33 62
E-mail: sales@autobag.be
Europe (continued)
Latvia Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Tālrunis: 05331-90383-0
Fakss: 05331-90383-33
E-pasts: kontakt@autobag.de
Lithuania Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Telefonas: 05331-90383-0
Faksas: 05331-90383-33
El. paštas: kontakt@autobag.de

Netherlands Automated Packaging Systems
Telefoon: 0032/27.25.31.00
Fax: 0032/27.25.33.62
Poland Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Telefon: 0531 263050

Faks: 0531 2630522
E-mail: Sales@autobag.de
Portugal Automated Packaging Systems
Telefone: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Fax: +32 0(2)725 33 62
Europe (continued)
Romania Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Telefon.: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Slovakia Automated Packging Systems, Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Tel.: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Spain Automated Packaging Systems
Teléfono: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Fax: +32 0(2)725 33 62
Correo electrónico: info@autobag.be

Sweden Automated Packaging Systems
Sandys Road
Malvern
WR14 1JJ
United Kingdom
Telefon: +44 0 1684 891 400

Fax: +44 0 1684 891 401
E-post: mktonline@autobag.co.uk
Switzerland Same for both languages
Automated Packaging Systems Ltd.
38304 Wolfenbüttel
Tel: 05331-90383-0
Fax: 05331-90383-33
Asia Pacific
India Automated Packaging Systems India
65, Shanti Industrial Estate, S.N. Road
Mulund (West), Mumbai – 40080
Maharastra, India
Phone +91 22 25649652
Web: www.autobag.co.in
Email: info@autobag.co.in
Japan Automated Packaging Systems Japan
JAPAN Kohshimukamachi,
Saitama Prefecture 350-0164, 818-1-101
Phone: 049-227-6066
Fax: 049-227-6082
Web: www.autobag.jp
E-mail: info@autobag.jp
China, Indonesia, Laos, Automated Packaging Systems Southeast Asia
Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, 476/5 Pattanakarn 53 Suanluang
South Korea, Taiwan, Thailand, Bangkok, Thailand 10250
Vietnam, Phone: (+66) 0 2 321-1877
Fax: (+66) 0 2 321-1886
Email: info@autobag.com
BLANK PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Operation Module
Section 1: Safety and Overview
Section 2: Introduction
Section 3: Operation
Maintenance Module
Section 4: Maintenance
Section 5: Technical Support
Section 6: Theory of Operation
Section 7: Troubleshooting
Section 8: Mechanical Drawings
Section 9: Schematics
Glossary
1
BLANK PAGE
TOC 2
SAFETY AND OVERVIEW
Subject Page
Safety .................................................................................. 1-3

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes ........................................... 1-4
Machine safety labels .......................................................... 1-5
Residual risk........................................................................ 1-8
Conditions for intended use of machine............................... 1-9
Precautions ....................................................................... 1-10
Misuse............................................................................... 1-11
Sound level test results ..................................................... 1-11
Page 1-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 1-2
Safety
Automated Packaging Systems believes that safety comes first and foremost. Understanding the safety
concerns associated with Automated Packaging Systems machines will help the operator and
maintenance technician understand the dangers associated with operating and maintaining the
machine, and what specific steps can be taken to reduce the risk of injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. Failure to understand or follow the procedures outlined in this manual may lead to loss of
life or injury to personnel and/or damage to equipment.
When operating and/or maintaining this machine, the end user is responsible for complying with the all
applicable Federal, State and Local installation and safety codes. Refer to the local Safety Manager or
Supervisor for applicable regulations for the geographical region in which the machine is to be installed
and operated in.
The Safety and Overview section will cover some risk reductions techniques however, the end user
shall refer to their local Safety Department or Supervisor for local policies and procedures.
The Operation Module of this manual shall be read in its entirety prior to
any actions being performed regarding the machine.
Only trained personnel shall operate and/or maintain this machine.
Engineering changes may have been completed following the publication

date of this manual. Any departure from these procedures should be
verified and approved with Automated Packaging Systems.
Page 1-3
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Throughout this manual Warnings, Cautions and Notes will be utilized. They are used to emphasize
important information, will call your attention to specific items that are associated with a possible safety
hazard or will assist the operator/technician with their tasks.
Warning, Caution and Note symbols will only appear in this manual; you will not find these on the
machine. Below is an example of the symbols and the definition associated with each type.
This is an example of a warning. Warnings will directly precede the item

the warning applies to. Warnings are to be used when failure to follow
instructions could lead to loss of life or serious injury. A Warning will only
be used for personnel. Warnings will always precede cautions.
This is an example of a caution. Cautions will directly precede the item for
which the caution applies to. Cautions are to be used when failure to
follow instructions could lead to injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. A caution may be used for personnel or equipment. Cautions
will always precede notes.
This is an example of a note. Notes are to be used to give more

information, highlight essential procedures, conditions, or statements that
may be helpful to the user. A note may either precede or follow the text of
a procedure.
Page 1-4
Machine safety labels
Machine safety labels will be located on the machine. They will indicate hazards and dangerous areas
that may cause injury to personnel or damage to the equipment. Refer to Table 1-1.
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Indicates relevant information for use of the product is available

in electronic form rather than, or in addition to, printed paper
form.
Do not operate this unit if the decal shown is visible on the unit. It
indicates a guard or cover has been removed and must be
remounted before operating the unit. Do not operate with the
guard removed. The gears or belts are exposed.
Avoid injury. Do not reach into the machine during operation.
Avoid machinery damage. Read manual for proper service

procedure.
Hearing protection required in this area. Exposure to loud noises

will lead to hearing loss.
Avoid injury. It alerts the user to potential injury hazard.
Avoid injury. The surface of the machine may become hot during
operation and may remain hot after the power is removed.
TABLE 1-1. MACHINE AND MANUAL LABELS
Page 1-5
LABEL (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Avoid electrical shock or injury. A dangerous voltage and/or open
electrical contacts are present. It alerts the user to dangerous
voltage inside the unit that can cause electric shock. Only
qualified service personnel should remove cover after performing
LOTO procedures.
Avoid injury. Do not place hands in moving parts, hand crush
force from side.
Avoid injury. Do not place fingers or hands in the feed rollers
The following symbol identifies the protective earth ground to the

unit.
Reset decal. This decal denotes the bagger reset button.
Start/Stop/Cycle decal. This decal denotes the bagger

start/stop/cycle button.
Air Guide decal. These decals denote the Air Guide adjustment.
Air Pulse decal. These decals denote the Air Pulse adjustment.
TABLE 1-1. MACHINE LABELS (CONTINUED)
Page 1-6
LABEL (Continued) DESCRIPTION (Continued)
Air Blower decal. These decals denote the Air Blower

adjustment.
Bag Feed decal. These decals denote the AutoThread™ switch.
Main Nip control, left and right decals. These decals denote the
Nip Roll Locking Lever adjustment.
TABLE 1-1. MACHINE LABELS (CONTINUED)
Page 1-7
Residual risk
Residual risk is a term used to refer to a level of risk for a given hazard after applying safety/protective
measures (risk reduction measures). No risk may be reduced to zero even with proper safety
procedures in place.
In the Safety and Overview section, we cover risk reduction methods such as safety labels and
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) procedures. However, there may be threats that remain after all efforts to
identify and eliminate risk(s) have been made.
Some of the residual risk(s) that may remain after applying risk reduction methods are:
• Possible noise hazard. Wearing hearing protection is recommended and/or may be required.
Safety labels applied to the machine indicate this risk.
• Possible pinch and/or crush injuries may occur when moving the machine, separating its parts,
and joining its parts.
• Possible pinch and/or crush injuries may occur when fault-finding during live equipment
troubleshooting.
• Possible electrical shock hazard is present in the E-BOX during troubleshooting when the
machine is powered OFF and still plugged into an electrical outlet. Only qualified service
personnel are permitted to remove protective equipment covers.
• Possible electrical shock hazard is present when troubleshooting with machine power ON, due
to voltage inside the machine. Only qualified service personnel are permitted to remove
protective equipment covers. Safety labels applied to the machine indicate this risk.
• Possible injury hazard. The IR sensors for the Safety Circuit in the machine are susceptible to
cross-talk if the guarding is removed and machines are placed across from each other. This
could prevent the Safety Circuit from operating correctly. If machines are placed across from
each other, perform a check of the Safety Circuit as described in the Maintenance Section and
whenever machines are moved.
• Possible slip fall and trip hazard. A slip and fall hazard exists for excess bags and bag material
that falls to the floor during operation. For trim equipped machines, a trip hazard exists for the
trim net as it may touch the ground depending on machine height.
• Possible impact hazard or burn hazard. Only qualified service personnel are permitted to
remove protective equipment covers. Safety labels applied to the machine indicate when covers
have been removed and the machine should not be operated under normal conditions.
Page 1-8
Conditions for intended use of machine
This Automated Packaging Systems machine has been designed to operate in specific operating and
environmental conditions and for specific products. These conditions must be met for the machine to
function correctly and operate safely. Failure to operate the machine in the conditions for intended use
will be considered misuse of the machine.
Only personnel that have been properly trained shall operate or maintain
the Automated Packaging Systems machine. Untrained personnel pose a
safety risk to themselves and others that may lead to loss of life or
equipment damage.
1. Prior to unpacking, operating, maintaining, troubleshooting or any interaction with the machine, read
all instructions contained within this manual.
2. Use the Automated Packaging Systems machine for its intended use only.
3. Do not use the unit outdoors or in wet conditions unless specifically designed for these conditions.
4. Do not operate if under the influence of drugs or alcohol.
5. Keep hands, hair, jewelry, clothing and other loose items away from moving parts.
6. Do not package explosives, flammable materials, combustible liquids, or any product which may be
determined as hazardous or unsafe.
7. Do not operate when any guards are removed or loose.
8. Machine must be electrically grounded to facility ground supply.
Page 1-9
Precautions
Certain general precautions shall be taken when operating the Automated Packaging Systems machine
and shall always be observed. Following these precautions will ensure the good working order of the
machine and the safety of personnel.
1. Keep the work areas surrounding the machine clean.
2. Do not place or leave objects on top of the machine.
3. When relocating the unit, be sure to read all instructions first.
4. Forklifts and hoists shall not be used to lift machines. Machines may only be pushed into place or
hand lifted into position in the case of accessory machines such as printers.
5. Any supporting surface used for this unit must be a level, non-slip, oil free, dry surface rated to
support four times the weight of the unit, supply parts, and any optional or accompanying equipment.
6. Do not use extension cords to connect the machine to a power source. Machines shall be plugged in
to dedicated, stand-alone power circuits.
7. Ensure power cords and air supply lines do not create a tripping hazard. Route them from above the
unit whenever possible.
8. Do not position the unit near a heat source.
Page 1-10
Misuse
Operation of this machine with any guard or cover removed will be

considered misuse. Misuse of the machine may lead to loss of life or
damaged to equipment.
Misuse of the machine presents a hazard to personnel and equipment. The following will be considered
as misuse of the machine:
• Modifications that are not approved by Automated Packaging Systems
• Failure to follow all instructions contained within this manual
• Allowing untrained or unauthorized personnel to operate and/or maintain the machine
• Using the machine in hazardous environments. Do not use the machine in hazardous
environments
Sound level test results

Sound level test results for the Autobag 500™ and 550™ were taken at a distance of 3.28 feet (1
meter) and a height of 5.25 feet (1.6 meters) using A-weighted and C-weighted meter readings.
Sound level testing was completed using typical machine settings. Adjusting machine settings may
increase or decrease sound levels during operation.
Hearing protection is required for sound levels above 85 dB. Refer to your
local Safety Office for hearing protection procedures.
MACHINE MODEL A-WEIGHTED READINGS C-WEIGHTED READINGS

Autobag 500 and 550 79.7 dB 83.2 dB
Autobag 500 with trim option 95.7 dB 95.4 dB
TABLE 1-2. SOUND LEVEL TEST RESULTS
Page 1-11
BLANK PAGE
Page 1-12
INTRODUCTION
Subject Page
General Description............................................................. 2-3

Operating Environment ....................................................... 2-3
Functional Operation ........................................................... 2-4
Page 2-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 2-2
General Description
The Autobag® 500™ and 550™ are a technologically-advanced, automatic filling and sealing machine
designed for reliability, flexibility and optimizing packaging throughput. Capable of cycling at rates over
100 bags per minute, this system delivers maximum machine uptime while lowering total cost of
ownership.
State-of-the-art engineering has led to an innovative, inherently safe design. No light curtains or double
palm switches are required to achieve safe operation for hand-load operations. The Autobag 500 and
550 are configurable for left- or right-hand access to the HMI, cycle switch and bag loading area,
improving ergonomics and operator productivity.
The open design makes this bagger highly compatible with Autobag and third-party counters, scales
and infeeds. The Autobag 500 and 550 can also be networked to facilitate full pack station integration
and central monitoring. When integrated with the AutoLabel 500™ inline imprinter, a complete Print-
and-Pack™ station is achieved.
A straightforward, simple design with very few moving parts reduces lifetime cost and improves
reliability, while on-board diagnostics and modular components simplify maintenance.
When used with genuine Autobag pre-opened bags-on-a-roll or bags-in-a-box if applicable, the
Autobag 500 and 550 ushers in the next evolution of high-quality, reliable and flexible bag packaging,
backed by the industry’s most comprehensive engineering and field service network.
Operating Environment
Do not operate machine in potentially explosive atmosphere.
The machine is intended for indoor use only.
The operating environment for this machine shall be free of dirt, dust and moisture. The end user is
responsible for maintaining an environment free of combustibles and for maintaining fire suppression
equipment.
Page 2-3
Functional Operation
Figure 2-1 depicts the functional operation of the Autobag 550 machine.
FIGURE 2-1. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 A box or roll of bags is located in the rear of the unit near the powered unwind.
2 The bags are threaded through the powered unwind. The unwind may be mounted in
several configurations including raised. Bag threading is dependent on the power
unwind mounting position.
3 The bags leave the powered unwind and feed through the machine. If the machine is a
550 unit, the bags will feed under the printer located on top of the unit.
4 The bags enter the unit at the nip roller and will come out the front of the machine to
be filled with product.
5 Machine settings and bag cycling are controlled using the HMI Interface and
AutoTouch™ Control Screen. Bag cycling can also be controlled by optional palm or
foot switches.
6 The operator will fill the bag with product. After the bags are filled, they will be sealed
by the seal bar and detached.
7 The bag is then dropped from the machine by the load shelf.
TABLE 2-1. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION
Page 2-4
OPERATION
Subject Page
Operation .............................................................................3-5
HMI Buttons .........................................................................3-6
Emergency Stop (E-STOP) ..............................................3-7
Air Supply ............................................................................3-9
Adjusting Main Air Pressure ...........................................3-10
Adjusting Air Flow Controls.............................................3-11
Main Power ........................................................................3-12
Power Up Sequence.......................................................3-14
Homing Sequence ..........................................................3-14
Machine Controls ...............................................................3-16
Adjustable Pass-Through ...............................................3-19
Load Shelf ......................................................................3-20
Adjusting HMI Position ...................................................3-21
Main Nip .........................................................................3-22
Bag Positioning/Web Threading .........................................3-22
Weight Kits .....................................................................3-28
Bag in a Box Threading ..................................................3-29
Printer Positioning/Ribbon Threading .................................3-31
Operation Functions ...........................................................3-31
HMI Interface .....................................................................3-32
E-STOP button ...............................................................3-32
E-STOP reset button ......................................................3-32
Start/Stop cycle button ...................................................3-32
AutoTouch Control Screen .................................................3-34
Shortcut Action Icons......................................................3-37
Notification message ......................................................3-38
Languages .....................................................................3-40
Page 3-1
Machine information ....................................................... 3-41
Screen scrolling ............................................................. 3-42
Toggling ON or OFF....................................................... 3-42
Saving a screen ............................................................. 3-43
User Levels ....................................................................... 3-44
User Level Passwords ................................................... 3-45
Operator 1 level ............................................................. 3-46
Operator 2 level ............................................................. 3-47
Setup level ..................................................................... 3-48
Default user level ........................................................... 3-49
Home menu ....................................................................... 3-50
Shortcut Actions ............................................................. 3-50
Job Settings ................................................................... 3-50
Blower ............................................................................ 3-53
Mode .............................................................................. 3-53
Single Mode ............................................................... 3-53
Automatic Mode ......................................................... 3-53
START/STOP Cycle Button Operation ........................... 3-54
Optical Palm Switch Operation....................................... 3-54
Foot Switch Operation.................................................... 3-55
Jobs menu ......................................................................... 3-55
Unsaved jobs ................................................................. 3-56
Save Job ........................................................................ 3-57
Save Job As ................................................................... 3-57
Load Job ........................................................................ 3-57
Settings .......................................................................... 3-58
Options .......................................................................... 3-61
Advanced ....................................................................... 3-69
Configuration Menu ........................................................... 3-69
Firmware ........................................................................ 3-69
Productivity Metrics ........................................................ 3-70
Resetting metrics ........................................................ 3-70
Cycle Times ................................................................... 3-71
Shortcut Actions ............................................................. 3-72
Screensaver ................................................................... 3-73
Users ............................................................................. 3-74
Page 3-2
Default User Level ......................................................3-75
Auto Logout Delay ......................................................3-75
Language ....................................................................3-76
Machine Units System ................................................3-76
Real Time Clock .............................................................3-77
Network Config ...............................................................3-78
Diagnostics menu ..............................................................3-79
Inputs .............................................................................3-79
Monitor Outputs ..............................................................3-80
Monitor Axis....................................................................3-81
Configuration Settings ....................................................3-82
Unwinder Motor ..............................................................3-83
Estop ..............................................................................3-83
Status .............................................................................3-84
Logs ...............................................................................3-86
Main Nip Motor ...............................................................3-87
Sealbar ...........................................................................3-87
Dancer............................................................................3-88
Autobag 550 Printer ...........................................................3-89
Print roll errors ................................................................3-90
Printer Test Menu ...........................................................3-90
Print Quality Label ..........................................................3-90
Ribbon Test Label ..........................................................3-90
Test Label ......................................................................3-91
Validation Label ..............................................................3-91
Print Configuration ..........................................................3-91
Print Last Label ..............................................................3-91
User-Defined Label.........................................................3-91
Load Labels for Printing ..................................................3-92
Printer communications ..................................................3-96
Notification messages ..................................................3-102
Resetting notification messages................................ 3-102
Popup Messages ..........................................................3-103
Page 3-3
BLANK PAGE
Page 3-4
Operation
The machine must be placed into service by an authorized Automated

Packaging Systems Service Technician. Machine installation or
connection to an energy supply prior to being placed into service may be
hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
The machine must have all covers installed during normal operation. Do
not operate the machine without the covers installed.
The warranty period may only be started by an authorized Automated

Packaging Systems Service Technician.
After your machine has been placed into service by an Automated Packaging Systems Service
Technician, operation of your machine may begin. This section will cover operation fundamentals of the
machine.
Page 3-5
HMI Buttons
The HMI is equipped with the 3 buttons below the screen.
FIGURE 3-1. HMI SCREEN
1. E-STOP button. The red E-STOP button is a manually operated Emergency Stop button for the
machine. Pushing the red E-STOP button IN, will place the machine in an emergency stop condition.
The air supply will be exhausted (dumped) from the machine by an electronic valve. Power will be
removed from the drive motors, valve manifold and heat wire system. Pulling the red E-STOP switch
OUT will take the machine out of Emergency Stop mode but will require an E-STOP reset to resume
normal operation.
2. E-STOP reset button. The blue E-STOP reset button is the reset button for the machine after an
Emergency Stop has been initiated. The blue E-STOP reset button will illuminate steady when the
machine needs to be reset from an Emergency Stop. Pushing the button will reset the machine and
allow the machine to enter normal operation again.
Page 3-6
3. START/STOP button. The white START/STOP button is the button used in normal operation of the
machine. The white button will illuminate steady when action is required by the operator. Pressing the
button will start a SINGLE or AUTO MODE cycling sequence (as selected by the operator). It will also
be used to initiate a HOMING sequence when required.
Emergency Stop (E-STOP)

The E-STOP button is to be used in emergency situations where an immediate shutdown of the
machine is required. This is a safety feature for the user and should not be used to stop the machine
between cycling operations. The START/STOP should be used for normal operations to stop the
machine.
The machine will automatically be placed in an E-STOP condition each

time it is powered up. This will prevent unintentional movement of the
machine during power up.
To put the machine in an E-STOP condition, use the following steps:

1. Press the red E-STOP button in. The E-STOP button engaged popup screen will appear on the
screen.
FIGURE 3-2. E-STOP ENGAGED
Page 3-7
To reset the E-STOP condition, use the following steps:
1. Pull out on the red E-STOP button.
2. Momentarily press the blue E-STOP button to reset the E-STOP condition.
3. The machine is now back in an operational state.
FIGURE 3-3. RESET E-STOP
Page 3-8
Air Supply
The air supply for the machine may be exhausted (dumped) and locked out for LOTO procedures. To
dump the air from the machine, use the following steps:
1. Turn the air supply red knob clockwise until the air can be heard exhausting and EXH can be read in
the knob wind (Figure 3-4, Item 1).
2. If the machine is to be locked out for maintenance, place a LOTO device in the location provided in
the dumped position (Figure 3-4, Item 2).
FIGURE 3-4. AIR LOCKOUT
Item Description
1 Air valve in exhaust position
2 Lockout for pad lock
TABLE 3-1. AIR LOCKOUT
Air may remain trapped in the machine after exhausting the air supply.
The load shelf and accumulating funnels are designed to trap air to prevent product from being
released during E-STOP situations. The load shelf and accumulating funnel door will be locked in their
last position when an E-STOP situation occurs. Refer to the Maintenance Module for procedures on
how to remove air
Page 3-9
Adjusting Main Air Pressure
The air requirements for the Autobag 500 and 550 machines are 80 Psi nominal +/- 5 Psi (5.5 bar
nominal +/- .35 bar). The machine will enter an error condition if the air pressure exceeds the limits. To
adjust the air pressure for the machine, use the following steps:
The machine will give a low-pressure warning below 60psi (3.45 bar) and
a high-pressure warning above 90psi (6.9 bar). The machine cannot be
cycled until the air pressure warning has been corrected.
1. Pull up on the gray air adjustment knob located above the air gauge until the orange line can be seen
at the bottom of the knob.
FIGURE 3-5. AIR ADJUSTMENT KNOB UP
Page 3-10
2. Turn the knob CW to increase the air pressure. Turn the knob CCW to decrease the air pressure.
3. When the desired air pressure has been set, push the knob down until the orange line is no longer
visible.
FIGURE 3-6. AIR ADJUSTMENT KNOB DOWN
Adjusting Air Flow Controls

The Autobag 500 and 550 machines have 3 flow controls located on the right side of the machine when
facing the loading area. The flow controls consist of the following:
• Air Blower. Adjusts the amount of air blown into the bag in order to keep it open during bagging.
• Air Pulse. Adjusts the amount of air blown into the bag in order to blow the bag open.
• Air Guide. Adjusts the amount of air used to guide the material when feeding.
To adjust the flow controls, use the following steps:
1. To increase the adjustment, turn the knob counter clockwise (CCW).
2. To decrease the adjustment, turn the knob clockwise (CW).
Page 3-11
FIGURE 3-7. AIR ADJUSTMENTS
Item Description
1 Air blower
2 Air Pulse
3 Air Guide
TABLE 3-2. AIR ADJUSTMENTS
Main Power
There is no physical lockout for electrical power located on the machine.
Refer to the Maintenance Module for correct power requirements.
The main power switch and cord for the Autobag 500 and 550 machines is located on the rear of the
Main Electrical Box (E-BOX). If the machine is an Autobag 550 version, there will be an additional
power switch located on the front of the Printer E-BOX.
Page 3-12
FIGURE 3-8. MAIN E-BOX POWER SWITCH
FIGURE 3-9. PRINTER E-BOX POWER SWITCH
The printer E-BOX power switch should always remain on. Control of the
printer E-BOX should be controlled by the main E-BOX power switch only.
If the printer E-BOX is turned on after the main E-BOX, the machine will
not communicate with the printer correctly and will require a power cycle.
To turn the machine ON or OFF, use the following steps:

1. Plug the machine power cord into an 110V to 240V VAC, 50/60Hz power source.
2. Depress the (I) side of the switch to turn the machine ON.
3. Depress the (O) side of the switch to turn the machine OFF.
Page 3-13
Power Up Sequence
To power up the machine, use the following steps:
1. Turn the main power switch to ON (I).
2. Wait for the machine to boot up. Once the boot sequence is complete, the HOME screen will be
displayed.
3. If the machine is in E-STOP, reset the E-STOP condition.
4. The machine will require a homing sequence. If the machine and accessories are in the home
position, the homing sequence will complete automatically without user action. If the machine or
accessories are not in the home position, the user will be prompted to initiate the homing sequence by
pressing the START/STOP button.
5. Once the homing sequence is completed, the machine is ready for use.
Homing Sequence
When the machine is first powered up, a Homing sequence must be completed before any other
actions may be taken.
For machines already in the home position, the homing sequence will
automatically occur after resetting the E-STOP condition. For machines
not in the home position at power up, the homing sequence will require
operator action via the START/STOP button.
To perform the homing sequence, use the following steps:

1. Turn power on to the machine and wait for the boot sequence to complete.
2. Once the HOME page comes up, the machine will give you the popup page to reset the E-STOP
condition.
Page 3-14
FIGURE 3-10. HOMING SEQUENCE POPUP PAGE
3. Reset the E-STOP condition by pulling out the Red E-STOP button and pressing the Blue E-STOP
Reset button.
4. Once the E-STOP conditions have been reset, the Start/Stop Cycle Button will flash white indicating
the machine requires a Homing sequence.
5. Press the Start/Stop Cycle Button to perform the Homing sequence.
a. The powered unwind dancer will move up and down into its home position.
b. The seal bar will move to its home position.
c. If the machine is equipped with a funnel, the funnel will move to its home position.
6. Once the homing sequence is completed, the machine is ready for operation.
Page 3-15
Machine Controls
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines have several controls located on the machine to allow for
adjustment and operation, refer to Figure 3-11 for locations.
FIGURE 3-11. MACHINE CONTROLS
Item Description Item Description

1 HMI interface 4 Air pressure gauge
2 Emergency Stop (E-STOP) 5 Palm switch (optional)
3 HMI adjustment handles 6 Nip handles
TABLE 3-3. MACHINE CONTROLS
Page 3-16
FIGURE 3-11. MACHINE CONTROLS (CONTINUED)

7 Air dump valve 11 Printer lock handle (550 only)
8 Air Pressure adjustment knob 12 Flow Controls
9 Frame height adjustment bolts 13 Adjustable unwind hubs
10 Locks for wheel casters 14 Unwind release handle
TABLE 3-3. MACHINE CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
Page 3-17
FIGURE 3-11. MACHINE CONTROLS (CONTINUED)

14 Unwind hub adjustment 17 Bag shelf adjustment handles
handles
15 Bag feed switches 18 Printer Panel
16 Pass through adjustment knob
TABLE 3-3. MACHINE CONTROLS (CONTINUED)
Page 3-18
Adjustable Pass-Through
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines have an adjustable pass-through to allow for shorter bag cycling
times. The pass-through is adjusted using the black knurled knob located on the rear of the machine.
FIGURE 3-12. PASS THROUGH ADJUSTMENT KNOB
The pass-through must be adjusted with the machine E-STOPPED and

the air dumped. Otherwise air will push against the seal bar cylinder
making adjustment difficult.
Minimum opening is 0.75 in. (19.05mm), maximum opening is 5in

(12.7cm).
1. To make the pass-through larger, adjust the handle CCW.

2. To make the pass-through smaller, adjust the handle CW.
Page 3-19
Load Shelf
The load shelf has a support shelf that is height adjustable to support different bag lengths. Correct
adjustment of the support shelf aides in proper supporting of bags loaded with product. To adjust the
support shelf, use the following steps:
1. Loosen both handles (Figure 3-11, Item 17) on the load shelf.
a. Adjust the support shelf to the desired position. Ensure that electrical cabling and airlines are free
and clear of obstructions.
b. While holding the support shelf in the desired position, tighten the both handles on the back of
the load shelf.
Page 3-20
Adjusting HMI Position
The HMI Interface position can be adjusted for ease of use by the operator. The screen may be tilted or
rotated for easier viewing and the mounting arm may be swiveled moving the screen in or out from the
machine. Refer to Figure 3-13 for adjustment handles. To loosen the handles and change position:
1. Turn the handle CCW to loosen and move the position.
2. Turn the handle CW tighten and secure the position.
3. Lift up on the handle and turn CW or CCW to reposition the handle on the shaft for easier access.
FIGURE 3-13. HMI ADJUSTMENT HANDLES
ITEM DESCRIPTION
1 HMI screen tilt handle
2 HMI screen swivel handle
3 HMI mount arm swivel handle
TABLE 3-4. HMI ADJUSTMENT HANDLES
Page 3-21
Main Nip
The main nip can be opened and closed using the handles (Figure 3-11, Item 6) located on either side
of the machine. Opening the nip allows for clearing jams, threading material, etc. Rotate the handle to a
horizontal position to open the nip or to a vertical position to close the nip.
Bag Positioning/Web Threading

The powered unwind must be opened to thread bags for machine operation.
1. To open the powered unwind, lift up on the dancer until it locks into place.
2. To release, lift the handle located on the opposite side of the powered unwind arm plate (Figure 3-
14, Item 1)).
FIGURE 3-14. POWERED UNWIND RELEASE HANDLE
To thread the machine with material, use the following steps:

1. Remove the outer hub (Figure 3-15, Item 1) by loosening the yellow handle and sliding it off of the
bag roll shaft (Figure 3-15, Item 2).
Page 3-22
FIGURE 3-15. UNWIND SPOOL
Item Description
1 Outer hub
2 Bag roll shaft
3 Inner hub
TABLE 3-5. UNWIND SPOOL
2. Place a roll of materials onto the bag roll shaft with the material feeding from the bottom side of the
spool.
a. Position the roll on the bag roll shaft to align correctly with any accessories installed. Reposition
the inner hub (Figure 3-15, Item 3) if needed. Material should generally be centered when running
through the machine.
b. Place the outer hub back onto the bag roll shaft and secure the locking handle to hold the spool
of material in place.
3. Open the unwind.
a. Feed material through the unwind going over the top of the middle rollers and under the last
roller.
Page 3-23
FIGURE 3-16. THREADING IN UNWIND
The roller for the unwind is grooved to allow air to escape from the bag roll
during feeding. This prevents air from being trapped in the bags during
feeding.
Machines with raised unwinds or certain accessories will have different

web threading.
For machines with the unwind mounted in the reverse position (roll facing
the inside of the machine), the bag roll needs to feed from the top for
proper bag opening during feeding.
Page 3-24
4. Feed material up and over the rear roller on the machine.
FIGURE 3-17. REAR MACHINE ROLLER
5. For machines with printers installed, lift up the printer and ensure material goes under the
printer/print head.
FIGURE 3-18. CENTER TRAY (550 PRINTER SHOWN)
Page 3-25
6. Feed material over center tray and position edge of material into nip rollers.
a. Using material feed switches located on either side of the printer, feed material until it appears in
the loading area of the machine.
FIGURE 3-19. NIP ROLLER
Page 3-26
When threading bags into the machine, at least two bags must be showing
against the gripper plate for proper machine operations to begin.
The position for the top of the first bag should be roughly equal to the seal
point setting.
FIGURE 3-20. BAGS CORRECTLY POSITIONED FOR OPERATION
7. If required, while holding onto the material open the nips rollers and position bag as needed on the
rollers.
Page 3-27
FIGURE 3-21. LEFT HAND THREADING
FIGURE 3-22. RIGHT HAND THREADING
Weight Kits
Weight kits are available for the powered unwind to aid tensioning heavier duty bag materials.
Item Description
1 Kit, Weight STD 3-003717
2 Kit, Weight Cross bar additional 3-
003734-001
TABLE 3-6. WEIGHT KITS
Page 3-28
Bag in a Box Threading
For machines with the Bag in a Box option, use the following additional instructions for threading:
1. Place the box of materials under the bag in a box option.
Ensure that the correct end of the box is open and that the material feeds
correctly proper bag opening.
2. Feed the material according to the threading diagram in Figure 3-23 and 3-24.
FIGURE 3-23. BAG IN A BOX THREADING LEFT HAND
FIGURE 3-24. BAG IN A BOX THREADING RIGHT HAND
Page 3-29
3. Adjust the tension on the bag in the box option by moving the bar to reposition the weight as needed.
FIGURE 3-25. BAG IN A BOX
Page 3-30
Printer Positioning/Ribbon Threading
Printer positioning/threading is configurable for left and right hand machines.
FIGURE 3-26. PRINTER THREADING
Operation Functions
The Autobag 500 and 550 machine has an HMI operating system that is divided into user levels.
Operator 1, Operator 2 and Setup functions are covered in this section. Refer to the Maintenance
Module additional HMI screens that are for maintenance personal use only.
Page 3-31
HMI Interface
The HMI interface consists of an AutoTouch Control Screen, E-STOP button, E-STOP Reset Button
and START/STOP Cycle Button.
E-STOP button
The red E-STOP stop actuates an emergency stop of the machine. When depressed, the button will
remain depressed and the E-STOP circuit will remove air pressure from the machine placing it in a
stopped mode. This may be actuated at any time during machine operation. To reset the button, it must
be physically pulled out by the operator prior to resetting the machine.
The E-STOP button should not be used as a means to stop the machine.
It should only be used in emergency situations.
E-STOP reset button

The blue E-STOP reset button is used to reset the machine after an E-STOP condition. The button will
illuminate blue when the machine needs to be reset. Press the button momentarily and release to reset
the machine. The blue light will go out when the machine has been reset.
Start/Stop cycle button

The Start/Stop cycle button is used start and stop machine cycles as well as homing the machine
during power up. The button will illuminate white when action by the operator is needed.
The machine may temporarily hold cycling until a condition is fixed (such
as loading a label) but once the holding condition has been corrected, the
machine will continue the cycling sequence. If the Start/Stop cycle button
begins to flash when pressed, this means a machine condition is
preventing it from cycling. If the button has been depressed and is
blinking, once the condition preventing cycling has been corrected the
machine will automatically cycle. To prevent this press the Start/Stop cycle
button once and it will stop blinking, which cancels the request to the
machine to begin cycling.
Page 3-32
FIGURE 3-27. HMI INTERFACE

1 START/STOP Cycle Button 3 E-STOP Button
2 E-STOP Reset Button 4 AutoTouch Control Screen
TABLE 3-7. HMI INTERFACE
Page 3-33
AutoTouch Control Screen
The AutoTouch Control Screen is an Android based touch screen tablet embedded into the HMI
interface. Upon machine power up, the AutoTouch control screen will perform a boot sequence.
No actions are required from the operator during the boot sequence.
Once the boot sequence is complete, the Home screen will be presented to the operator. The home
screen contains icons for various menus and functions.
The icons and menus that appear on the home screen are dependent on the user level selected. Only
icons that are available to that user level will appear on the home screen. If an icon is not present on
the home screen, those functions are not available to the user.
FIGURE 3-28. HOME SCREEN
Page 3-34
1 Home Icon 12 Infeed Wait Icon
2 Jobs Icon 13 Bagger Hold Icon
3 Configuration Icon 14 Auto Cycle Icon
4 Diagnostics Icon 15 Save Job Icon
5 Notification Message Icon 16 Bags/Min field
6 User level selection 17 Total Count field
7 Language Selection 18 Lot Size field
8 Machine Information 19 Lot Count field
9 Shortcut Actions 20 Lot Remaining field
10 Single/Auto Mode Selection 21 Scrolling Notification Messages
11 Blower ON/OFF selection
TABLE 3-8. HOME SCREEN
1. HOME icon. Tapping this icon will take the user to the Home screen.
2. JOBS icon. Tapping this icon will take the user to the Jobs menu.
3. CONFIGURATION icon. Tapping this icon will take the user to Configuration menu.
4. DIAGNOSTICS icon. Tapping this icon will take the user to the Diagnostics menu.
5. NOTIFICATION icon. Tapping this icon will show the user any current notifications or error messages
the machine has.
6. USER LEVEL icon. Tapping this icon will allow the user to select different user levels.
7. LANGUAGE icon. Tapping this icon will allow the user to select an available language.
8. MACHINE INFORMATION. Tapping this icon will allow the user to view machine information.
9. SHORTCUT ACTIONS area. The user may select any of the actions within this area.
10. MODE icon. The user may select between Single and Automatic cycling modes.
11. BLOWER icon. This allows the user to turn the blower ON or OFF between machine cycles.
12. INFEED WAIT icon. Indicates the bagger is waiting for an infeed device to cycle.
13. AUTO CYCLE icon. Indicates the bagger is cycling in the Automatic Mode.
14. BAGGER HOLD icon. Indicates the bagger is being held for an external input.
15. SAVE JOB icon. Tapping this icon will take the user to the jobs menu.
16. BAGS/MIN. Bags/Min is the number of bags being cycled per minute.
Page 3-35
17. TOTAL COUNT. Shows the current total count.
18. LOT SIZE. Shows the current lot size set.
19. LOT COUNT. Shows the current lot count.
20. LOT REMAINING. Show the remaining count in the lot.
21. Scrolling notification messages. The notifications or error messages currently affecting the machine
will scroll continuously in this area until they have been cleared.
The home screen will change with the addition of a Simple Count option.
There is an additional menu available on the home screen when the Count Eye option has been
enabled.
FIGURE 3-29. HOME SCREEN WITH SIMPLE COUNT

1 SimpleCount™ menu 4 Target count number
2 Current count 5 Current count adjust
3 Percentage of count completed
TABLE 3-9. HOME SCREEN WITH SIMPLE COUNT
Page 3-36
Shortcut Action Icons
Shortcut Action Icons show what options are available to be turned ON, OFF or momentarily initiated.
They have three states defined by the color of the icon:
FIGURE 3-30. SHORTCUT ACTION ICONS
1. MOMENTARY. Tap the icon once to initiate the action one time for this shortcut.
2. OFF. This shortcut is OFF, but available. Tap the icon to access the shortcut menu to turn ON.
3. ON. This shortcut is ON. Tap the icon to access the shortcut menu to make changes or turn OFF.
Page 3-37
Notification message
If the machine has any notification or error messages, they will appear in the top of the screen under
the Notification Icon. The number of notifications will be indicated next to the icon. At the bottom right of
the screen a scrolling, short explanation of the notification(s) or error message(s) will appear as well.
FIGURE 3-31. NOTIFICATION ICON
Item Description
1 Notification icon and number of messages
2 Scrolling notifications area
TABLE 3-10. NOTIFICATION MESSAGE AREAS
Page 3-38
To view the notification(s) or error(s) that are currently affecting the machine, use the following steps:
1. Tap the notification icon, a drop down list of notifications and errors will appear.
FIGURE 3-32. NOTIFICATION DROP DOWN MENU
2. Tapping one of the notifications from the drop down menu will pop up the notification screen or error
message associated with the notification.
FIGURE 3-33. NOTIFICATION POPUP
Page 3-39
3. Refer to Page 4-103 for an explanation of each pop up screen and error message.
Notification and error messages will automatically clear when the condition
causing them has been satisfied or cleared. Operator action may be
required to clear the condition.
Languages
To temporarily change the language for the machine, select the language icon and then select the
language desired for the user.
FIGURE 3-34. LANGUAGE ICON
Selecting a language from the top of the screen will only temporarily
change the language for the HMI. The HMI will revert to the default
language set in the USERS menu if the operator level is changed or the
machine is power cycled. If a permanent language change is desired,
refer to User’s menu.
Page 3-40
Machine information
To view machine information at any user level, tap the Machine Information icon in the upper right
corner of the screen. This will display the machines current information to include:
1. Machine Serial Number.
2. Host Name.
3. Bootloader Version.
4. Application Version.
5. Motion Version.
6. Heat Version.
7. FPGA Version.
8. Printer Version.
9. Atlas 1, 2, 3 and 4 version.
10. HMI Version.
FIGURE 3-35. MACHINE INFORMATION
Page 3-41
Screen scrolling
Some screens may scroll up or down to access additional information or menus. A blue bar will appear
on the right hand side of the screen to indicate that it can scroll up or down. Use your finger to scroll the
menu up or down.
FIGURE 3-36. SCROLL BAR
Toggling ON or OFF
Some menus will have the option to toggle a feature ON or OFF. Toggling a feature ON or OFF is
accomplished in the following way:
1. Tap the ON/OFF switch icon, this will toggle the switch icon either ON or OFF.
FIGURE 3-37. TOGGLING ON OR OFF
Page 3-42
Saving a screen
Some screens that require data entry will pop up a numeric menu. These entries may need to be saved
prior to exiting the menu.
To save a setting in a screen or menu, select the Save icon which is in the lower right-hand corner of
the menu. To exit a screen or menu without saving, select the Exit icon which is in the lower left-hand
corner of the menu. To backspace an entered value, use the Backspace icon.
FIGURE 3-38. SAVE, EXIT AND BACKSPACE ICONS
Item Description
1 Exit icon
2 Save icon
3 Backspace icon
TABLE 3-11. SAVE, EXIT AND BACKSPACE ICONS
Changes that are made immediately take effect in the HMI. Changes will
be lost on power cycling unless they are saved to the job. Refer to Saving
a Job.
Page 3-43
User Levels
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines have 7 user levels. The user levels are:
1. OPERATOR 1
2. OPERATOR 2
3. SETUP
4. MAINTENANCE
5. SERVICE
6. ENGINEERING 1
7. ENGINEERING 2
Service and Engineering levels are accessible by authorized Automated

Packaging Systems Service Technicians only.
To access each level, a password will be required for each level above the one currently selected. The
user level that is currently logged into will appear in the user level selection in the top right of the
display. To select a different level, use the following steps:
1. Tap the user level selection. A drop down menu will appear.
FIGURE 3-39. USER LEVEL SELECTION MENU
Page 3-44
2. Select the new level by tapping the level desired. A keyboard will appear.
FIGURE 3-40. SELECTING USER LEVEL
3. Enter the password for that level.
A password is not required to move down to a lower level.
4. Tap LOGIN to change the user level or tap CLOSE to exit back to the previous user level.
User Level Passwords

USER NAME DEFAULT PASSWORD
Operator 1 1111
Operator 2 2222
Setup 3333
Maintenance Refer to Maintenance Module
Service Access not authorized
Engineering 1 Access not authorized
TABLE 3-12. USER LEVEL PASSWORDS
Page 3-45
Operator 1 level
The Operator 1 level is the basic mode of operation. The user will have access to the HOME menu only
and will be able to operate the machine for the current job loaded only. LOT COUNT may be
changed/reset and LOT REMAINING may be reset at this user level as well. They will not be able to
change the mode of operation or make any other changes. If shortcuts appear on the Home screen, the
Operator will only be able to utilize momentary icons that appear in orange.
FIGURE 3-41. OPERATOR 1
Page 3-46
Operator 2 level
The Operator 2 level is the next highest mode of operation. The user will have access to the HOME
menu and the JOBS menu. In the HOME menu screen the user will be able to change the mode of
operation from SINGLE to AUTO. TOTAL COUNT, LOT SIZE and LOT COUNT may be changed at this
user level as well. If shortcuts appear on the Home screen, the Operator will be able to use momentary
shortcuts only.
In the JOB Menu, the user will be able to load other jobs that have been previously saved.
FIGURE 3-42. OPERATOR 2
Page 3-47
Setup level
The Setup level is the next highest mode of operation and should only be accessed by authorized
personnel. The user will have access to the HOME, JOBS, CONFIGURATION and DIAGNOSTICS
menus.
1. HOME menu. The user will be able to select or deselect the Shortcut Actions that have been loaded
as well as change settings for the loaded Shortcut Actions. They will be able to change the mode of
operation from SINGLE to AUTO. TOTAL COUNT, LOT SIZE and LOT COUNT may be changed at this
user level as well.
2. JOB menu. The user will be able to SAVE JOB, SAVE JOB AS or LOAD jobs. They will also be able
to adjust SETTINGS and OPTIONS for each job.
3. CONFIGURATION menu. The user will be able to access the FIRMWARE, PRODUCTIVITY
METRICS, CYCLE TIMES, SHORTCUT ACTIONS, SCREENSAVER, USERS, REAL TIME CLOCK
and NETWORK CONFIG menus.
4. DIAGNOSTICS menu. The user will be able to access the INPUTS, MONITOR OUTPUTS,
MONITOR AXIS, CONFIGURATION SETTINGS, UNWINDER MOTOR, ESTOP, STATUS, LOGS,
MAIN NIP MOTOR, SEALBAR and DANCER menus.
FIGURE 3-43. SETUP
Page 3-48
Default user level
The machine is set for a default user level of SETUP at power up from the factory. The default user
level may be changed to any desired level, but must be done in Setup level or higher. To change the
default user level, use the following steps:
1. Select the configuration menu.
2. Select the USERS menu.
3. Select the desired default user level from the SELECT USER drop down menu.
a. Tap SET AS DEFAULT.
b. A notification will display DEFAULT USER SET TO (the level selected).
4. The machine will now power up in that level.
FIGURE 3-44. DEFAULT USER LEVEL
Page 3-49
Home menu
The Home menu is where machine and job operation is monitored. Sub menus located within the Home
screen are available to users based on the logged in security level.
Shortcut Actions
Machine Shortcut Actions may be loaded onto the Home screen. These actions may be toggled ON or
OFF depending on the user level entered. Refer to Shortcut Actions menu.
Job Settings
Job settings may be adjusted depending on the user level entered and includes:
FIGURE 3-45. JOB SETTINGS
Item Description
1 Bags/Min
2 Edit Total Count icon
3 Change Lot Size icon
4 Edit Lot Count icon
5 Reset Lot Remaining icon
TABLE 3-13. JOB SETTINGS
1. Bags/Min is the number of bags being cycled per minute.

2. Total Count shows the total number of bags that have been cycled in the current lot. This may be
adjusted or reset.
Page 3-50
FIGURE 3-46. RESET TOTAL COUNT
a. Select the Edit icon the right of the count number.

b. Add or subtract to the count using the + or – icons.
c. Reset the bag count using the reset icon.
(1). A popup will appear asking ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO RESET TOTAL COUNT?
(2). Select the green check mark to confirm or select the red X to exit without resetting the
count.
3. Lot Size shows the current lot size. This may be changed.
FIGURE 3-47. CHANGE LOT SIZE
a. Select Change Lot Size icon.

b. Enter the desired lot count size number.
Page 3-51
c. Select the SAVE to save the change or EXIT to exit without saving.
4. Lot Count shows the current number of bags in the lot. This may be adjusted or reset.
FIGURE 3-48. LOT COUNT
a. Select the Edit icon the right of the count number.

b. Add or subtract to the count using the + or – icons.
c. Reset the bag count using the reset icon.
(1). A popup will appear asking ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO RESET TOTAL COUNT?
count.
5. Lot Remaining shows the number of bags remaining in the lot. This may be reset.
FIGURE 3-49. RESET LOT COUNT
Page 3-52
a. Select the Reset Lot Remaining icon.
(1). A popup will appear asking ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO RESET LOT COUNT?
count.
Blower
The blower may be turned ON or OFF in between cycle operations. Tap the BLOWER icon to toggle
between BLOWER OFF and BLOWER ON. The blower will turn OFF when the machine goes into idle.
Mode
The machine can be operated in SINGLE or AUTO (automatic) mode and can be changed depending
on user level entered. To change operating modes, use the following steps:
1. Tap the MODE icon located at the bottom left of the screen to toggle between SINGLE and AUTO
mode.
AUTO mode will not be available when a footswitch, single or dual palm
switch has been enabled.
Single Mode
Single mode operation results in one machine cycle which is initiated by the Operator using one of the
following devices:
1. START/STOP Cycle Button.
2. Optical Palm Switch.
3. Footswitch.
Automatic Mode
In automatic mode, a job lot size can be set. When the START/STOP Cycle Button is pressed, the
machine will automatically cycle for the entire lot size. When operating in Automatic Mode, the yellow
Auto Cycle icon will appear in the footer of the HMI screen.
Page 3-53
START/STOP Cycle Button Operation
The START/STOP Cycle Button when pressed will result in one bag cycle of the machine if set to
SINGLE mode of operation. If set to AUTO mode of operation, the machine will run continuously for the
duration of the LOT size set. The button will be illuminated white during the bagging cycle. For AUTO
mode of operation, a popup message will also indicate when the LOT count has been reached.
Optical Palm Switch Operation

The machine can be configured with a single or dual Optical Palm Switches. The palm switches are
actuated by placing the operator’s hand(s) on the black sensor area of the switch(s). For a single palm
switch configuration, one hand is needed to actuate a bag cycle. For dual palm switch configuration,
both hands are needed to actuate a bag cycle.
Palm switches are not considered a safety device.
AUTO mode is not available in palm switch operations.
Palm switches only require momentary actuation to activate a machine

cycle. Holding the switches throughout the entire machine cycle is not
required.
The palm switches have two LED status lights on them. The left light will be green when the palm
switch is active and ready to use. The right LED will be red and will turn green when the palm switch
has actuated from having a hand placed on it.
Page 3-54
FIGURE 3-50. PALM SENSOR LEDS
Foot Switch Operation

The footswitch when pressed will result in one bag cycle of the machine. The START/STOP button will
illuminate during the bag cycle.
Jobs menu
The Jobs menu is where jobs are managed. The Jobs menu contains sub menus that are available to
users based on the logged in security level.
The default job settings can be changed but cannot be saved. The default
job cannot be deleted. Any changes made to the default job will revert
back to the default settings at power up.
Changes made to job settings will take effect immediately but will be lost if
a new job is loaded or power to the machine is cycled.
Page 3-55
Unsaved jobs
When the job title turns orange, job settings have been changed and will require saving the job. Jobs
that have settings changed and are not saved will revert back to default when power is cycled or the job
is reloaded.
Job names must meet the following requirements:
1. Must not be empty.
2. Must contain only English characters and numbers.
3. Must not contain any of the following characters: # % & { } / \ < > * . ? $ : @ ’ , ; |
4. Must not contain more than 16 characters.
FIGURE 3-51. JOB NOT SAVED
To save an unsaved job, use the following steps:

1. In the orange job title block, select the shortcut icon for the Jobs menu or select the JOBS icon from
the top of the screen.
2. To save the job to the current job loaded, select Save Job.
3. To save the job as a new job, select Save Job As.
b. Name the new job.
c. Select the green check mark to save or the red X to cancel.
Page 3-56
Save Job
To save changes to the currently loaded job, use the following steps:
1. Select the Jobs menu.
2. Tap the Save Job icon.
Save Job As
To save changes to a new job, use the following steps:
1. Make changes to the job as required.
2. Select the Jobs menu.
3. Tap the Save Job As icon.
a. Rename the Job Name.
b. Select Save Changes As.
Load Job
To load or delete a previously saved job, use the following steps:
1. Select the JOB menu.
2. Tap the LOAD JOB icon.
3. Select the job to be loaded or deleted.
a. If LOAD is selected, the job will show as having been loaded.
b. If DELETE is selected, a confirmation popup will ask ARE YOU SURE?
(1). Select DELETE to delete the job.
(2). Select CANCEL to exit without deleting the job.
A job that is currently loaded cannot be deleted. To delete a loaded job,

the user must load a different job first prior to deleting the current job.
Page 3-57
Settings
Job settings are saved for each job. Optimal settings (based on materials and product loaded) will
ensure proper and consistent machine operation/cycling. Job settings that may be adjusted are listed
below. To adjust a setting, use the following steps:
1. Tap the field for the setting to be edited.
2. Enter the desired value into the popup menu.
If an entered value is out of range for the setting, the machine will default
to the lowest or highest value within its range for that setting.
a. Select the green check mark icon to save the setting.

b. Select red X icon to exit without saving.
3. Once a job setting has been changed, the job setting will need to be saved for the job.
FIGURE 3-52. SETTINGS MENU
Page 3-58
4. SEAL TIME. From 0 to 3 seconds. This controls how long the seal bar remains closed while sealing.
A setting of 0 seal time does not prevent the seal bar from moving during
a bag cycle.
The seal bar will remain closed longer than the set seal time during the
first seal. This is due to the heat wire having to come up to temperature
after being at idle. After the first cycle, the seal bar will remain closed at
the set seal time.
5. SEAL TEMPERATURE. From 200 to 450°F (93-232°C). Seal temperature can be adjusted for
environmental conditions or bag materials.
A seal temperature setting between 360-390°F (182-199°C) is

recommended for reflex heat wire machines.
6. SEAL POINT. From 0.25 to 5 inches (0.635 to 12.7cm). This controls the point at which the bag is
sealed relative to the opening of the bag +/- 0.0625 inches (+/-1.59mm). A recommended seal point is 1
inch (2.54cm).
On Autobag 550 machines (with the printer), changing the seal point
affects the print cycle. If the seal point is changed, the repeat distance
may need to be changed to a larger value if the repeat distance is set
close to the bags limit.
7. LOAD TIME. From 0 to 3600 seconds. This controls the amount of time the seal bar stays in the
home position between bagging cycles to allow for product loading.
If signaling is being used, load time will be ignored by the machine. If a

delay in loading is needed while using signaling, an input delay in the
signaling screen must be set.
Page 3-59
8. AIR PULSE. From 0 to 3 seconds. This controls the amount of time the air pulse remains on after
indexing a new bag.
If the air pulse value is set too high, the bag will flutter open and closed
interfering with product loading.
9. REPEAT DISTANCE. From 2 to 108 inches (5.08 to 274.32cm). This controls the distance the
machine will feed out a bag if a perforation is missed. The repeat distance may be measured on the
material web from perforation to perforation. Repeat distance must be set equal to or greater than the
current bag length.
Repeat distance for an Autobag 550 machine should not be set to less
than 5.5in (14cm) as this will cause the main nip to stall and ruin the next
bag.
10. ADVANCE DELAY. From 0-3 seconds. This controls the delay of the next bag advancing after the
machine tears off a bag.
11. PRINT LOCATION. From 1.5 to 108 inches (3.81cm to 274.32cm). This controls the location of the
printed label on the bag relative to the print mark or perforation. PRINT LOCATION will vary depending
on the size of the label and bag being used.
Software prevents labels from being printed past the bag perforation. In
cases where the print location setting would place the label past the
perforation, it will automatically default to 5/16” (8mm) from the
perforation.
12. PRINT DARKNESS/HEAT. From 0-30. Controls the darkness of the printed label with 0 being the
lightest and 30 being the darkest. The optimal range is between 16-22.
13. PRINT SPEED. From 2 to 12 inches/seconds (5.08 to 30.48 cm/sec). Controls the speed that the
bag is indexed when a label is being printed on the bag. A PRINT SPEED of 6 inches/second (15.24
cm/sec) is recommended.
Page 3-60
Options
FIGURE 3-53. OPTIONS MENU
Each job has options that can be turned ON or OFF if the machine has been configured for those
options. Options saved are individual to each job.
Options may be turned ON in JOB OPTIONS without the corresponding

shortcut icon on the HOME screen. There will be no indication on the
HOME screen that the option is ON.
Options that are not available will be greyed out. Options that are available to be selected will be in blue
and may include:
1. PRINT CYCLE. Turns print cycle ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if printing is not required.
2. SEAL BAR. Turns seal bar ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if sealing of bags is not required.
Page 3-61
3. STRIP-N-RIP. Turns STRIP-N-RIP ON or OFF with additional menu choices. Turn this OFF if
STRIP-N-RIP is not required. If STRIP-N-RIP is required, the following options are available:
a. STRIP-N-RIP COUNT. Set the number of bags to be Strip-n-Ripped per cycle.
b. RESET CURRENT COUNT. Reset the current strip rip count.
FIGURE 3-54. STRIP RIP MENU
4. AIR GUIDE. Turns the Air Guide ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if guiding of bags during indexing is not
required.
5. AIR PULSE. Turns the Air Pulse ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if opening of bags is not required during
cycling.
6. COUNT EYE. Turns count eye ON or OFF with additional menu choices. Turn this OFF if COUNT
EYE is not required. If COUNT EYE is required, the following options are available:
a. SMARTCOUNT™. Select if a SmartCount is installed.
b. SIMPLECOUNT™. Select if a SimpleCount is installed.
c. COUNT EYE TARGET. Sets the target number of items for the count eye during bagging.
Page 3-62
d. COUNT EYE DELAY BEFORE CYCLE. Sets the count eye delay before cycle in seconds. This
is the amount of time between the last item counted and the machine cycling.
FIGURE 3-55. COUNT EYE MENU
7. BAG KICKER. Not enabled on the Autobag 500 and 550 machines.
8. TRIM SEAL. Turns the Trim Seal ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if trim seal is not required or optioned on
the machine. If trim seal is required, the following options are available:
a. BLOWER DELAY. Sets the delay in seconds for the trim seal blower.
b. BLOWER DURATION. Sets the duration the trim sea blower will blow after the blower delay.
Optimal setting for the BLOWER DELAY is 0.05 seconds and BLOWER
DURATION is 0.2 seconds.
Trim Seal will not function as designed when used in conjunction with Seal
Flatteners.
Page 3-63
FIGURE 3-56. TRIM SEAL MENU
TRIM SEAL should only be enabled on trim wire equipped machines.
9. MULTI BATCH. Turns Multi Batch ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if multi batch is not required. If multi
batch is required, the following options are available:
a. Batch Count. Set the Batch Count to the desired number.
Multi batch is only available when the machine is tied to an infeed system
and signaling is turned ON.
FIGURE 3-57. MULTI BATCH
Page 3-64
10. SEAL FLATTENER. Turns the Seal Flattener ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if the seal flattener is not
required. If seal flattener is required, the following options are available:
a. Seal flattener OFF POSITION may be selected to DROPPED or RAISED. This is the position the
seal flatteners will remain when OFF.
FIGURE 3-58. SEAL FLATTENER MENU
Seal Flatteners are designed to be used with bags that are 4” (10 cm) or
wider.
11. BAG GRIPPER. Not enabled on the Autobag 500 and 550 machines.
12. ACCUMULATING FUNNEL. Turns the accumulating funnel ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if the
accumulating funnel is not required. If the accumulating funnel is required, the following options are
available:
a. CLOSED or OPEN MODE. Sets the default position for the funnel door during funnel operation.
b. TIME DELAY BEFORE OPEN. Sets the time delay in seconds of the funnel door prior to opening
during funnel operation.
c. BATCH TIME. Sets the amount of time in seconds to complete a batch during funnel operation.
d. BLOWER OFF DELAY. Sets the delay time in seconds for turning off the blower during funnel
operation once the door has entered the bag.
Page 3-65
FIGURE 3-59. ACCUMULATING FUNNEL MENU
13. AIR BLOWER. Turns the air blower ON or OFF. If the air blower is not required, turn this OFF.
14. CONVEYOR. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 and 650 machines.
15. SIGNALING. Turns signaling ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if signaling is not required. If the signaling
is required, the following options are available:
a. SIGNALING MODE. Indicates what mode the signaling is set to.
b. INPUT DELAY. Set the input delay in seconds.
The input delay can be used to set a desired time hesitation during loading
when using signaling.
c. OUTPUT DELAY. Sets the output delay in seconds.
Page 3-66
FIGURE 3-60. SIGNALING MENU
16. SUPPORT SHELF. Turns the support shelf ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if the support shelf is not
required. If the support shelf is required, the following options are available:
a. OFF POSITION. Sets the default position off the support shelf in the OFF position. The default
position may be set to:
(1). RAISED.
(2). DROPPED.
b. SHAKE. Turns the simple shaker function ON or OFF.
c. SHAKE TRIGGER. Sets the input for the shake trigger. It may be set to:
(1). END OF CYCLE
(2). COUNT EYE.
(3). EXTERNAL INPUT.
d. SHAKE TIME DOWN. Sets the shake time down in seconds.
e. SHAKE TIME UP. Sets the shake time up in seconds.
f. START SHAKE COUNT. Used for Smart Count of Simple Count shake trigger only. Sets the start
shake count in seconds.
g. SHAKE COUNT. Number of times the shelf will shake per cycle.
When adjusting SHAKE TIME DOWN, SHAKE TIME UP, START SHAKE
COUNT or END OF CYCLE SHAKE COUNT, the number input menu will
always appear below SHAKE TRIGGER selection. Scroll up to view the
number input menu if needed.
Page 3-67
FIGURE 3-61. SUPPORT SHELF MENU
17. SURE FILL. Turns the SureFill™ ON or OFF. Turn this OFF if SureFill is not required. If SureFill is
required, the following options are available:
a. AIR PULSE DELAY. Sets the air pulse delay in seconds.
b. AIR PULSE RETRIES. Sets the number of retries for the air pulse.
c. BAG OPEN DELAY. Sets the bag open delay in seconds.
FIGURE 3-62. SURE FILL MENU
18. Bag Opener. Turns the Bag Opener function ON or OFF. Turn this OFF is Bag Opener is not
required. If Bag Opener is required, the following options are available:
a. BAG OPENER. Toggled ON or OFF.
b. BAG OPENER VERIFY. Toggled ON or OFF.
Page 3-68
c. BAG OPENER DELAY BEFORE RETRACT. 0-3 seconds.
d. BAG OPENER AIR BLOWER DURATION. 0-3 seconds.
e. BAG OPENER RETRY COUNT. 0-65535
f. BAG OPENER RETRY COUNT REACHED ACTION. Error or Reject.
g. BAG REJECT COUNT FOR ERROR. 0-65535
Advanced
Advanced settings are available to Maintenance users and above. Refer to the Maintenance Module.
Configuration Menu
The configuration menu is where machine configuration changes may be made as well as information
about the machine may be viewed. The configuration menu contains 8 sub menus that are available to
users based on the logged in security level.
Firmware
Shows the current firmware versions installed in the machine and also where new firmware versions
may be loaded and installed.
FIGURE 3-63. FIRMWARE MENU
Firmware updates are performed in this menu but require Maintenance User level or higher. Refer to
the Maintenance Module for firmware update procedures.
Page 3-69
Productivity Metrics
The PRODUCTIVITY METRICS menu can be viewed for (3) different types of metrics:
1. USER. This menu shows the metrics for the current user. User metrics can be reset.
2. SERVICE. This menu shows the metrics for the machine since the last service. Service metrics can
be reset and should be reset by the Service Technician during servicing.
3. LIFETIME. This menu shows the metrics for the lifetime of the machine. Lifetime metrics cannot be
reset.
Resetting metrics
To reset the USER or SERVICE productivity metrics, select RESET (USER or SERVICE) METRICS
located at the bottom of each menu.
The lifetime cycle count metric is stored in the machine’s memory.

Maximum lifetime cycle count is 4,294,967,295.
FIGURE 3-64. PRODUCTIVITY METRICS
The metrics that are viewable are:

1. POWER CYCLE COUNT. Shows the number of times the machine has been power cycled (turned
OFF then ON).
2. CYCLE COUNT. Shows the number of times the machine has been cycled.
Page 3-70
3. E-STOP COUNT. Shows the number of times the machine has been placed in E-STOP.
4. E-STOP TIME. Shows the number of minutes the machine has been in an E-STOP condition while
powered ON.
5. IDLE TIME. Shows the number of minutes the machine has been in a ready to run condition without
cycling bags.
6. CYCLE TIME. Shows the number on minutes the machine has been cycling.
7. SLEEP TIME. This metric is reserved for a future Green Energy feature.
8. MISCELLANEOUS TIME. Shows the miscellaneous time in minutes. Miscellaneous time is any time
that is not covered under any of the other cycle time definitions.
9. ERROR TIME. Shows the number of minutes the machine has been in an error state.
10. TOTAL TIME. Shows the total machine time in minutes.
Cycle Times
The Cycle Times screen displays “live” times from the machine during operation. When the machine is
in an idle state or not operating, these times will be zero. Times will only be given while the machine is
cycling or operating.
FIGURE 3-65. CYCLE TIMES MENU
1. PRINTING TIME. Displays the amount of time for printing labels in seconds.
2. ADVANCING TIME. Displays the amount of time to advance a bag in seconds.
3. OPENING TIME. Displays the amount of time the air pulse uses to open the bag in seconds.
Page 3-71
4. FILLING TIME. Displays the amount of time for loading bags in seconds.
5. SEALING TIME. Displays the amount of time for sealing bags in seconds.
6. BAGS/MIN. Displays the number of bags per minute.
Shortcut Actions
Shortcut actions may be added to the home screen for the operator to access easily. Selecting the
shortcuts in this menu will add the associated icon to home screen allowing the operator to access that
function.
FIGURE 3-66. SHORTCUT MENU
1. FEED BAG. Turns the feed bag function ON or OFF. Allows the user to feed the next bag.
2. SEAL FLATTENER. Turns the seal flatteners option ON or OFF.
3. MULTI-BATCH. Turns the multi-batch function ON or OFF. Used with a scale or counter. Allows the
operator to run an accessory multiple times (such as a funnel) per bag cycle in order to fill one bag
(example: filling a 5 pound bag one pound at a time).
4. STRIP-N-RIP. Turns the Strip-n-Rip function ON or OFF. Sets the machine so that it doesn’t tear the
perforation on each bag for X number of bags, where X equals the Strip-n-Rip count. TRIM SEAL and
STRIP RIP should not be turned ON at the same time.
5. TRIM SEAL. Turns the trim seal option ON or OFF. Allows the machine to trim excess bag material
from the seal.
6. THREAD. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 and 650 machines.
7. UNGRIP BAG. Turns the Ungrip Bag function ON or OFF. Allows the user to disengage the bag
grippers.
8. FUNNEL. Turns the funnel option ON or OFF.
Page 3-72
9. SIGNALING. Turns the signaling function ON or OFF.
10. COUNT EYE. Turns the Count Eye ON or OFF. Allows the operator to use a SmartCount™ or
SimpleCount™ option. When these options are turned ON, an additional menu will appear on the home
screen.
11. SUPPORT SHELF. Turn the support shelf function ON or OFF. Allows the operator to enable or
disable the support shelf as needed. The standard support shelf also allows for it to be used a simple
shaker.
12. CONVEYOR. Not enabled on the Autobag 500 and 550 machines.
13. OPEN BAG. Turns the open bag function ON or OFF. Allows the user to blow open a bag and cycle
an accumulating funnel door into a closed bag.
Screensaver
Screensaver allows for the screensaver function to be turned ON or OFF. When turned ON, the screen
will go blank after no activity for the set timer. Touch the screen to bring back the HMI menu.
1. SCREENSAVER ENABLED. Turns the screensaver ON or OFF.
2. SCREENSAVER TIME. Sets the amount of time the screen will turn off after no activity.
60 seconds is the recommended minimum time for the screensaver.
FIGURE 3-67. SCREENSAVER MENU
Page 3-73
Users
Passwords, Default Language, Machine Units System setting and AUTO LOGOUT DELAY may be
changed in this menu. The Default User (power up level) may also be set in this menu.
The machine must be in the SETUP user level or above to change the
Default User level.
To change the password for a user level, use the following steps:
1. Tap the SELECT USERS menu and select the user level that you wish to change the password for.
2. Type in the desired password in the NEW PASSWORD field. Repeat for the CONFIRM PASSWORD
field.
Tap SHOW PASSWORD (a check mark will appear when selected) to see
the characters typed in for the password.
3. Select SAVE. The password has now been changed for that user level.
Page 3-74
Default User Level
To change the default user level that the machine powers up in, use the following steps:
1. Select the desired user level from the SELECT USERS menu.
2. Tap SET AS DEFAULT. The selected user level has now been set as the Default User during power
up.
The default user level will appear on the left side of the menu under the
SET AS DEFAULT icon.
Auto Logout Delay

User levels may have an auto logout delay set for them that will automatically log them out of the
current level if no user action is taken. AUTO LOGOUT DELAY is the field that shows how long (in
minutes) before a user will be logged out of that level to the default user level. A popup window in the
upper right corner of the screen will let the user know they will be logged out in 60 seconds if they don’t
take any action (touching the screen).
A setting of 0 in AUTO LOGOUT DELAY will cause that user level to not
be logged out unless the user purposely selects a different user level.
FIGURE 3-68. PASSWORD MENU
Page 3-75
Language
The HMI language may be defaulted for each user level. Changing the language choice here will be a
permanent selection and the machine will power up in this language choice. This is done on a per user
level, so Operator 1 may be set to one language choice and Operator 2 may be set to another
language choice. To change the language for a user level, use the following steps:
1. Select the drop down menu for language.
2. Tap on the desired language.
3. Select the desired user level to change the language for.
4. Tap SAVE. A green confirmation message will appear in the upper right corner.
Machine Units System

The machine may be changed from Standard (US) to Metric (SI) units.
This is a global setting for the machine.
To change the machine units, use the following steps:

1. Tap the drop down menu for the machine units.
2. Select either US (standard) or SI (metric).
3. Select SAVE.
Page 3-76
Real Time Clock
The machines Real Time Clock is set within this screen. To set the time and/or day, use the following
steps:
1. Tap on each field within the menu that needs to be changed. A number pad will popup.
2. Edit the number as needed for each field. Select the green check mark to save.
Only the fields that need to be updated, need to be changed.
The Real Time Clock does not automatically adjust for Daylight Savings
Time.
FIGURE 3-69. REAL TIME CLOCK
Page 3-77
Network Config
The Network Configuration allows for the machine to be configured for network connections. This
allows for remote accessing of the machine.
FIGURE 3-70. NETWORK MENU
1. GENERAL.
a. Host name.
b. Domain.
c. DNS Server.
2. WIRED INTERFACE. The wired interface menu allows for network configuration settings to connect
the machine to a network using LAN.
a. Addressing Mode. The following modes may be selected:
(1). DHCP
(2). Manual
(3). Disable
b. IP Address.
c. Netmask.
d. Gateway.
e. MAC Address.
Page 3-78
Diagnostics menu
The diagnostics menu is where diagnostic and troubleshooting changes can be monitored, tested or
changed. The diagnostics menu contains 16 sub menus that are available to users based on the logged
in user level.
Inputs
Machine inputs may be monitored live in this menu for proper operation. Inputs will change from the
RED X in the circle to a GREEN CHECK MARK in a circle when the input has been triggered
When monitoring inputs, a delay in reporting may be noticed and fast

changing inputs will be difficult to see change state.
FIGURE 3-71. INPUTS MENU
Page 3-79
Monitor Outputs
Machine outputs may be monitored live in this menu for proper operation.
When monitoring outputs, a delay in reporting may be noticed and fast

changing inputs will be difficult to see change state.
FIGURE 3-72. MONITOR OUTPUTS
Page 3-80
Monitor Axis
Machine Axes may be monitored in this menu.
The axes that may be monitored are:
1. Main Nip. The Output (%), Position, Temperature (Temp) and Bus Voltage (in Volts) may be
monitored.
2. Unwinder. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 and 650 machines.
3. Seal Bar. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 and 650 machines.
4. Dancer. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 and 650 machines.
When the machine is not operating, some fields may display a ?.? in the
field.
FIGURE 3-73. MONITOR AXIS MENU
Page 3-81
Configuration Settings
This menu allows for machine configuration settings and logs to be exported or imported from a USB
drive. To export the configuration settings, use the following steps:
1. Place a USB thumb drive in the USB port on the back of the HMI. The thumb drive must be in
FAT 32 format in order to be recognized.
2. From the DIAGNOSTICS menu, select CONFIGURATION SETTING.
3. Press the EXPORT icon once.
FIGURE 3-74. CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
4. When the file has been exported a green toast message will appear in the upper right corner of the
screen confirming the file has been exported.
FIGURE 3-75. EXPORT TOAST MESSAGE
Page 3-82
Unwinder Motor
This menu displays the status for the unwinder servo and drive as well as information for
troubleshooting the unwinder motor.
FIGURE 3-76. UNWINDER 2 MOTOR MENU
Estop
This menu displays the status of the reporting contacts in E-STOP circuit.
FIGURE 3-77. ESTOP
Page 3-83
Status
In this menu, machine statuses may be monitored.
FIGURE 3-78. STATUS MENU
1. BAGGER STATUS. The machines current status is displayed here. This will change with each state
the machine enters.
a. FAULT. The machine is currently in a FAULT state.
b. DIAGNOSTIC. The machine is currently in a DIAGNOSTIC mode.
c. IDLE. The machine is currently IDLE.
d. END OF LOT. The machine has reached the end of the lot.
e. CYCLE FILLING.
f. ESTOP. The machine is in an E-STOP condition.
g. RECOVERING.
h. RECOVERING WAITING.
i. STARTING.
Page 3-84
2. AIR PRESSURE. The current machine air pressure is displayed in psi or kPa.
3. PERFORATION. Displays missed perforations and statuses. The following sub menus are available
by tapping on PERFORATION.
a. CONSECUTIVE MISSED. Displays the number of consecutive missed perforations.
b. TOTAL MISSED. Displays the total number of missed perforations.
c. TOTAL DETECTED. Displays the total number of detected perforations.
FIGURE 3-79. PERFORATION STATUS
Page 3-85
Logs
This menu displays fault logs for the machine. They are broken into categories consisting of:
FIGURE 3-80. LOG LIST
1. CLEAR LOGS. The CLEAR XXXX LOGS will clear the logs that are currently selected.
2. ALL. Show all logs together in chronological order.
3. ERROR. Shows the error logs for the machine.
4. POWER. Shows the power logs for the machine.
5. FAULT. Shows the fault logs for the machine.
6. FAILURE. Shows the failure logs for the machine.
7. DRIVE. Shows the drive logs for the machine.
8. ENGINEER. Shows the engineer logs for the machine.
Engineering logs are only available in the Engineering Level 1 or above.
Page 3-86
Main Nip Motor
This menu displays information for troubleshooting the main nip motor.
FIGURE 3-81. MAIN NIP MOTOR
Sealbar
This menu displays information for troubleshooting the sealbar. It displays the Main Air Pressure for the
machine as well as inputs and outputs for the sealbar. The sealbar open/close and heatbar
engage/disengage functions are only available in the Maintenance User level or higher.
FIGURE 3-82. SEALBAR MENU
Page 3-87
Dancer
This menu displays information for troubleshooting the powered unwind.
FIGURE 3-83. DANCER MENU
Page 3-88
Autobag 550 Printer
The Autobag 550 machines are configured with a DATAMAX H class printer. The printer control panel
for the Autobag 550 is located on the back of the main E-BOX. The control panel allows for access of
the printer menus.
The Autobag 550 Printer information pertains to the DATAMAX H class

printer only.
The printer maintains a print position consistency of 1/8” (3.2mm) during

printing operations.
FIGURE 3-84. PRINTER CONTROL PANEL
Page 3-89
Print roll errors
When the machine experiences a print roll error, use the following steps:
1. Correct the condition causing the error.
2. Clear the error messages on the HMI screen.
3. Prior to resuming cycling, manually thread one bag out using the thread rocker switches or the
FEEDBAG icon on the HOME screen.
Failure to thread out one bag after a printer error will cause the bag web to
unthread from the machine when the printer backs up to print a label.
Printer Test Menu

The (Quick) Test Menu function contains resident format selections that are printed at selected heat
and speed settings. Use full width media to capture the entire format; otherwise, adjust the printer and
set the label width.
To enter the Test menu, press the TEST button.
When in Test Mode, the printer is offline, halting the processing of new
data.
Print Quality Label

The Print Quality Label function serves as an overall quality indicator. Consisting of compliant fence
and ladder bar codes, assorted font sizes, and fill patterns, this format can be used to ensure
conformance as well as aesthetics.
Ribbon Test Label

The Ribbon Test Label function serves as a transfer function indicator for printers equipped with the
thermal transfer option. Consisting of a fence-oriented bar code, this format can be used to ensure
component functions and ribbon path alignment.
Page 3-90
Test Label
The Test Label function serves as an indicator of print head functionality. The format consists of
patterns that exercise all thermal elements.
Validation Label
The Validation Label function serves as an overall quality indicator. Consisting of compliant fence and
ladder bar codes, assorted font sizes, and black fill patterns, this format can be used to ensure
conformance as well as aesthetics.
Print Configuration
The Configuration Label function provides current database information.
Bulleted items indicate host changes not yet saved.
Print Last Label

The Print Last Label function reprints the most recent format output by the printer.
If a job was cancelled prior to completion, or if power was removed since

the last print job and the current label request, the word VOID is printed.
User-Defined Label
The User-Defined label function allows a template to be populated by variable data (via the printer
control panel of a USB QUERTY keyboard). The template is a stored label format, where fields
delimited by the “&” become variable. The printer will prompt the user to enter this variable field data.
For example, the stored label format could contain the data “19131423443&ENTER NAME”. Afterward,
when recalled from memory, the printer display will indicate the variable field ENTER NAME.
Page 3-91
Variable data can be any part of the DPL format - font ID, positioning, etc.
No error checking will be performed.
Load Labels for Printing

For the imprinter to function properly, label files must be loaded into the Autobag 550 as follows:
1. Look for the READY status. The imprinter display status line shown in Figure 3-85 will display
READY when the unit is waiting for a label to be loaded.
2. Connect the computer containing the label software to a connector on the back of bagger unit.
Available ports and connectors are shown in shown in Figure 3-86. When the computer is connected
and booted up, download a label file. For more information on label printing software refer to AutoLabel
14.0 Software.
Page 3-92
FIGURE 3-85. PRINTER DISPLAY STATUS LINE

1 Time and Date 4 Printer Status Line
2 Current Condition Line 5 Soft Keys
3 Soft Key Labels 6 Menu, Test and Navigation
keys
TABLE 3-14. PRINTER DISPLAY STATUS LINE
Page 3-93
FIGURE 3-86. PRINTER E-BOX CONNECTIONS

1 Parallel Port Connector 3 USB Port Connector
2 LAN Port Connector 4 Serial Port Connector
TABLE 3-15. PRINTER E-BOX CONNECTIONS
Page 3-94
3. When the label file is loaded, the imprinter display status line will show the message: WAITING FOR
SIGNAL. When the bagger unit signals the imprinter, it will print the label each time the unit is cycled.
To cancel a batch of uncompleted labels or delete a complete batch

number, press the CANCEL soft key and then press YES on the Cancel
Batch screen. Once the batch is cancelled, press the PAUSE soft key to
return to READY status for new label.
If a label batch quantity job is not completed, it is not necessary to cancel

that batch to start a different batch job.
During operation, the TIME AND DATE status line will alternately flash
with a label count amount status message.
Page 3-95
Printer communications
Menu Item Details
Serial Port A Controls the RS-232 communications settings for Serial Port A, where:
• BAUD RATE Sets the serial communication rate, where:
-1200 BPS -
-2400 BPS -
-4800 BPS -
-9600 BPS -
-19200 BPS is the serial speed in Bits Per Second (BPS).
-28800 BPS -
-38400 BPS -
-57600 BPS -
-115000 BPS -
• PROTOCOL Sets the data flow control method (handshaking), where:

-Both Uses XON/XOFF and CTS/DTR.
-Software Uses XON/XOFF.
-Hardware Uses CTS/DTR.
-None Disables flow control.
• PARITY Sets word parity, where:
-None Uses parity.
-Odd Uses Odd parity.
-Even Uses Even parity.
• DATA BITS Sets Word length, where:

-(7-8) Is the number of bits in the word.
• STOP BITS Sets the stop bit count, where:
-(1-2) Is the number of stop bits.
Serial Port C Controls the settings for the optional Applicator Interface COM C (J4) port,
where the settings are the same as those given for SERIAL PORT A. The
Maximum baud for Serial Port C is 38.4K BPS
TABLE 3-16. PRINTER COMMUNICATIONS
Page 3-96
Menu Item Details
Serial Port D Controls the settings for the optional Applicator Interface COM D (J3) port, where
the settings are the same as those given for SERIAL PORT A. The Maximum
baud for Serial Port C is 38.4K BPS.
Parallel Port A Controls the communications settings for Parallel Port A, where:
• PORT DIRECTION Allows printer data to be returned to the host, where:
-Uni-directional Returns no data (one-way communication).

-Bi-directional Returns data (compliant back-channel operation).
NIC Adapter Controls the communications settings for the network interface, where:
• QUICK SETUP Only available when equipped with DMXNetII or DMXrfNetII.
Selects settings to configure basic Wired or Wi-Fi operations, where:
-Wired DCHP Selects the Wired operation, where:
*No Exits the menu item without changing the current settings.
*Yes Returns the NIC Adapter to defaults, then sets Wired Discovery to Enable and
Wireless to Disable.
• WLAN UNSECURED Selects Wi-Fi operation, where:
-No Exits the menu item without changing the current settings.
-Yes Returns the NIC Adapter default values, then sets Discovery to Enable, SSID to
Any, and WLAN network type to Infrastructure.
• WLAN ADHOC Selects the DMXrfNetII default parameters, where:
-Yes Restores Wi-Fi defaults and initiates infrastructure mode with an SSID of Any.
All existing access point associations will be deleted and then established with
the closest available. (Useful when moving the printer to a geographically distant
location).
• SET FACTORY Returns the factory-programmed values, where:
DEFAULTS
-Yes Restores the default settings.

• WLAN Controls the communications settings for the DMXrfNetII card, where:
-Mode Selects between Wired or Wi-Fi operation, where:
*Enabled Enables the Wi-Fi interface.

*Disabled Enables the wired interface.
-BSS Address Specifies the static IP address of the Wi-Fi bridge module. If DHCP is Enabled,
this parameter will be ignored.
*000.000.000.000 Is the address in standard octet format.
TABLE 3-10. PRINTER COMMUNICATIONS (CONTINUED)
Page 3-97
Menu Item Details
NIC Adapter (Continued) Controls the communications settings for the network interface, where:
-Signal readings Displays the WLAN signal and noise ratios.
• IP ADDRESS Specifies the static IP Address, where:
-192.168.010.026 Is the address in standard octet format.
• SUBNET MASK Specifies the static Subnet Mask Address, where:
• GATEWAY Specifies the network Gateway Address, where:

• SNMPTRAP Specifies the SNMP Trap Address, where:
DESTINATION
-000.000.000.000 Is the address in standard octet format where SNMP traps will be sent when
SNMP
service is installed on your receiver. When zeroed, no traps are sent.
• IP DISCOVERY Controls IP Address discovery, where:
-Enabled Broadcasts over the network at startup to receive addresses from the
responsible server. Manual modifications to IP Address, Subnet Mask, or
Gateway are not allowed. If no server is found, the specified static value will be
used. Server assigned IP Address takes precedence over any static address
stored in the interface.
-Disabled Uses the stored static IP, Subnet Mask, and / or Gateway Address.
• SNMP Allows management protocols, where:
-Enabled Sends messages to SNMP-compliant devices.
-Disabled Sends no messages.
• ADVANCED Sets advanced networking functions and parameters, where:
-Telnet Sets Telnet protocol to transfer data, where:
*Enabled Allows Telnet.
*Disabled Disables Telnet.
-FTP Sets File Transfer Protocol to transfer data, where:
*Enabled Allows FTP.
*Disabled Disables FTP.
-MTU Sets Maximum Transmission Unit packet size, where:
*(512 - 65515) Is the packet size, in bytes.
-Gratuitous APRP Sets the Address Resolution Protocol notification rate, where:
Page 3-98
Menu Item Details
*(0 - 2048) Is the time, in minutes.
-Port Number Sets the network communications port, where:
*(1 - 65535) Is the port number.
NIC Adapter (Continued) Controls the communications settings for the network interface, where:
-TCP KEEPALIVE Allows monitoring of an open connection to detect any disconnects not properly
closed, including reset access points and unplugged printers, where:
*Enabled Keeps monitoring active.
*Disabled Closes such a disconnection after 2.5 minutes.
-Duplex Capability Sets the communication capability for the Wired network, where:
*Auto-Negotiate Automatically selects the best type.
*100BASET HALF Selects 100Mbit/s half duplex (in both directions, one way at a time) operations.
*100BASET FULL Selects 100Mbit/s full duplex (in both directions, simultaneously) operations.
*10BASET HALF Selects 10Mbit/s half duplex (in both directions, one way at a time) operations.
*10BASET FULL Selects 10Mbit/s full duplex (in both directions, simultaneously) operations.
-Advertise Capability Transmits the printer’s communication capability for the Wired network, where:
*Automatic Advertises the Duplex Capability set value.
*All Capabilities Advertises all possible values for Duplex Capability.
-Network Report Allows viewing or printing of the network status report, where:
*View Displays the report.
*Print Prints the report.
-Set factory defaults Returns the factory-programmed values, where:
*Yes Restores the default settings.
A reset will occur and all settings will be restored except Custom Adjustments
and Calibrations.
*No Exits without changing the current settings.

Host Settings Sets host communication parameters, where:
• Host Timeout Sets the period that an interface port can be idle before timeout occurs, where:
-(1 - 60 Sec) Is the time (in seconds) when downloads timeout, and that must elapse before
alternate port or alternate parser processing can occur.
• Control Codes Allows changes to the software command interpretation controls, where:
Page 3-99
Menu Item Details
-Standard Codes Sets these interpretation codes: Hex 01 = SOH command; Hex 02 = STX
command; Count-By = ^; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return.
-Alternate Codes Sets these interpretation codes: Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX
command; Count-By = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return.
-Alternate Codes 2 Sets these interpretation codes: Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX
command; Count-By = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return.
(continued)
-Custom Codes Sets interaction codes, where:
*Standard Codes Are the codes according to your definition.

*SOH 01
Standard codes serve as default placeholders.
*STX 02
*CR 0D
*CNTBY 5E
• Feedback Characters Allows the return of printer codes, where:
-Enabled Sends the host a Hex 1E (RS) after each label and a Hex 1F (US) after each
batch successfully prints.
-Disabled Sends no feedback characters.
• ESC Sequences Sets handling for data containing invalid ESC sequences, where:
-Enabled Processes commands normally.
-Disabled Ignores ESC control codes during processing (as some systems send “banners”
to the printer).
• Heat Command Determines how host Heat commands are handled, where:
-Enabled Processes software commands normally.
-Disabled Controls Heat via the menu setting.
• Speed Commands Determines host Print, Feed, Reverse, and Slew commands are handled, where:
-Disabled Controls speeds via the menu setting.

• TOF Sensing Determines how host Gap, continuous, and Reflective commands are handled,
Commands where:
-Disabled Controls the Sensor Type via the menu setting.
• Symbol Set Command Determines how host Single and Double Symbol Set commands are handled,
where:
Page 3-100
Menu Item Details
-Disabled Controls Symbol Set selection via the menu setting.
• CNTRL- Codes (DATA) Determines how host Control Codes are handled, where:
-Enabled Processes the commands normally.
-Disabled Controls the setting via the menu.
• STX-V SW Settings Determines how a host option enable command is handled, where:
-Enabled Processes Software commands normally.
• Max Length Command Determines how a host Maximum Label length (<STX>M) command in handled,
where:
• Option Feedback Allows feedback characters from an optional device to be returned to the host
device, in the format of <A;B;C;D;E;F> [CR], where:
*A Is the device type:

*R = RFID
*S = Linear Scanner.
*B Is the status:
*C = entire label complete
*F = faulted (failed) label
*U = Unknown.
*C Is the number of expected reads, given in two characters.
*D Is the number of good reads, given in two characters.
*E Is the internal Job and Sub Job identifier, given in four characters.
*F Is the data read, delimited with semicolons ( ; ) if multiple reads.
-Disabled Reports no data.

-Scanner Reports Linear Scanner data.
-RFID Hex Reports RFID data in hexadecimal format.
-RFID ASCII Reports RFID data in ASCII format.
• Process SOH (Data) Determines the response to an Immediate Command (e.g. Get Status, Module
Storage, etc.), where:
-Disabled Processes software commands normally.
-Enabled Interrupts operations upon SOH receipt to process the command.
Page 3-101
Notification messages
Popup messages will appear on the HMI screen when errors or notifications in the machine occur.
Resetting notification messages

To reset or clear a notification message that comes up on the screen, use the following steps:
1. Clear the condition that caused the notification.
Indexing a bag prior to clearing the popup message may be required. This
will prevent the machine from unintentional unthreading.
2. Select the green check mark in the popup notification or press the START/STOP button to clear the
popup notification.
3. The machine is now ready to begin cycling again.
Page 3-102
Popup Messages
The following popup messages may appear during machine operation:
Some popup messages may have the same image, displayed message
and possible cause, but they will have different MSG ID’s. Each MSG ID
helps identify specific problems when troubleshooting the machine.
MSG ID numbers should be noted when contacting Technical Support to

aid in troubleshooting.
Displayed
Popup message image MSG ID Possible Cause
message
Machine is in an E-
STOP condition and
1 Reset E-STOP
must be reset prior to
continuing.
TABLE 3-11. POPUP MESSAGES
Page 3-103
Displayed
message
The E-STOP button

E-STOP button has been activated
2
1 engaged and must be reset
prior to continuing.
The machine is
11 Messgae ID 11 currently in an E-
ETOP condition.
The machine requires

13 Homing needed a homing sequence
prior to continuing.
TABLE 3-11. POPUP MESSAGES (CONTINUED)
Page 3-104
Displayed
message
The current lot has

Lot size count
25 reached the set lot
reached
size number.
The heat wire control

Heat wire board
65 board is not
not calibrated.
calibrated.
Page 3-105
Displayed
message
Heat wire not The heat wire is not

66
calibrated. calibrated.
The machine has

Missed
100 missed the number of
perforation
allowed perforations.
Page 3-106
Displayed
message
The machine has

101 Out of bags detected that it is out
of bags.
The machine has

detected that the bag
Bag not opened
102 has not opened
error
(SureFill option
enabled).
Page 3-107
Displayed
message
The machine has

detected a problem
104 Print length error with the label on the
bag (printed over perf,
too large, etc.).
The machine has

Seal bar jam detected a seal bar
105
error error during the close
cycle.
Page 3-108
Displayed
message
The machine has

106
cycle.
The machine has

107
cycle.
Page 3-109
Displayed
message
The machine has

Seal bar closing detected a problem
108
error with the anti-jam
system.
The machine has

Seal bar closing detected a problem
109
system.
Page 3-110
Displayed
message
The machine has

Seal bar opening detected a problem
110
system.
The heat wire system

Heat system failed to reach the
112
error target setpoint
temperature.
Page 3-111
Displayed
message
Start switch The Strat/Stop switch

113
disabled is disabled.
The machine has

Main nip driver
114 detected a problem
fault
with the drive system.
Page 3-112
Displayed
message
The main nip cannot

Main nip drive
115 reach the desired
error
position.
The machine has

Dancer homing
121 detected a dancer
error
high error.
Page 3-113
Displayed
message
The machine has

Dancer homing
122 detected a dancer low
error
error.
The unwinder is
Unwinder up
123 latched in the up
error
position.
Page 3-114
Displayed
message
The unwinder
overruns the main nip,
Unwinder up
124 runs out of bags or
error
can’t feed anymore
bags.
The machine has

Unwinder down
125 detected a dancer low
error
error.
Page 3-115
Displayed
message
The machine has

Unwinder down
126 detected a dancer
error
bottomed out error.
Unwinder drive The machine has

129
error detected a drive error.
Page 3-116
Displayed
message
The unwinder position

Unwinder drive
130 hasn’t reached the
error
desired position.
The machine has

Unwinder drive timed out waiting to
131
error reach the unwind
position.
Page 3-117
Displayed
message
Accumulating The accumulating

143 funnel jammed funnel has jammed
error opening.
Accumulating The accumulating

144 funnel jammed funnel has jammed
error closing.
Page 3-118
Displayed
message
Printer not 550 machine only.

145
configured error Printer not configured.
Printer not 550 machine only.

146
available error Printer isn’t available.
Page 3-119
Displayed
message
550 machine only.

Printer label Print label error has
147
error been detected by the
machine.
Printer update
148 550 machine only.
error
Page 3-120
Displayed
message
550 machine only.

Printer out of The printer has
149
ribbon error detected an out of
ribbon condition.
The air pressure in

High air the machine has
150
pressure error exceeded 100psi (6.9
bar).
Page 3-121
Displayed
message
The air pressure in

Low air pressure the machine has
151
error dropped below 50 psi
(3.45 bar)
The bag opener has

Bag Opener
MSG ID 153 153 detected a jam during
Jammed Error
opening
The bag opener has
Bag Opener
MSG ID 154 154 detected a jam during
Jammed Error
closing
Page 3-122
Displayed
message
Successive Bag
MSG ID 155 155
Reject Error
Motor 1 voltage Fuse blown on Motor

200
fault 1
Page 3-123
Displayed
message
Motor 3 voltage Fuse blown on Motor

202
fault 3
The machine has

Heat system
233 detected an error in
fault
the heat wire system.
Page 3-124
Displayed
message
The machine has

detected an error in
Heat System
234 the heat wire power
Fault
supply (loss of power
at connector J503).
The machine has

Heat System detected an error in
235
Fault the heat wire power
supply fuse.
Page 3-125
Displayed
message
The machine has

Heat System
236 the heat wire system
Fault
caused by the E-
STOP relay.
The machine has

the heat wire
Heat System measured voltage
237
Fault (voltage falls below
the reference voltage
established during
calibration).
Page 3-126
Displayed
message
The machine has

Heat System
238 the heat wire (critical
Fault
problem detected by
the software).
The machine has

Heat System the heat wire voltage
239
Fault (heat wire voltage
falls below 0.150
Volts).
Page 3-127
Displayed
message
The machine has

the heat wire
calibration value
(value obtained during
Heat System
241 calibration is outside
Fault
the range of
acceptable value of
+/- 25% of the
nominal resistance of
the heat wire) .
The machine has

the heat wire
calibration
Heat System temperature (ambient
242
Fault temperature is outside
the range of
acceptable values
which is 32-130° F or
0-54.4 °C.
Page 3-128
Displayed
message
The machine has

Heat System the heat wire
243
Fault (maximum expected
voltage for a duration
of 5 seconds).
Page 3-129
BLANK PAGE
Page 3-130
MAINTENANCE
Subject Page
Electrostatic discharge .........................................................4-5

ESD symbols ....................................................................4-6
Preventing ESD ................................................................4-6
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) .......................................................4-7
Lockout/Tagout procedures and employees .....................4-7
Lockout/Tagout devices ....................................................4-7
Lockout/Tagout procedures ..............................................4-8
Lockout/Tagout procedures involving
more than one person ......................................................4-9
LOTO devices and machines ...........................................4-9
Power cord LOTO devices..............................................4-10
Air supply LOTO devices ................................................4-10
Trapped air after LOTO ...............................................4-11
Removing Lockout/ Tagout devices ................................4-12
Setting up the bagger .........................................................4-12
Technical specifications ..................................................4-13
Electrical supply .............................................................4-16
Air supply .......................................................................4-17
Accessories .......................................................................4-18
Signaling tie in ................................................................4-18
Rotating the Machine .........................................................4-20
Maintenance menus ...........................................................4-22
Maintenance User Password .............................................4-22
Maintenance Job menus ................................................4-23
Advanced ....................................................................4-23
Maintenance Configuration menus .....................................4-25
Firmware ........................................................................4-25
Page 4-1
Machine Opt & Acc ........................................................ 4-25
Configuration .............................................................. 4-25
Options ....................................................................... 4-32
Accessories ................................................................ 4-33
Accessory configuration ................................................. 4-35
Maintenance User diagnostic menus ................................. 4-37
Heat Wire ....................................................................... 4-37
Heat Wire Calibration ................................................. 4-39
Printer ............................................................................ 4-42
Signaling ........................................................................ 4-43
Maintenance ...................................................................... 4-44
Preparation for Maintenance .......................................... 4-45
Required tool kit ............................................................. 4-45
Scheduled Maintenance .................................................... 4-46
Daily Maintenance ......................................................... 4-46
Weekly Maintenance ...................................................... 4-46
Monthly Maintenance ..................................................... 4-47
Annual Maintenance ...................................................... 4-47
Teflon Scroll Adjustment .................................................... 4-48
Safety Circuit Testing ........................................................ 4-50
Unscheduled Maintenance ................................................ 4-53
Covers ........................................................................... 4-53
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-54
Removal ..................................................................... 4-54
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-54
Installation .................................................................. 4-54
Infeed Tray..................................................................... 4-55
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-55
Removal ..................................................................... 4-55
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-55
Installation .................................................................. 4-56
Front Guard ................................................................... 4-56
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-57
Removal ..................................................................... 4-57
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-57
Installation .................................................................. 4-57
Page 4-2
Trim Collector Chute, Gripper and Face Plates .............. 4-58
Adjustment ..................................................................4-59
Removal .....................................................................4-59
Cleaning .....................................................................4-59
Installation...................................................................4-60
Internal Guarding ............................................................4-61
Adjustment ..................................................................4-62
Removal .....................................................................4-62
Cleaning .....................................................................4-62
Installation...................................................................4-62
Heat Wire Control Board ................................................4-62
Heat Wire .......................................................................4-63
Adjustment ..................................................................4-64
Removal .....................................................................4-64
Cleaning .....................................................................4-65
Installation...................................................................4-65
Teflon Scroll ...................................................................4-65
Adjustment ..................................................................4-65
Removal .....................................................................4-65
Cleaning .....................................................................4-66
Installation...................................................................4-66
Seal Bar .........................................................................4-67
Adjustment ..................................................................4-68
Removal .....................................................................4-68
Cleaning .....................................................................4-68
Installation...................................................................4-68
Passthrough ...................................................................4-69
Adjustment ..................................................................4-70
Removal .....................................................................4-70
Cleaning .....................................................................4-70
Installation...................................................................4-70
Print Head ......................................................................4-71
Adjustment ..................................................................4-72
Removal .....................................................................4-73
Cleaning .....................................................................4-74
Installation...................................................................4-74
Page 4-3
High Voltage Sensor ...................................................... 4-75
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-75
Removal ..................................................................... 4-76
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-76
Installation .................................................................. 4-76
Main Motor Drive............................................................ 4-77
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-78
Removal ..................................................................... 4-78
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-78
Installation .................................................................. 4-78
Nip and Print Roller ........................................................ 4-79
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-80
Removal ..................................................................... 4-80
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-81
Installation .................................................................. 4-81
Inlet Air and Coalescer Filter .......................................... 4-83
Adjustment ................................................................. 4-83
Removal ..................................................................... 4-84
Cleaning ..................................................................... 4-84
Installation .................................................................. 4-84
E-STOP Relay ................................................................... 4-84
440R-S12R2 – Single Input (SI) Dual Channel
Safety Relay .................................................................. 4-84
Reset in Case of Fault ................................................ 4-85
Safety Inputs .............................................................. 4-85
Reset .......................................................................... 4-85
440R-S12R2 Replacement and Configuration ............... 4-86
Replace the Existing Relay ......................................... 4-86
Configure the Safety Relay: ........................................ 4-87
Safety Relay Testing of 440R-S12R2 ............................. 4-87
Normal Operation Verification ..................................... 4-87
440R-S12R2 – Single Input - Testing Worksheet ....... 4-88
Sensors.......................................................................... 4-89
Seal Bar Sensor ......................................................... 4-89
Slot Sensors ............................................................... 4-89
Page 4-4
Electrostatic discharge
Electrostatic Discharge or ESD is the release of static electricity between two objects, such as a
person’s hand and a circuit card. This release of energy is due to a difference in potential between the
two items with one having a higher potential (positive) and the other having a lower potential (negative
or ground).
Static electrical charges can occur in a variety of environmental conditions and are affected by factors
such as, but not limited to:
• Humidity
• Temperature
• Flooring
• Clothing
• Packaging materials
ESD events are not always felt by the individual and therefore go unnoticed until a problem with the
equipment occurs. ESD can cause permanent damage to equipment, especially circuit card
assemblies. Items that are susceptible to ESD damage are known as Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive
(ESDS). To reduce the number of events that occur, an individual must follow an ESD plan.
Always follow local ESD procedures. Use the procedures contained within
this manual in the absence of established local procedures.
Page 4-5
ESD symbols
ESD symbols point out areas or items that are ESD sensitive. Some of the symbols used can be found
in Figure 4-1.
FIGURE 4-1. EXAMPLE ESD SYMBOLS
Preventing ESD
ESD events can be prevented by avoiding the buildup of static electricity. Use the following steps to
prevent the buildup of static electrical charges:
1. Ensure that individuals handling ESDS items are properly grounded. Use ground and wrist straps
when handling ESDS items.
2. Ensure equipment is properly grounded prior to performing any maintenance actions.
3. Handle all electrical equipment as if it’s ESDS. Never handle ESDS items without grounding straps
on the individual and the item.
4. Use ESD protective packaging when transporting or storing ESDS items.
5. Use ESD workstations (permanent or portable) when handling ESDS items.
Following the procedures listed above will not eliminate all ESD events but
will greatly reduce the number that occur.
Page 4-6
Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)
The process of properly securing electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic and other forms of energy sources to
equipment prior to servicing or maintenance is known as Lockout/Tagout (LOTO). LOTO procedures
ensure that the equipment has been properly powered down and secured using a LOTO device so that
it may not be operated while service or maintenance is being performed on the equipment.
LOTO procedures are a safety program governed by Occupational Safety and Health Standards
(OSHA) and National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) regulations. Information contained within this
section is not meant to replace OSHA or NFPA regulations and is only to serve as a quick reference
guide.
Only authorized employees/technicians are allowed to place LOTO

devices on equipment for servicing or maintenance. These LOTO devices
may only be removed by the employee/technician that placed them on the
equipment and must never be bypassed.
Lockout/Tagout procedures are a controlled safety program and must be

coordinated through the local LOTO Program Manager. LOTO devices are
controlled items and must be checked out and back in through the
Program Manager.
Lockout/Tagout procedures and employees

Employees that are involved in LOTO procedures must have a minimum level of training and be familiar
with all the regulations involved in locking out/tagging out equipment. Only employees that have been
trained in these regulations may install and remove LOTO devices.
Lockout/Tagout devices
LOTO devices must meet the following criteria:
1. Durable and substantial. Locks should be sufficient enough that they may only be removed with the
use of tools or bolt cutters. Tags must be non-releasable, with a minimum unlocking strength of 50
pounds.
Page 4-7
2. Standardized (Color, shape, size, etc.)
3. LOTO devices must be legible and clearly identify who placed them. They must also state “do not
start, open, or operate”.
Lockout/Tagout procedures
Lockout procedures vary from location to location. The following is a summary of sequences that are
required by OSHA to Lockout/Tagout equipment.
Local procedures take precedence over procedures contained within this

section. Please refer to local procedures prior to performing these steps.
1. Preparation for shutdown.

a. The authorized employee/technician shall notify the appropriate personnel (operators,
supervisors, etc.) that the machine being serviced is to be tagged out, shutdown and the reason for
shutdown.
2. Identify the energy source(s).
a. The employee/technician shall identify all the energy hazards for the machine. More than one
hazardous energy source and/or disconnecting means may be involved.
3. Isolate the energy source(s).
a. If the machine is operating, it shall be shutdown using normal shutdown procedures.
b. Using the appropriate energy isolation device (switch, circuit breaker, valve, etc.), manipulate the
isolation device so that the machine is isolated from the energy source(s).
4. Lock and tag the energy sources(s).
a. Place a LOTO device (lock or tag) on the energy isolation device to prevent the device from
being manipulated and warn other employees that the machine has been locked out.
b. A physical lock is the primary and preferred means to lockout the energy source(s) for the
machine being serviced. If a physical lockout of the energy source cannot be achieved, a tag may
be utilized. The tag must be legible, easy to understand, made of sturdy material and securely
fastened. A tag is to be treated the same as an individual lock.
c. Ensure that all stored energy (capacitors, air pressure, springs, hydraulic pressure, etc.) are
properly dissipated or restrained (grounding, bleeding down, blocking, etc.).
Page 4-8
5. Prove that the equipment isolation is effective.
a. Attempt to operate the machine using normal operating procedures to ensure that it is in a non-
operating status. Return the controls to their neutral or OFF position after verifying the isolation of
the equipment.
Once these 5 steps have been accomplished, the machine is now locked out.
Lockout/Tagout procedures involving more than one

person
Some maintenance actions may require more than one employee to perform service and/or
maintenance on the equipment at the same time. Each employee will place their own LOTO device on
the energy isolation device they are performing maintenance on. When an energy isolation device
cannot accept more than one LOTO device, a multiple LOTO device will be used. Refer to Figure 4-2
for an example of a multiple LOTO device.
FIGURE 4-2. MULTIPLE LOTO DEVICE
LOTO devices must be removed by the employee that placed them on the equipment before it may be
returned to normal operating condition.
LOTO devices and machines

Typical machines use an electrical power cord and pneumatic air as energy sources to operate the
equipment. Some equipment may have accessories that are hydraulically actuated but are self-
contained units that do not require outside hydraulic energy to operate.
Page 4-9
Power cord LOTO devices
A typical LOTO device for securing a power cord will attach to the end of the cord and will not allow it to
be connected to a power source. Refer to Figure 4-3 for an example of a power cord LOTO device.
These devices will vary from location to location.
FIGURE 4-3. POWER CORD LOTO DEVICE EXAMPLE
Air supply LOTO devices

Securing the air supply on a machine requires the air supply valve to be closed. Once the valve is
closed, there is a provision for a lock to be attached to the shutoff valve to prevent it from being
actuated. Refer to Figure 4-4.
FIGURE 4-4. AIR VALVE LOTO PROVISION
Page 4-10
Trapped air after LOTO
The load shelf and accumulating funnels are designed to trap air to prevent product from being
released during E-STOP situations. The load shelf and accumulating funnel door will be locked in their
last position when an E-STOP situation occurs. To remove air from these assemblies, use the following
steps:
1. Ensure the air supply LOTO device is actuated and secured.
2. Locate the blue and black 6mm air lines going into the assemblies.
3. Push in on the air lines (Figure 4-5, Item 1) and hold while pressing in on the fitting connector ring
(Figure 4-5, Item 2).
FIGURE 4-5. FITTING CONNECTORS
4. Remove the air line from the fitting. A small amount of air will release when removing the air line.
Remove both the blue and black air lines in order to completely remove all
the trapped air in the assembly.
5. Reconnect both the blue and black air lines prior to resuming normal operation.
Page 4-11
Removing Lockout/ Tagout devices
Only the employee that placed the equipment in a Locked out/Tagged out condition may restore it to full
operating condition. Prior to removing LOTO devices installed on equipment, the following actions must
occur:
1. Verify work is complete and that all nonessential items (tools, rags, etc.) have been removed.
2. Verify employees are clear of the area or safely positioned.
3. Place the operating controls in the neutral or OFF position.
The removal of some LOTO devices may require re-energization of the

equipment before safe removal.
4. Remove the LOTO devices. Reenergize the equipment using normal operating conditions. Verify the
equipment is operating normally.
Notify the appropriate personnel that the equipment has been returned to normal operating condition
and is ready for use.
Setting up the bagger

The following topics will cover how to setup the bagger.
Perform LOTO procedures prior to any printer setup.
This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and

may not provide adequate protection to radio reception in such
environments.
Page 4-12
Technical specifications
Specification Description
Weight 350lbs (158.7Kg) for base 500 configuration, 390lbs

(176.9Kg) for base 550 configuration. Additional
configurations or accessories will increase weight.
Length (max) 41.5 in. (105.4 cm.)
Width 51.5 to 64 in. (130.8 to 162.6 cm.)
Height 32 to 42 in. (81.3 to 106.7 cm.)
Product pass-through .75 in. (19.05mm) minimum,

5 in. (12.7 cm.) maximum
Label Sizes Up to 4 in. wide to 20 in. (10.1 cm to 50.8 cm) for

Autobag 550
Bag size Width 2 to 12 in. (5.1 to 30.5 cm.)

Length* 2.5 to 20 in. (6.4 to 50.8 cm.)
36 in. (91.4 cm) length unsupported
Bag thickness 1.09 to 4.0 mil (27.69 to 101.6 microns)
Product weight capacity Up to 5lbs. (2.27 kg.) with load shelf
Printer Resolution 203, 300 and 406 DPI for Autobag 550
Power supply (electrical) Universal Input: 110V to 240V VAC, 50/60 Hz Power
Consumption: 1500 Watts (VA) max
Compressed air (dry and filtered) 5 CFM/80 Psi of clean, dry air
Cycle rate Up to 100 bags per minute for Autobag 500
Up to 45 bags per minute for Autobag 550
NOTE
Cycle rates will vary based on machine settings and
loading variables.
Operating environment 50°F to 110°F (10°C to 43°C)
Electromagnetic Compatibility Class A Group 1

(EMC) Classification
TABLE 4-1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Page 4-13
FIGURE 4-6. AUTOBAG 500 FOOTPRINT
Page 4-14
FIGURE 4-7. AUTOBAG 550 FOOTPRINT
Page 4-15
Electrical supply
The Autobag 500 and 550 machine allows for universal power input of 110VAC to 240VAC, 50/60Hz,
15A with 1500W (VA) max.
Do not use extension cords to connect the machine to a power source.

Machines shall be plugged in to dedicated, stand-alone power circuits.
Ensure power cords do not create a tripping hazard. Route them from
above the unit whenever possible and secure them from moving.
Machine ground supply terminal must be connected to facility ground

supply. Ensure facility electrical supply is safe and meets machine
requirements.
Page 4-16
Air supply
Ensure supply lines do not create a tripping hazard. Route them from
above the unit whenever possible.
Ensure that the airline is tied into the bagger after the pneumatic
emergency stop dump valve.
Do not use the 1/4” (6mm) fitting on backside of regulator (opposite side of
air gauge) for installing accessories. All air line taps shall be done inside
the belly pan.
Dry, filtered air is required for proper operation of the printer.
A minimum of 3/8” (10mm) supply line tubing is required to supply 5 CFM

(8.5 m3/h) for machine operation.
Page 4-17
Accessories
Autobag 500 and 550 machines must be configured for any accessory or option that is installed or
removed on them.
Connecting or disconnecting accessories while the machine is powered up

will cause the machine to enter an error loop that is difficult to recover
from.
If an accessory need to be connected or disconnected, turn the accessory

OFF first in the MACHINE OPT & ACC menu. Once the accessory has
been disabled, turn the machine OFF. It may then be connected or
disconnected from the machine. If the accessory has been connected, it
will need to be enabled in MACHINE OPT & ACC after machine power up.
Signaling tie in
For accessories that utilize signaling to trigger the Autobag 500 and 550 machines, they will need to be
tied into the machine. The machine is equipped with a signaling tie in 15 pin connector (J21EB) located
on the back of the E-BOX (Figure 4-8).
The +24VDC current is limited to 260mA. Output current is limited to sink

or source +/- 21mA.
Connecting the select line to GND will bring the bagger_ok output signal
on pin 8.
The pin out of signaling connector J21EB, is listed in Table 4-2.
Page 4-18
FIGURE 4-8. SIGNALING CONNECTOR J21EB
Pin Description PIN Description

1 Ground 9 Feeder OK
2 Bagger OK / Ready to load 10 Bagger stop / Error
3 Printer Input 11 Bagger hold
4 Printer Output 12 Programmable Output 1
5 Programmable Input 0 13 +24VDC
6 Programmable Output 0 14 Inhibit Cycle
7 +24VDC 15 Ground
8 Programmable Input 1
TABLE 4-2. SIGNALING CONNECTOR J21EB PIN OUTS
Page 4-19
Rotating the Machine
The machine may be rotated using the machine stand. The machine is limited to a 45 degrees rotation
by a limiting tab on the stand for normal operating conditions. To rotate the machine for normal
operation, use the following steps:
Do not operate the machine beyond the 45-degree limit for rotation.
Do not remove the bolts in the block clamps or loosen excessively. The
machine may suddenly tilt injuring the technician.
The bolts should only be loosened enough to allow the machine to rotate.
1. Loosen the (2) bolts on each block clamp (Refer to Figure 4-9.
2. Rotate the machine to the desired position.
3. Tighten the bolts on each block clamp. Ensure that the bolts are tight and do not allow the machine
to rotate.
Page 4-20
FIGURE 4-9. ROTATING MACHINE
Page 4-21
Maintenance menus
The maintenance level is the next highest mode of operation and is to be used by authorized
maintenance personnel only. The user will have access to the Home, Jobs, Configuration and
Diagnostics menus.
1. Home menu. The user will be able to select or deselect the ACTIONS that have been loaded as well
as change settings for the loaded ACTIONS. They will be able to change the mode of operation from
SINGLE to AUTO. TOTAL COUNT, LOT SIZE and LOT COUNT may be changed at this user level as
well.
2. JOB menu. The user will be able to SAVE JOB, SAVE JOB AS or LOAD jobs. They will also be able
to adjust SETTINGS, OPTIONS and ADVANCED settings for each job.
3. CONFIGURATION menu. The user will be able to access the FIRMWARE, PRODUCTIVITY
METRICS, CYCLE TIMES, SHORTCUT ACTIONS, SCREENSAVER, USERS, MACHINE OPT & ACC,
REAL TIME CLOCK and NETWORK CONFIG menus.
4. DIAGNOSTICS menu. The user will be able to access all the sub-menus in the diagnostics menu.
Maintenance User Password

USER NAME DEFAULT PASSWORD
Operator 1 1111
Operator 2 2222
Setup 3333
Maintenance 4444
Service Access not authorized
TABLE 4-3. USER LEVEL PASSWORD
Page 4-22
Maintenance Job menus
Advanced
Advanced job setting are only available in Maintenance or above user levels.
FIGURE 4-10. ADVANCED JOB SETTINGS
1. TEAR OFF DISTANCE. Setting in inches or millimeters that controls how far the bag is pulled
through the main nip during the tear off stage.
2. BAG INDEX SPEED. Setting in inches or millimeters that controls the speed of the bags as they
travel though the machine.
Bag index speed is set at 39.37 in/sec (100 cm/sec) from the factory.
Adjusting the bag index speed to a lower setting may be needed to
optimize performance.
3. PERFORATION DETECTION UPPER WINDOW. Measurement of perforation detection upper

window in inches or millimeters for the anticipated distance of the perforation of the next bag out when
the high voltage detector is armed. Enabled with PERF DETECT WINDOW feature.
4. PERFORATION DETECTION LOWER WINDOW. Measurement of perforation detection lower
window in inches or millimeters for the distance after the perforation passes the high voltage detector
when it is disarmed. Enabled with PERF DETECT WINDOW.
Page 4-23
5. MISSED PERFORATION COUNT. Number of perforations that can be missed by the PERF
DETECT WINDOW before the machine stops for a missed perforation error.
6. HOLD OUTPUT DELAY. 0-3600 seconds. Time which passes before the bagger enters the hold
state and turns on the machine hold output.
The Hold Output Delay setting in the Advance Job Settings menu will
override the Hold Output Delay setting in the Configuration menu if it is set
to any other value than zero.
7. PERF DETECT WINDOW. Turns the perf detect window ON or OFF. This feature is used for
perforation overlap and prevents false detection of bag features such as hanger holes.
FIGURE 4-11. PERFORATION DETECT WINDOW
Item Description
1 Bag perforation
2 Perforation detection upper window
3 Perforation detection lower window
TABLE 4-4. PERFORATION DETECT WINDOW
The perforation detection window function does not function on bags

under 10 in (25.4 cm) in length.
Page 4-24
Maintenance Configuration menus
Firmware
Contact Technical Support for procedures on how to update the machine

firmware.
Machine Opt & Acc

Machine Options and Accessories may be changed in this menu. There are 4 sub menus in this menu.
Configuration
This menu allows for CONFIGURATION changes to be made the machine.
FIGURE 4-12. CONFIGURATION MENU
Page 4-25
1. IDLE TIMEOUT. This is the amount of time in seconds before the machine will go into idle mode
from non-use.
If the IDLE TIMEOUT is set to zero, the machine will never enter an idle
state.
Ensure that the idle timeout is not set lower than the job load time. This
will cause the machine to go into idle in between machine cycles that will
affect the heat wire temperature and affect proper sealing.
2. HOLD OUTPUT DELAY. 0-3600 sec. Time which passes before the bagger enters the hold state
and turns on the machine hold output.
In the Configuration menu, the Hold Output Delay is a Global setting.
3. START SWITCH. Enables the start switch to be turned ON or OFF. A checkmark indicates the start
switch is enabled.
If the START SWITCH is disabled, the machine may only be cycled by

using a palm switch(s) or a footswitch.
Page 4-26
4. SIGNALING. This accessory has a popup menu with the following choices:
a. SIGNALING MODE. When selecting a SIGNALING MODE, the other signaling choices will
default to the correct choices needed to support the selected mode. Options are:
(1). NONE. No signaling is selected or allows for signaling choices to be changed.
(2). AUTOLINK. Autolink™ will define the needed signaling choices required. They will be set to:
(a). SIGNALING INTERFACE to NPN.
(b). SIGNALING LEVEL to ACTIVE LOW.
(c). FEEDER HANDSHAKING to NONE.
(3). AUX LOOP. Aux Loop will define the needed signaling choices required. They will be set to:
(a). SIGNALING INTERFACE to NPN.
(b). SIGNALING LEVEL to ACTIVE LOW.
(c). FEEDER HANDSHAKING to NONE.
(4). USER DEFINED. The operator will define all the signaling choices needed.
b. SIGNALING INTERFACE. Options are:
(1). PNP.
(2). NPN.
Page 4-27
c. SIGNALING LEVEL. Options are:
(1). ACTIVE HIGH.
(2). ACTIVE LOW.
d. FEEDER HANDSHAKING. Options are:
(1). NONE.
(2). STANDARD.
e. SIGNALING OUTPUTS SELECTION. Options are:
(1). BAGGER OK / READ TO LOAD. Toggled ON or OFF.
(2). BAGGER / ERROR. Toggled ON or OFF.
(3). BAGGER HOLD. Toggled ON or OFF.
(4). PRINTER OUTPUT. Toggled ON or OFF.
(5). PROGRAMMABLE OUTOUT 0. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling output to be
programmed for specific functions when connecting to external devices.
(6). PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 0 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Waiting For Label.
(b). Print Complete.
(c). Bag At Seal Position.
(d). Bag Opened.
(e). Seal Complete.
(f). Automode Active.
(g). Bag Rejected.
(h). Barcode Scanner.
(i). Unassigned.
(7). PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 1. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling output to be
Page 4-28
(8). PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT 1 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Waiting For Label.
(b). Print Complete.
(c). Bag At Seal Position.
(d). Bag Opened.
(e). Seal Complete.
(f). Automode Active.
(g). Bag Rejected.
(h). Barcode Scanner.
(i). Unassigned.
f. SIGNALING INPUTS SELECTION.
(1). FEEDER OK. Toggled ON or OFF.
(2). INHIBIT CYCLE. Toggled ON or OFF.
(3). PRINTER INPUT. Toggled ON or OFF.
(4). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 0. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling input to be
(5). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 0 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Feed Bag.
(b). Cycle Bagger.
(c). Accept Bag.
(d). Reject Bag.
(e). Strip-n-Rip Tear Off.
(f). Shelf Shake.
(g). Hold Bagger.
(h). Unassigned.
(6). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 1. Toggled ON or OFF. Allows for the signaling input to be
Page 4-29
(7). PROGRAMMABLE INPUT 1 FUNCTION. Options are:
(a). Feed Bag.
(b). Cycle Bagger.
(c). Accept Bag.
(d). Reject Bag.
(e). Strip-n-Rip Tear Off.
(f). Shelf Shake.
(g). Hold Bagger.
(h). Unassigned.
5. AIR PRESSURE MONITORING.
a. AIR PRESSURE MONITORING. Toggled ON or OFF.
b. PRESSURE HIGH ERROR. Toggled ON or OFF.
c. PRESSURE HIGH. Sets the high pressure limit. Maximum setting is 150 psi.
d. PRESSURE LOW ERROR. Toggled ON or OFF.
e. PRESSURE LOW. Sets the low pressure limit. Minimum setting is 1 psi.
Page 4-30
6. PRINTER VERSION CHECK. Turns the printer version check ON or OFF. This checks the codes
between the printer and machine to make sure that they are compatible.
7. CYCLE VALIDATE. Toggled ON or OFF.
Cycle Validate is used for application specific machine configurations.
If any settings in the configuration have been changed, the Machines Options and Accessories –
Configuration header will turn orange. Configuration changes must be saved or they will be lost on
power cycle. Save changes by selecting SAVE CONFIGURATION before exiting the configuration
menu.
FIGURE 4-14. CHANGES NEED SAVED
Page 4-31
Options
This menu allows for OPTIONS to be enabled or disabled on the machine.
FIGURE 4-15. MACHINE OPTIONS MENU
1. BAG DETECT SENSOR. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machine.
2. CLAMP SENSORS. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machine.
3. BAG GRIPPER OPENER. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machine.
4. PRINTER. Change the printer setting to one of the following:
a. NONE.
b. ONESTEP.
c. PRINT-N-PACK.
5. ADJUST SEAL SENSORS. Not enabled on the Autobag 500, 550, 600 or 650 machines.
Page 4-32
Accessories
This menu allows for accessories to be enabled or disabled for the machine. For a machine to operate
with accessories, they must first be turned ON or OFF in this menu. Once they have been turned ON or
OFF in this menu, they may then be added as SHORTCUTS on the HOME screen and configured
within the shortcut by tapping the shortcut icon or in the JOBS menu under OPTIONS.
Accessories that have been added in the CONFIGURATION menu must

be enabled in the JOBS menu under OPTIONS as well.
If the Accessories have been changed, they must be saved by selecting

SAVE ACCESSORIES before exiting the Accessories menu.
Some accessories will require additional parts to be added for base

configured machines.
FIGURE 4-16. ACCESSORIES MENU
1. CONVEYOR. Not enabled on the Autobag 500 and 550 machines.

2. SHELF. Toggled ON or OFF.
3. BAG KICKER. Not enabled on the Autobag 500 and 550 machines.
4. TRIM SEAL. Toggled ON or OFF.
Page 4-33
5. PALM SWITCH. This accessory has a popup menu that allows the user to toggle the Palm Switch
ON or OFF and change SWITCH MODE between SINGLE and DUAL.
FIGURE 4-17. PALM SWITCH
6. SEAL FLATTENER. Toggled ON or OFF.

7. ACCUMULATING FUNNEL. Toggled ON or OFF.
8. COUNT EYE. Toggled ON or OFF.
9. SURE FILL. Toggled ON or OFF.
10. BAG OPENER. For use with machines configured with bag openers. Options are:
a. BAG OPENER. Toggled ON or OFF.
b. BAG OPENER EXTEND SENSOR. Toggled ON or OFF. Turns ON or OFF the bag opener
extend sensor.
c. BAG OPENER EXTEND TIME. 0.25 to 3 seconds.
d. BAG OPENER RETRACTED SENSOR. Toggled ON or OFF. Turns ON or OFF the bag opener
retract sensor.
e. BAG OPENER RETRACT TIME. 0 to 3 seconds.
f. BAG OPENER JAM TIME. 0 to 2 seconds. The amount of time to wait before the machine to
detect the bag position before an error occurs.
Page 4-34
Accessory configuration
After the accessory has been installed or removed, it needs to be configured in the machine. To
configure the accessory, use the following steps:
1. Tap the CONFIGURATION icon at the top of the screen.
a. Select MACHINE OPT & ACC.
b. Select ACCESSORIES.
2. For the accessory installed or removed, it needs to be turned ON or OFF.
a. To turn an accessory ON, tap the accessory in the list and a check mark will appear in the box.
Some accessories will open an additional menu when tapped. For these
accessories, they must be turned ON in the additional menu first and may
have some additional configuration options within the menu.
b. To turn an accessory OFF, tap the accessory in the list to remove the check mark in the box.
3. After the needed change is made, select SAVE ACCESSORIES to save the change.
Once the accessory has been configured, it needs to be turned ON in the JOB menu. To turn the
accessory ON in the JOB menu, use the following steps:
4. Tap the JOB icon at the top of the screen.
a. Select OPTIONS.
5. Turn the accessory ON or OFF:
a. To turn an accessory ON, tap the accessory in the list and a check mark will appear in the box.
b. To turn an accessory OFF, tap the accessory in the list to remove the check mark in the box.
Some accessories will have an additional menu to configure the accessory

for use.
6. After the needed change has been made, the bar at the top of the JOB screen will turn orange.
7. Select SAVE JOB to save the change to the current job or select SAVE JOB AS to save it to a new
job.
Page 4-35
A shortcut icon may be added to the home screen for accessories that have been added. To add a
shortcut, use the following steps:
8. Complete accessory configuration.
9. Select the CONFIGURTION icon at the top of the screen.
10. Select SHORTCUT ACTIONS.
a. To turn a shortcut ON, tap the accessory in the list and a check mark will appear in the box.
b. To turn a shortcut OFF, tap the accessory in the list to remove the check mark in the box.
11. After the shortcut has been turned ON or OFF, it will be added or removed from the HOME screen
ACTIONS icon list.
If a shortcut is greyed out and unable to be selected, it has not been

configured for the machine.
ACTIONS on the home page allow for accessories to be manipulated by the shortcut icon directly on
the home screen.
Page 4-36
Maintenance User diagnostic menus
Heat Wire
The Heat Wire menu (Fig 4-65) allows for monitoring and calibration of the heat wire. 13 heat wire
values may be monitored.
The heat wire is capable of temperatures up to 500°F (260°C) and wire

currents of up to 25 amps.
While the machine is at idle, the heat wire will maintain a temperature of
130°F (54.4°C). During cycling operations, the machine will remain at the
set target temperature.
FIGURE 4-18. HEAT WIRE MENU
Page 4-37
1. HEAT WIRE STATE. The heat wire has four states:
a. OFF. The heat wire is OFF and is not being heated.
The OFF state will only be seen at initial power up prior to the first
machine cycle or when the machine is in E-STOP.
b. IDLE. The wire is on but is in an idle state. The heat wire will enter the idle state when the
machine enters the set timeout period and maintain the idle temperature of 130°F (54.4°C).
c. ACTIVE. The heat wire is active and is maintaining the job targeted temperature.
d. FAULT. The heat wire has detected a fault. An error message should indicate the fault.
2. HEAT WIRE MODEL. The heat wire has two models available depending on the machine
configuration.
a. REFLEX 12 INCH for standard machines.
b. TRIM 12 INCH for trim optioned machines.
3. CALIBRATED WIRE RESISTANCE. This is the measurement for the wire from its last calibration in
milliohms.
4. CALIBRATED WIRE TEMPERATURE. This is the measured ambient temperature for the wire in °F
from its last calibration.
5. LAST CALIBRATED. Date and time of last calibration.
6. TARGET TEMPERATURE. Current target temperature for the heat wire in degrees. The target
temperature for the heat wire is set in JOB SETTINGS, SEAL TEMPRATURE.
7. ACTUAL TEMPERATURE. Shows the actual current temperature of the heat wire in degrees.
8. MEASURED WIRE CURRENT. Shows the actual heat wire current in amps. This will vary depending
on the actual state of the heat wire.
9. MEASURED WIRE VOLTAGE. Shows the actual DC voltage of the heat wire. This will vary
depending on the actual state of the heat wire.
10. DUTY CYCLE. Shows the duty cycle of the heat wire in percent. Duty cycle is the percentage of ON
time being used to power the wire. It will vary from 2 to 98 percent depending on the state of the wire.
11. TARGET RESISTANCE. This value represents the targeted resistance of the heat wire needed to
achieve the targeted temperature.
Page 4-38
12. MEASURED RESISTENCE. This value represents the actual measured resistance of the heat wire
to achieve the targeted temperature.
13. OUTPUT. This value represents the output of the PID loop and will vary depending on the
MEASURED and TARGER RESISTENCE values.
14. FAULTS. Used to troubleshoot heat wire issues.
15. START CALIBRATION. This starts a heat wire calibration.
Heat Wire Calibration

The Heat Wire requires calibration for the machine to operate properly. If the heat wire needs to be
calibrated, use the following steps:
Sealing bar will close automatically during calibration. Anti-jam circuit is

still active during calibration.
Remove any bags and/or obstructions in the sealing area as this will
cause an erroneous calibration.
The thermocouple used in the heat wire calibration is located in the belly
pan of the machine on the heat wire board (HWB).
In certain machine states, the heat wire calibration will not be available.
This is intended to prevent damage to the machine.
Calibration is required when any of the following have been changed: heat
wire, HWB or main control board (MCB).
1. Allow the machine to cool down to room temperature before calibrating the heat wire. If the machine
is calibrated immediately after machine operations, the calibration may be erroneous due to heat soak
from the machine.
Page 4-39
2. Select START CALIBRATION.
FIGURE 4-19. START CALIBRATION
a. A popup message will appear.
FIGURE 4-20. HEAT WIRE CALIBRATION
b. Press the green check mark to proceed with calibration.

c. Press the red X to exit calibration.
Page 4-40
3. If continue was selected in step 2b, a popup window will appear showing HEAT WIRE
CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT. Calibration elapsed time will count up in seconds.
FIGURE 4-21. CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS
If for any reason the user wishes to stop the heat wire calibration, select
STOP CALIBRATION.
If a calibration is aborted using STOP CALIBRATION, the machine must

be power cycled as the HWCB and MCB will be out of sync.
The calibration may take up to ten minutes to complete. The seal bar will
remain closed during the calibration. If more than ten minutes elapses
during the calibration, the calibration shall be stopped as there is a
condition preventing the calibration from completing. Average time to
complete a calibration is between 90-140 seconds.
Page 4-41
4. When the calibration is complete, the seal bar will open and the popup window will notify the user the
calibration is complete.
a. Select the green check mark to exit calibration window.
FIGURE 4-22. CALIBRATION COMPLETE
Printer
The printer menu allows for Inputs and Outputs to be monitored for the printer on 550 machines. There
are also 2 printer maintenance related functions that may be accomplished within this menu. They are:
1. Print Head Adjust. Places the print head in the down position to allow for print head adjustment. Tap
Print Head Adjustment and a check mark will appear next to it. While this field is check, the print head
will remain in the down position. Unchecking the field will return the print head to its normal operating
position.
2. Print Slew. Slews the printer ribbon while selected. Tap Print Slew and a check mark will appear next
to it. While this field is check, the printer will slew the printer ribbon. Unchecking the field will stop the
printer ribbon.
Page 4-42
FIGURE 4-23. PRINTER MENU
Signaling
The signaling menu allows for testing and troubleshooting of the signaling feature. Used in conjunction
with the signaling test box, signals input and outputs can be verified.
1. PNP/NPN SELECT. Allows the user to toggle the machine between PNP and NPN if the Signaling
Mode has been set to User Defined.
PNP/NPN Select in this menu should be used for diagnostics purposes

only.
Page 4-43
Maintenance
When performing any maintenance on the machine, disassemble the machine only as far as required to
complete the task.
Prior to performing any maintenance, all Lockout/Tagout (LOTO)

procedures must be followed to remove electrical power and air supply
from the machine.
Only authorized and qualified maintenance technicians are permitted to

perform maintenance and repairs on this machine.
Ensure that all safety guards and covers are reinstalled prior to placing a
machine back into service.
Do not use steel wool to clean aluminum rollers, sealer bar, high voltage
detector arm or any other parts of the machine.
Use the mildest method possible for scheduled maintenance and cleaning.
Do not exceed 30Psi when cleaning the machine.
Unless otherwise stated all screws, bolts and nuts will be tightened hand
tight. Torque requirements will be called out in the maintenance steps if
required
Maintaining a well operating machine requires periodic maintenance to be performed by the end user.
Cleaning, adjusting, replacing and repairing systems on the machine will ensure minimal down time and
longer intervals between work stoppages due to machine errors.
Page 4-44
These maintenance tasks may only be performed by the end users qualified maintenance technician or
by an Automated Packaging Systems service technician. Failure to have a qualified maintenance
technician perform these tasks will be considered misuse of the machine.
Preparation for Maintenance

Prior to performing any maintenance, ensure that the following procedures have been performed first.
1. Disconnect bag supply and run all bags out of machine including the unwinder.
2. Turn the power switch to OFF (O).
3. Perform LOTO procedures.
4. Follow all ESD procedures.
Required tool kit

Recommended tools for performing maintenance on the machine.
Tool Size
Allen Keys, ball end, long 1.5-10mm
Allen Keys, ball end, short 1.5-10mm
“T” handles, long 2-6mm
1/4” drive socket set 5-13mm
Combination wrenches, standard length 7-13mm
Combination wrenches, short length 4-11mm
Adjustable wrench, 10” long 0-46mm
Metric scale (ruler) 152mm length N/A
Snap ring pliers, inside and outside N/A
Tubing Quick Release Tool (P/N2-002743) 4/6mm
TABLE 4-5. TOOL KIT LIST
Page 4-45
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled maintenance requirements for the Autobag 500 and 550 machines are to be performed
periodically to keep the machine operating at optimal conditions.
Daily Maintenance
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines requires daily maintenance to operate at peak performance. This
includes daily maintenance that should be performed at the beginning of each day/shift.
A day generally consists of one 8-12 hour shift. If the machine is operated
for multiple shifts in a single twenty-four hour period, each shift should
perform the daily tasks prior to and at the end of the each shift.
1. Check Teflon™ scroll for dark or burn spots. Rotate Teflon scroll if necessary.
2. Check air supply filters for fluids and drain if necessary.
3. Clean print roller surface using a clean, lint free cloth dampened with 90% Isopropyl Alcohol.
4. Clean print head using a clean, lint free cloth dampened with 90% Isopropyl Alcohol.
5. Check for proper sealing on bags. Adjust as needed.
Different bag materials may create more buildup on the rollers than other
materials. Observe level of buildup by bag material and adjust cleaning
schedule as required.
Weekly Maintenance
The following tasks must be performed weekly (once every 7 days).
1. Clean unwind and nip rollers.
a. Clean aluminum rollers with lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol. If needed, clean
with Scotch Brite™ #7447 or 7448 pads and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Page 4-46
b. Clean rubber rollers with lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Different bag materials will require more frequent cleaning. Observe level
of buildup based on materials used and change cleaning frequency as
required.
2. Wipe down entire machine with clean, dry, lint free cloth.
3. Wipe down HMI interface screen with a damp, clean, lint free cloth.
Do not oil or lubricate guide rod or guide rod bearings. Oil and lubricants
will cause premature failure of the guide rods and/or bearings.
4. Wipe down seal bar guides with clean, lint free cloth.
5. Inspect seal rubber and Teflon tape on seal rubber. Replace if indented, cracked, peeling, cut or
degraded in any way that will affect proper sealing.
Monthly Maintenance
The following tasks must be performed monthly (once every 30 days).
1. Inspect High Voltage Sensor finger and grounding finger. Clean as required.
2. Check airlines for leaks and cracks. Ensure cables and airlines are not rubbing.
3. Check connector cables and wires for cracks, cuts or loose connections.
4. Inspect inlet air filter and coalesce filter. Replacement is recommended every 6 months or as
needed.
5. Remove top center tray and blow clean with compressed air.
6. Remove E-BOX and Printer E-BOX (if installed) cover. Blow E-BOX and fans clean with
compressed air.
Annual Maintenance
The following tasks must be performed yearly (once every 365 days).
Check seal bar bumpers. If replacement is required, replace all bumpers at the same time.
Page 4-47
Teflon Scroll Adjustment
For the Teflon scroll to be adjusted, the machine must be powered on and
out of E-STOP. Care should be taken when adjusting the machine in this
condition.
Do not adjust the machine during cycling operations. The machine should
be static when adjusting.
To adjust the Teflon scroll, use the following steps:
The Teflon scroll may only be adjusted in one direction. Adjusting the
Teflon in the wrong direction may damage the heater bar assembly or
interfere with machine operation.
Minimal adjustment of the Teflon scroll is needed. Adjust approximately ¼”

to ½” (6-13mm) at a time until fresh Teflon is visible.
1. Power on the machine

a. Reset the machine E-STOP and ensure that air is applied to the machine.
2. Access the scroll adjustment wheels by reaching around the sides of the machine and gaining
access to the adjustment wheels from the side of the machine.
Page 4-48
FIGURE 4-25. DIRECTION OF ROTATION FOR ADJUSTMENT
FIGURE 4-26. SCROLL ADJUSTMENT WHEEL
Page 4-49
3. Push both of the white plastic adjustment gears up towards the top of the machine. They will engage
the metal gear attached to the Teflon scroll bar.
Ensure that the white plastic gears are fully and firmly pushed up prior to
rotating. If the plastic gears do not properly engage the metal gears on the
Teflon scroll rod, they may become stripped and unusable.
a. Rotate both gears at the same time towards the back of the machine. Do not rotate the
adjustments gears towards the front of the machine as this will unwind the Teflon scroll.
The Teflon may be adjusted using just one plastic adjustment gear,
however it is recommended that both gears are used together to adjust
the Teflon scroll.
Safety Circuit Testing

The Autobag 500 and 550 machines are inherently safe to use due to the built in safety circuit. To test
that the safety circuit is operating correctly, use the following procedure:
1. A 4MM firm object is needed to test the safety circuit. A piece of 4MM diameter Buna-N 90 Shore A
O-Ring is included in the ship kit to be used for testing the safety circuit (P/N 3-005611, Tool, AB500
Anti-Jam Tester).
Ensure care is taken when testing the safety circuit. Only place the test
object in the machine sealing area. Keep hands and other objects such as
jewelry and hair clear.
2. With the machine powered ON and ready for cycling, place and hold the test object flat against the
gripper plate in line with the sealing area ensuring that the tool extends past the heater bar opening slot
as shown.
Page 4-50
FIGURE 4-27. FIRM OBJECT IN PLACE FOR TEST
3. Initiate a single cycle of the machine.

4. When the sealbar contacts the firm object, the machine should enter an error condition.
FIGURE 4-28. SEALBAR JAM ERROR
a. The machine should enter an E-STOP condition and electrically dump air to the machine.
Page 4-51
b. The machine should be able to recover from this error by acknowledging the error message and
removing the rigid object from the seal area.
The 4mm firm object should be detectable in any location in the seal area.
5. If the machine does not enter the condition described in step 4, the safety circuit test has failed.
Place the machine in a non-use status.
a. Contact local maintenance personnel for troubleshooting. If local maintenance personnel are not
available, contact Automated Packaging Systems technical support. Refer to Technical Support
section.
Page 4-52
Unscheduled Maintenance
Unscheduled maintenance tasks are performed due to poor machine performance or machine errors.
They may include adjustment, removal, cleaning and installation.
Covers
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use molded covers for the machine.
1
2
4
5
FIGURE 4-29. COVERS (LONG FRAME DEPICTED)
ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION

1 M5x0.8 x 12MM screw 4 Front cover
2 Top cover 5 Captive screw
3 Side cover
TABLE 4-6. COVERS, LONG BAGGER
Page 4-53
Adjustment
No adjustments are required.
Removal
Removal of the Autobag 500 and 550 machine covers uses the same steps for short, long and printer
equipped machines. To remove the covers, use the following steps:
1. Undo (2) captive screws (Item 5) on side cover.
2. Remove side covers (Item 3).
3. Remove handles from nip roller.
4. Undo (1) captive screw (Item 5) from on front cover.
5. Remove front covers (Item 4).
6. Remove (2) screws (Item 1) from top cover.
7. Remove top cover (Item 2).
Cleaning
Wipe down with a clean, lint free cloth.
Installation
1. Install top cover (Item 2). Beveled edge faces the loading area.
2. Install (2) screws (Item 1) into top cover.
3. Install front covers (Item 4).
4. Fasten (1) captive screw (Item 5) into side of front covers.
5. Install side covers (Item 3).
6. Fasten (2) captive screws (Item 5) install side of side covers.
7. Install handles for nip roller.
Page 4-54
Infeed Tray
FIGURE 4-30. INFEED TRAY

1 Infeed Tray 2 M5 x 0.8 x 6mm screw
TABLE 4-7. INFEED TRAY
Adjustment
No adjustment required.
Removal
1. Remove (6) M5 x 0.8 x 6mm screws (Item 2) securing infeed tray (Item 1) to machine frame.
2. Remove infeed tray by lifting up the front and then the rear.
On Autobag 550 machines equipped with the OneStep printer, the

passthrough knob will need to be removed to remove the infeed tray.
Cleaning
Page 4-55
Installation
To install the infeed tray, use the following steps:
1. Place the infeed tray (Item 1) on the machine frame by lowering the rear in first, then the front.
2. Install the (6) M5 x 0.8 x 6mm screws (Item 2) securing the infeed tray to the machine frame.
Front Guard
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines are equipped with a front guard that protects the loading area.
FIGURE 4-31. FRONT GUARD

1 M8 x 1.25 x 14mm captive screw 3 M8 x 1.25 T-nut
2 M8 x 1.25 x 14mm screw 4 Front guard
TABLE 4-8. FRONT GUARD
Page 4-56
Adjustment
No adjustment is required.
Removal
To remove the front guard, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) M8x1.25x14mm screws (Item 2) in both sides of front guard (Item 4). M8x1.25 T-nut
(Item 3) will remain inside the rail.
2. Loosen (2) M8x1.25x14mm captive screws (Item 1) in front of guard.
3. Remove front guard.
Cleaning
Installation
1. Install front guard (Item 4) onto rail.
2. Install (2) M8x1.25x14mm captive screws (Item 1) into front of guard.
3. Install (2) M8x1.25x14mm screws (Item 2) in both sides of front guard and into M8x1.25 T-nuts (Item
3).
Page 4-57
Trim Collector Chute, Gripper and Face Plates
Autobag 500 and 550 machines that are configured with the trim option will have a trim shield guard
installed.
FIGURE 4-32. TRIM CHUTE

1 Trim collector chute 5 M5x0.8MM x 12MM screw
2 M8 x 1.25 x 18MM screw 6 Gripper plate (short or long)
3 M8 x 1.25 T-nut 7 M6x1.0 x 12MM screw
4 Faceplate (short or long)
TABLE 4-9. TRIM CHUTE
Page 4-58
500 machines may have a short or long gripper and face plates. 550
machines will only have a long gripper and face plates. Removal is
identical for both.
Adjustment
Removal
To remove the trim collector chute, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) M8x1.25x18mm screws (Item 2) from inside the trim chute (Item 1). M8x1.25 T-nut (Item
1) will remain inside the rail.
2. Remove trim collector chute from the rail.
To remove the face plate, use the following steps:

1. Remove (7) M6x1.0 x 12MM screw s (Item 7) securing face plate (Item 4) to the machine frame.
2. Remove face plate.
To remove the gripper plate, use the following steps:

1. Remove (4) M5x0.8MM x 12MM screws (Item 5) securing gripper plate (Item 6) to the machine
frame.
2. Remove gripper plate.
Cleaning
Page 4-59
Installation
To install the trim chute, use the following steps:
1. Install trim collector chute (Item 1) onto rail.
2. Install (2) M8x1.25x18mm screws (Item 1) into M8x1.25 T-nut (Item 1).
To install the face plate, use the following steps:

1. Install the face plate (Item 4) onto the machine frame.
2. Install (4) M5x0.8MM x 12MM screws (Item 5) securing face plate to the machine frame.
To install the gripper plate, use the following steps:

1. Install the gripper plate (Item 6) onto the machine frame.
2. Install (4) M5x0.8MM x 12MM screws (Item 5) securing gripper plate to the machine frame.
Page 4-60
Internal Guarding
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use internal guarding.
FIGURE 4-33. INTERNAL GUARDING

1 Tie bar side cover 4 Screw M5x0.7 x 10MM
2 Screw M4x0.7 x 10MM 5 Belt guard
3 Seal bar cover 6 Screw M4x0.7 x 6MM
TABLE 4-10. INTERNAL GUARDING
Page 4-61
Adjustment
Removal
To remove the internal guarding, use the following steps:
1. Remove required screws (Item 2, 4 or 6) securing the cover.
2. Remove required cover (Item 1, 3, or 5).
Cleaning
Installation
To install the internal guarding, use the following steps:
1. Mount the cover (Item 1, 3, or 5) to the machine.
2. Secure the cover using required screws (Item 2, 4 or 6).
Heat Wire Control Board
Whenever the Main Control Board (MCB) or the Heat Wire Control Board
(HWCB) is changed, a heat wire calibration needs to be performed. The
Media Access Control (MAC) address of the MCB is stored in the HWCB
and they must be synchronized in order to work correctly. This syncing is
performed at power up and if the MAC addresses in both boards do not
match, a fault will be indicated.
Whenever the HWCB is changed, there is a thermal pad attached

between the board and the machine base plate. This thermal pad can
remain stuck on the board and should be removed. The new board will
come with a new thermal pad, ensure that 2 pads are not installed when
replacing this board. A thin putty knife or similar is recommended to assist
in removal. Use low strength Loctite on the HWCB mounting screws.
HWCB has a 25 amp fuse (S8V) located directly on the board.
Page 4-62
Heat Wire
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines can be equipped with a reflex or trim heat wire. The maintenance
procedures for both are similar.
FIGURE 4-34. HEATER BAR

1 Spur gear (correct direction for 5 4mm x 14mm dowel pin
adjustment is noted)
2 Heater wire cartridge 6 Heater bar cylinder
3 Teflon scroll 7 Heater mounting bar assembly
4 M4 x 0.7 x 6mm screw and lock
washer
TABLE 4-11. HEATER BAR
Page 4-63
Adjustment
If calibration is needed, refer to Section 4, Operation in the Maintenance Manual for the calibration
procedures. Some items to note prior to performing a heat wire calibration:
1. Calibrations shall be performed at room temperature.
2. The machine shall be at room temperature for calibration.
3. The belly pan should be removed prior to performing a calibration.
4. For reflex wire machines, a good calibrated wire should measure between .55 to .64 ohms in the
heat wire screen after calibration.
If the heat wire calibration fails or values are out of normal ranges, refer to Section 8, Troubleshooting
for additional information.
Removal
To remove the heat wire cartridge, use the following steps:
1. Unthread and remove all the material from the machine.
2. For trim equipped machines, remove the trim collector chute located on the front guard.
3. Remove front guard.
4. Remove seal bar.
5. Remove gripper plate.
6. Disconnect the (2) wire leads on each side of the heat wire cartridge by removing M4x0.7x6mm
screw and lock washer (Item 4) from each lead.
Replace the screws and washers from leads back into the heater bar
cartridge after disconnecting wire leads. The heat wire is spring loaded
and this will prevent the heat wire cartridge from separating into pieces.
7. Pull the heater bar cartridge out from the housing until it stops.
8. Push up from the bottom (2) 4mm x 14mm dowel pins (Item 1) attaching the heater bar cartridge to
actuators (Item 6).
Page 4-64
Cleaning
No cleaning is required.
Installation
To install the heat wire cartridge, use the following steps:
1. Connect (2) wire leads on each side of the heat wire cartridge to the (2) M4x0.7x6mm screw and lock
washer.
The larger gauge power wire connects the M4x0.7x6mm screw and lock
washer closest to the Teflon scroll. The smaller gauge sense wire
connects to the M4x0.7x6mm screw and lock washer farthest from the
Teflon scroll.
2. Set the heater bar cartridge into the heater mounting bar assembly (Item 7).
3. Drop the (2) 4mm x 14mm dowel pin into the heat wire cartridge (Item 2) holes located in the top.
The pins will drop into the holes on the end of the Heater bar cylinder (Item 6) shafts. Pins shall be flush
with the top of the heat wire cartridge.
4. Install gripper plate.
5. Install seal bar.
6. Install front guard.
7. For trim equipped machines, install the trim collector chute located on the front guard.
Teflon Scroll
Adjustment
Refer to Page 5-9 for adjustment procedures.
Removal
To remove the Teflon scroll, use the following steps:
1. Perform heater wire cartridge removal.
Page 4-65
2. Using a small, flat bladed screwdriver (or similar tool) place the tip of the tool into the recess on the
heater bar (Item 1) and gently pry up until the Teflon scroll releases from the clip (Item 2). Repeat for
other side.
3. Release the Teflon scroll from the underside by gently removing the scroll rod from the clips (Item 3).
FIGURE 4-35. TEFLON REMOVAL
Cleaning
Cleaning is not required. If the Teflon scroll becomes dirty or burn spots appear, adjust the scroll to a
new position.
Installation
To install the Teflon scroll, use the following steps:
Ensure that the Teflon scroll is properly wound. The feed side of the scroll
goes into the top of the heater bar.
1. Place the feed side (Item 4) of the roll into the clips (Item 1) in the heater bar. Ensure that Teflon
feeds from the bottom side of the scroll as pictured.
2. Pull out enough Teflon to snap the take up rod (Figure 5-15, Item 5) into the bottom side of the
heater bar clips (Item 3). There should not be any slack in the Teflon. Ensure that the Teflon scroll is
taking up as pictured.
3. Perform heater wire cartridge installation.
Page 4-66
Seal Bar
FIGURE 4-36. SEAL BAR

1 M10 x 1.5 x 25mm screw 3 Guide rod
2 Sealbar 4 Shaft collar
TABLE 4-12. SEAL BAR
Page 4-67
Adjustment
Ensure that the shaft collars (Item 4) allow for the shaft to rotate freely.
They should not cause the shaft to bind.
Removal
To remove the seal bar, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) M10x1.5x25mm screws (Item 1) securing sealbar (Item 2) to guide rods (Item 3).
2. Remove sealbar.
Cleaning
Do not oil or lubricate guide rod or guide rod bearings. Oil and lubricants
will cause premature failure of the guide rods and/or bearings.
Installation
To install the sealbar, use the following steps:
1. Place sealbar (Item 2) onto the guide rods (Item 3).
2. Secure sealbar to guide rods using (2) M10x1.5x25mm screws (Item 1).
Page 4-68
Passthrough
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines are equipped with an adjustable passthrough.
FIGURE 4-37. ADJUSTABLE PASSTHROUGH

1 Adjustment knob 4 Screw M4x0.7 x 16mm
2 Screw M3x0.5 x 20mm 5 Urethane Spring
3 Nut M8 x 1.25
TABLE 4-13. ADJUSTABLE PASSTHROUGH
Page 4-69
Adjustment
To adjust the passthrough, use the following steps:
1. Remove air from the machine. The passthrough cannot be adjusted while the machine is cycling or
has air in the cylinder.
2. Turn the adjustment knob (Item 1) CW to make the passthrough smaller or CCW to make the
passthrough larger.
Tighten nut (Item 2) so that there is no play in the shaft, but torque to turn
shaft does not exceed 0.75 IN-LBS.
Removal
To remove the passthrough urethane springs, use the following steps:
1. Remove (2) screws (Item 4).
2. Remove (2) urethane bumpers (Item 5).
Cleaning
Installation
To install the passthrough urethane springs, use the following steps:
1. Install (2) urethane bumpers (Item 5).
2. Install (2) screws (Item 4).
Page 4-70
Print Head
FIGURE 4-38. PRINT HEAD ADJUSTMENT
Page 4-71
Allow the print head to cool prior any maintenance or cleaning on the print
head.
Adjustment
Print head alignment should be performed when the print head is removed, replaced or poor print label
performance is noted and changing settings in the machine does not improve the quality of the label.
To perform a print head alignment, use the following steps:
1. In the HMI navigate to the DIAGNOSTIC screen.
a. Select DIAGNOSTICS.
b. Select MACHINE TESTS
c. Select PRINT HEAD ADJUST
2. Unlock and raise the printer using the printer handle.
a. Loosen mounting plate thumbscrews (Item 1).
b. Lower the printer and lock the printer handle.
3. Loosen spring-loaded rear horizontal adjusting screws (Item 1) until print head mounting plate no
longer slides rearward.
4. Raise the printer.
a. Install the print head alignment tool (3-002400).
b. Lower and lock the printer.
5. Tighten the horizontal adjusting screws until the print head firmly contacts the alignment tool. Back
the screws off slightly so that the printer can move.
6. Unlock and raise the printer.
a. Remove the alignment tool.
b. Tighten the mounting plate thumbscrews.
c. Lower and lock the printer.
Page 4-72
7. Enter a test label into the printer.
8. Cycle the machine and incrementally tighten the horizontal adjusting screws (approximately ¼ turn)
between test prints until the label prints clearly.
9. Raise the printer.
a. Fully tighten the mounting plate thumbscrews.
b. Lower and lock the printer.
Removal
To remove the print head, use the following steps:
1. Rotate the locking handle on the printer to the up positon.
a. Rotate the printer to the up position.
2. Remove printer ribbon from take up roll.
Printer take up roll is not removable. Do not apply excessive force when
collapsing roller. Pinch hazard exists when collapsing roller.
a. Grasp the take up roller and gently pull away from the printer. The roller will collapse allowing for
the used ribbon to be removed from the roller. Do not attempt to remove the roller from the printer.
3. Disconnect the cables connected to the imprinter head.
a. Remove the power cable by releasing the locking tab on the connector and gently removing the
connector from the print head.
b. Remove the signal cable by removing the 2.5mm hex head screw securing the metal locking
plate for the connector. Gently remove the connector from the print head after the locking plate has
been removed.
Page 4-73
4. Remove the print head mounting screw located at the top front center of the print head with a 2.5mm
hex wrench.
Cleaning
If print quality starts to fade, check the print head for buildup. If cleaning is required, use the following
steps:
1. Rotate the locking handle on the printer to the up positon.
c. Rotate the printer to the up position.
2. Slide the print ribbon clear of the print head.
3. Clean the printing surface of the print head using a non-abrasive, clean, lint free cloth dampened with
90% isopropyl alcohol or an Automated Packaging Systems Printer Cleaning Pen (P/N 26542A1).
4. Rethread the print ribbon according to the printer threading diagram.
5. Lower the printer to the printing position.
a. Rotate the locking handle down to lock the printer into position.
Installation
To install the print head, use the following steps:
1. Install the print head onto the printer ensuring the 2 locating pins are aligned with the print head
holes.
a. Secure the print head to the printer with the 2.5mm hex head screw located at the top front
center of the print head.
2. Connect the 2 cable to the print head.
a. Connect the power cable by gently pushing it onto the print head connector.
b. Connect the signal cable by gently pushing it onto the print head connector. Secure the
connector using the metal locking plate and the 2.5mm hex head screw.
3. Rethread the print ribbon according to the printer threading diagram.
4. Lower the printer to the printing position.
a. Rotate the locking handle down to lock the printer into position.
5. Perform print head adjustment.
Page 4-74
High Voltage Sensor
The High Voltage Sensor is used for detecting bag perforations.
FIGURE 4-39. HIGH VOLTAGE SENSOR

1 M5 x 0.8 x 20mm screw 5 Block Mount
2 Lock Washer 6 Insulator
3 M3 x 0.5 x 20mm screw 7 High Voltage Sensor
4 M3 x 0.5 x 14mm screw
TABLE 4-14. HIGH VOLTAGE SENSOR
Adjustment
Page 4-75
Removal
To remove the high voltage sensor, use the following steps:
1. Remove the infeed tray.
2. Disconnect the ground wire and 4 pin connector on the high voltage sensor (Item 7).
3. Remove (2) M5 x 0.8 x 20mm screw and lock washers (Item 1 and 2) from sensor mounting bracket.
4. Remove (2) M3 x 0.5 x 20mm screws (Item 3) from block mount (Item 5).
5. Remove (2) M3 x 0.5 x 14mm screws (Item 4) from block mount (Item 5).
6. Remove insulator (Item 6).
7. Remove block mount.
8. Open the nip roller.
9. Gently remove the high voltage sensor by maneuvering the sensor arm out of the nip. Do not force.
Cleaning
If needed, clean the sensor arm with Scotch Brite™ #7447 or 7448 pads and 90% Isopropyl rubbing
alcohol.
Installation
1. Open the nip roller.
2. Insert the high voltage sensor (Item 7) by gently maneuvering it into the nip roller. Do not force.
The sensor arm should line up in the center groove on the nip roller.
3. Place the insulator (Item 6) under the high voltage sensor and hold in place.
4. Place the block mount (Item 5) on the high voltage sensor and hold in place with the insulator.
5. Install (2) M3 x 0.5 x 14mm screws (Item 4) into the block mount.
6. Install (2) M3 x 0.5 x 20mm screws (Item 3) into the block mount.
7. Install (2) M5 x 0.8 x 20mm screw and lock washers (Item 1 and 2) into the sensor mounting bracket.
Page 4-76
8. Connect the ground wire and 4 pin connector on the high voltage sensor (Item 7).
9. Install the infeed tray.
Main Motor Drive
FIGURE 4-40. MAIN MOTOR DRIVE

1 Screw M5x0.8 x 18MM 4 Screw M5x0.8 x 16MM
2 Screw M5x0.8 x 30MM 5 Pulley
3 Set Screw M4x0.7 x 6MM 6 Main motor drive
TABLE 4-15. MAIN MOTOR DRIVE
The main motor drive will have a key located on the shaft that is not called
out in the diagram. This is used for locating the pulley on the motor shaft.
Page 4-77
Adjustment
The main motor drive is adjustable for timing belt tension. To adjust the timing belt tension, use the
following steps:
1. Loosen (4) screws (Item 1) on the adjusting motor plate.
2. Turn the adjustment screw (Item 2) CW to loosen to the timing belt, or CCW to tighten the timing belt.
Removal
To remove the Main Motor Drive, use the following steps:
1. Remove belt guard cover.
2. Loosen (4) screws (Item 1) on the adjusting motor plate.
3. Turn the adjustment screw (Item 2) CW to loosen to the timing belt.
a. Remove timing belt.
4. Remove the set screw (Item 4) securing the pulley (Item 5) onto the motor shaft.
5. Remove (4) screws (Item 4) securing the motor (Item 6) to the motor plate.
6. Disconnect (3) cables and ground lug from the motor.
Cleaning
No cleaning is required.
Installation
To install the Main Motor Drive, use the following steps:
1. Mount motor (Item 6) to motor plate and secure using (4) screws (Item 4).
2. Connect (3) cables and ground lug to the motor.
3. Install pulley (Item 5) onto the motor shaft and secure with set screw (Item 4).
4. Install timing belt.
a. Adjust timing belt tension.
5. Install belt guard cover.
Page 4-78
Nip and Print Roller
FIGURE 4-41. NIP AND PRINT ROLLER

1 Screw M8x1.25 x 25MM 11 Roller, Nip
2 Nip Handle 12 Screw M4x0.7 x 25MM
3 Pulley Drive End, Main Nip 13 Main Air Knife Assembly
4 Set Screw M4x0.7 x 6MM, 14 Roller, Print
5 Set Screw 5x0.8 x 6MM 15 Screw M5x0.8 x 18MM
6 Set Screw 5x0.8 x 6MM 16 Screw M4x0.7 x 6MM
7 Pulley, Main Nip 17 Inner Nip Guard
8 Pulley, Print Roller 18 Key
9 Belt, round, 1/8"dia, 5.00" outer 19 Shaft, Nip Roller, Upper
circle
10 Bearing Block, LH and RH 20 Assy, Finger Perf Detector
TABLE 4-16. NIP AND PRINT ROLLER
Page 4-79
Long framed 500 and 550 machines will contain both a print roller and nip
roller. Short frame 500 machines will only contain a nip roller.
Adjustment
Removal
To remove the Main Nip and Print roller, use the following steps:
1. Remove covers.
2. Remove gripper and face plates.
3. Remove internal belt guard cover.
4. Remove (4) screws (Item 12) securing the main air knife assembly (Item 13) down.
a. Remove air blip tube up and away.
5. Remove (4) outside screws (Item 16) securing inner nip (Item 17) guard to frame.
6. Loosen tension motor drive belt for adjustment.
7. Remove set screw (Item 4) in main nip pulley (Item 3).
a. Remove main nip pulley and key (Item 18).
8. Remove timing belt and round belt (Item 9).
9. Remove set screws (Item 5 and 6) in main nip and print roller pulleys (Item 7 and 8).
a. Remove pulleys.
10. Remove (2) screws (Item 15) in each bearing block (Item 10).
a. Remove bearing blocks.
11. Remove nip roller (Item 11) and print roller (Item 14) by carefully sliding out of machine frame.
Page 4-80
Cleaning
If needed clean the nip roller using a clean, lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
The nip roller may be cleaned without disassembling the machine.
Installation
1. Ensure the nip is open
2. Install the print roller (Item 14) and main nip roller (Item 11) into the machine frame.
a. Install the left hand bearing block (Item 10) and secure using (2) screws (Item 15).
b. Install the right hand bearing block (Figure 5-18, Item 10) and secure using (2) screws (Item 15).
3. Place key (Item 18) into the slot on the main nip roller shaft.
4. Install the main nip (Item 8) and print roller (Item 7) pulleys onto the main nip and printer rollers
shafts.
a. Install the round belt (Item 9) on the pulleys and check for proper alignment.
b. Tighten (2) set screws (Item 5 and 6) on both pulleys.
Ensure sets screws are on the flat of the main nip and print roller shaft.
5. Install main nip drive pulley (Item 3) on the main nip roller.
a. Install and tension the belt.
b. Tighten set screw on pullet (Item 4)
Use low strength Loctite® on set screw.
6. Install belt guard.
Page 4-81
7. Install inner nip guard (Item 17) and secure using (4) screws (Item 16)
Make sure finger rake fingers are lined up with the roller.
8. Install air blip tube into slot in machine frame.

9. Install main air knife assembly (Item 13) and secure using (4) screws (Item 12).
10. Install gripper and face plates.
Make sure stripper plate fingers are lined up with the roller
Page 4-82
Inlet Air and Coalescer Filter
FIGURE 4-42. FRL ASSEMBLY

1 Inlet 4 Drain Ports
2 LOTO 5 Coalescer Filter
3 Air Pressure Adjustment Knob 6 Electrical Dump Valve
TABLE 4-17. FRL ASSEMBLY
Adjustment
No adjustment required.
Page 4-83
Removal
1. Press the gray spring lock (Item 5) on the bowl downwards.
2. Turn the bowl clockwise ¼ turn. A slight upward pressure on the bowl may be required.
3. Remove the bowl and remove the filter.
Cleaning
Clean using a lint free cloth and 90% Isopropyl rubbing alcohol.
Installation
1. Position new filter in the bowl and attach bowl by turning counter clockwise until the gray spring lock
connects (Item 5).
E-STOP Relay
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use a single input (SI) safety relay.
440R-S12R2 – Single Input (SI) Dual Channel Safety Relay

• The unit is enabled once power is supplied to the machine and the safety circuits are closed.
• The PWR/Fault LED is green. Safety outputs are activated by a valid reset operation.
• The Output LED is lit. At demand of the safety function or in case of any fault, the safety
outputs are de-energized within the specified response time.
FIGURE 4-43. SAFETY RELAY LED’S
Page 4-84
Reset in Case of Fault
Recoverable fault: Unit can be enabled by removing the fault and cycling all safety inputs.
Non-recoverable faults: Malfunction of the unit itself. Cycling power can reset the unit.
If not, the unit should be replaced before machine operation is allowed.
If the unit is faulted the PWR/Fault LED will be red.
Safety Inputs
FIGURE 4-44. SAFETY RELAY SINGLE INPUT
One string of safety devices can be monitored per unit. Cross-fault monitoring is automatically enabled
for 2-channel safety inputs in 4-wire connection. Cross faults of the safety inputs are monitored as
recoverable faults. Fault reset is required.
Reset
Automated Packaging Systems utilize a manual monitored (MM) reset mode. The signal from the reset
push button passes through a normally closed contact of the E-STOP contactor. This way it monitors
the contacts of the E-STOP contactor to ensure they are not welded shut. A valid start/reset can only
occur if the Emergency Stop push button circuit is closed. The Start/Reset circuit closes to connect
terminals (A1-S34).
Manual monitored reset – In manual monitored reset mode a signal change of the reset circuit is
required. Unit will function once the configured logic is TRUE and the reset circuit is closed and opened
again between 250 ms and 3 seconds. A reset fault occurs if the safety inputs remain opened while the
reset circuit is closed.
Page 4-85
440R-S12R2 Replacement and Configuration
The following procedure sets the function of the device. The device must be installed in the machine to
complete the procedures.
This initializing procedure is done when a safety relay is replaced.
Safety relay testing shall be performed monthly by an authorized

Maintenance Technician.
Replace the Existing Relay

1. Power OFF the machine and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove cover from the Main E-BOX.
3. Remove Safety Relay from DIN rail: Use a screwdriver to gently release the black plastic clip at the
bottom of the relay; insert screwdriver into clip and press down with no more than a 15-degree angle.
FIGURE 4-45. SAFETY RELAY BLACK CLIP FOR DIN RAIL
4. Label the 4 black connectors on the existing relay, eg: 1, 2, 3, 4. (Use these labels for a reference
when inserting connectors to the new safety relay).
5. Remove the top two connectors from the existing relay and attach them to the corresponding position
on the new relay.
6. Remove the bottom two connectors from the existing relay and attach them to the corresponding
position on the new relay.
Page 4-86
7. Attach the new safety relay to the DIN rail.
8. Use a screwdriver to rotate the RESET dial to 0 (zero).
9. Reconnect the power cord.
PWR/FAULT Status and diagnostics

IN Status of safety input
OUT Status of safety output
FIGURE 4-46. SINGLE INPUT DIAGNOSTICS, MM POSITION
Configure the Safety Relay:

1. Power ON. The PWRFault LED will blink red.
2. Use a screwdriver to rotate the RESET dial to MM.
3. Wait for The PWRFault LED to be steady green and the IN LED to blink green.
4. Power OFF to set the configuration.
5. Power ON. The machine will start up in E-STOP.
6. Press the blue RESET button on the HMI.
7. Check that the safety relay has been properly configured: all three LED’s should stay steady green.
(The LEDs are PWRFault, IN, and OUT).
Safety Relay Testing of 440R-S12R2
Normal Operation Verification

The 440R-S12R2 Worksheet provides checklists for testing both the Normal Operation and the
Abnormal Operation of the safety relay. Checklists steps 1-9 at the top of the form are used for normal
operation verification.
1. Operators should perform a weekly check for normal operation verification, steps 1-9 only as
highlighted in form 440R-S12R2 Single Input Testing Worksheet.
2. A Qualified Maintenance Technician should perform a monthly test using the entire checklist for
testing both normal operation and abnormal operation verification.
Page 4-87
440R-S12R2 – Single Input - Testing Worksheet
FIGURE 4-47. 440R-S12R2 TESTINGWORKSHEET
Page 4-88
Sensors
The machine has several sensors used in the operation of the machine.
Seal Bar Sensor

The seal bar sensor consists of an emitter and receiver thru-beam sensors.
The seal bar sensors are a matched set and must be replaced together.
Slot Sensors
The machine uses (5) slot sensors to detect the position of the seal bar during normal operation. These
sensors are interchangeable and do not need to be matched.
Page 4-89
BLANK PAGE
Page 4-90
TECH SUPPORT
Subject Page
Technical Support ................................................................5-3

Ordering Replacement Parts ............................................5-3
Machinery Return Procedures..............................................5-4
Spare Parts List ...................................................................5-5
Basic ................................................................................5-5
Intermediate .....................................................................5-5
Major ................................................................................5-5
Autobag 500 Spare Part Lists ..............................................5-6
Autobag 500 Basic Parts Kit
P/N 3-004253-003 ............................................................5-6
Autobag 500 Intermediate Parts Kit
P/N 3-004253-002 ............................................................5-7
Autobag 500 Major Parts Kit
P/N 3-004253-001 ............................................................5-8
Autobag 550 Spare Part Lists ..............................................5-9
Autobag 550 Basic Parts Kit
P/N 3-004254-003 ............................................................5-9
Autobag 550 Intermediate Parts Kit
P/N 3-004254-002 ..........................................................5-10
Autobag 550 Major Parts Kit
P/N 3-004254-001 ..........................................................5-11
Heater Bar Part List ...........................................................5-11
H-Class Printer Spare Part Lists ........................................5-12
H-Class OneStep 203 DPI parts
list – P/N 3-004120-203 ..................................................5-12
H-Class OneStep 300 DPI parts
list – P/N 3-004120-300 ..................................................5-12
H Class OneStep 406 DPI parts
list – P/N 3-004120-406 ..................................................5-13
H-Class OneStep Additional printer parts .......................5-13
Page 5-1
Autobag 500 and 550 Tubing............................................. 5-14
Bag and pouch materials ................................................... 5-15
Page 5-2
Technical Support
This section includes the procedures for requesting technical support and the part lists used to identify
and order replacement parts for the Autobag 500 series machine.
A stock inventory of spares will minimize lost production time due to worn or broken parts.
Need Help? Contact a technical support representative at the local office listed below, your local area
Automate Packaging Systems representative, or an authorized distributor.
For International Support send e-mail to the Technical Assistance Team at
TechAssistance@autobag.com.
Technical Support Location Contact Number

Inside USA 1-800-527-0733
Outside Europe and USA 0011+1+800-527-0733
Latin America 009+1+800-527-0733
United Kingdom 0800 731 3643
Brussels, Belgium +32 (0)2725 3100
France +33 0472 15 86 50
Germany +49 (0)531 903 83 0
TABLE 5-1. TECHNICAL SUPPORT CONTACT NUMBERS
Refer to the contact information in the front of the manual for additional
regional office contacts.
Ordering Replacement Parts

Follow these guidelines when ordering replacement parts:
1. When ordering replacement parts, use both the part name and part number.
2. If a complete subassembly is needed, use the subassembly name and part number.
3. Have the machine serial number available. The Autobag Serial Number tag can be found on the right
front leg of the bagger support frame.
Page 5-3
FIGURE 5-1. SERIAL NUMBER TAG
Machinery Return Procedures

For technical support in North America or to start the return process, please call the Automated
Packaging Systems Technical Support Team at 1-888-277-0785 and select from the options.
The Technical Support Team should be contacted for all Automated Packaging Systems machine
repair or replacement issues. Please have the machine part number and serial number ready when
making the call.
For technical support outside of North America, call the Technical Support Location listed in Table 5-1,
your area Automate Packaging Systems representative, or an authorized distributor.
Page 5-4
Spare Parts List
There are three types of spare parts kits for Automated Packaging Machines:
Basic
The minimum amount of spare parts to be kept on hand.
Intermediate
Includes the Basic spare parts kit and the amount of spare parts to be kept on hand for smaller
packaging companies.
Major
Includes Basic and Intermediate spare parts kits and the amount of spare parts to be kept on hand for
machinery requiring maximum production readiness and immediate repairs to reduce downtime.
Page 5-5
Autobag 500 Spare Part Lists
Autobag 500 Basic Parts Kit P/N 3-004253-003

Item Part No. Qty. Description
1 3-002730 2 FINGER, HIGH VOLTAGE, F12V
2 29418A1 1 FILTER,AIR COALESING .3 MICRON
3 29419A1 1 FILTER,AIR .5 MICRON
4 3-003915 1 ASSY, TEFLON SHEET W/RODS 12"
5 3-003167 1 TEFLON, HEATER BAR 12" SCROLL
6 591091A1 2 SPRING, NIP ROLL
7 3-002715 1 RUBBER, SEAL 13" WIDE
8 3-003082 1 ASSY, FINGER PERF DETECTOR
9 10148AS6 1 PIN, COTTER, 1/16 X 3/4", SS
10 3-001972 1 SPRING, TORSION, PERF SENSOR
11 2-002429 1 SPRING, COMPRESSION .477 OD X

1.75 LG X .087 MW BLACK
TABLE 5-1. AUTOBAG 500 BASIC PARTS KIT
Page 5-6
Autobag 500 Intermediate Parts Kit P/N 3-004253-002
1 3-004253-003 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB500 - BASIC
2 2-002166 1 BELT, TIMING, 140XL, 14.0” OC, 70T,

3/8” WIDE (Short frame machine use
only)
3 20521A1 1 BELT, TIMING, 1/5"P
4 3-002634 1 ROLLER, NIP RUBBER 12" BAGGER
5 2-002165 1 BELT, TIMING, 150XL, 15.0” OC, 75T,

3/8” WIDE (Long frame machine use
only)
6 2-002040 1 BELT, ROUND, 1/8" DIA, 4.75" OUTER

CIRCLE, URETHANE
7 2-001852-039 2 BEARING, BALL, SEALED, 12MM ID X

28MM OD X 8MM, STEEL
8 2-001850-024 2 BEARING, BALL, SEALED, 10mm ID X

19mm OD X 5mm
9 200398A1 1 VALVE, 3-WAY DOUBLE N.C. 2 POS.
10 200398A2 1 VALVE, 4-WAY SOLENOID 2 POS
11 200398A3 1 VALVE, SOL DBL 3-WAY EXH

CENTER
12 200398A4 1 VALVE, SOL DBL 3-WAY BLK

CENTER
13 2-002443 3 SENSOR, PHOTOELECTRIC, 5mm

SLOT, 24V PNP, 200mm M8 Lead
14 3-003532 1 ASSY, SENSOR & CABLE,

PRESSURE SENSOR W/ PLUG
TABLE 5-1. AUTOBAG 500 INTERMEDIATE PARTS KIT
Page 5-7
Autobag 500 Major Parts Kit P/N 3-004253-001
1 3-004253-002 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB500 -
INTERMEDIATE
2 2-001985 1 CYLINDER, SEALBAR 1-1/2" BORE, 5-

1/2" STROKE
3 3-004223 1 ASSY, MOTOR, SERVO NEMA23

W/ENCODER & 5:1 GEARBOX
4 2-001986 2 CYLINDER, HEATERBAR 3/4" BORE, 1-

1/2" STROKE
5 3-002454 1 ASSY, MOTOR SERVO NEMA23

W/ENCODER WIRED
6 2-002182 2 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW M5

TO 4mm TUBE x 1mm IRIS
TABLE 5-1. AUTOBAG 500 MAJOR PARTS KIT
Page 5-8
Autobag 550 Spare Part Lists
Autobag 550 Basic Parts Kit P/N 3-004254-003

1 3-002730 2 FINGER, HIGH VOLTAGE, F12V
2 29418A1 1 FILTER,AIR COALESING .3 MICRON
3 29419A1 1 FILTER,AIR .5 MICRON
4 3-003915 1 ASSY, TEFLON SHEET W/RODS 12"
5 3-003167 1 TEFLON, HEATER BAR 12" SCROLL
6 591091A1 2 SPRING, NIP ROLL
7 3-002715 1 RUBBER, SEAL 13" WIDE
8 3-003082 1 ASSY, FINGER PERF DETECTOR
9 10148AS6 1 PIN, COTTER, 1/16 X 3/4", SS
10 3-001972 1 SPRING, TORSION, PERF SENSOR
11 2-002429 2 SPRING, COMPRESSION .477 OD X 1.75

LG X .087 MW BLACK
TABLE 5-1. AUTOBAG 550 BASIC PARTS KIT
Page 5-9
Autobag 550 Intermediate Parts Kit P/N 3-004254-002
1 3-004254-003 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB550 - BASIC
2 20521A1 1 BELT, TIMING, 1/5"P
3 3-002635 1 ROLLER, PRINT 12" BAGGER
4 2-002165 1 BELT, TIMING, 150XL, 15.0” OC, 75T, 3/8”

WIDE
5 3-002634 1 ROLLER, NIP RUBBER 12" BAGGER
6 2-002040 1 BELT, ROUND, 1/8" DIA, 4.75" OUTER

CIRCLE, URETHANE
7 2-001852-039 2 BEARING, BALL, SEALED, 12MM ID X

28MM OD X 8MM, STEEL
8 2-001850-024 1 BEARING, BALL, SEALED, 10mm ID X

19mm OD X 5mm
9 200398A1 1 VALVE, 3-WAY DOUBLE N.C. 2 POS.
10 200398A2 1 VALVE, 4-WAY SOLENOID 2 POS
11 200398A3 1 VALVE, SOL DBL 3-WAY EXH CENTER
12 200398A4 1 VALVE, SOL DBL 3-WAY BLK CENTER
13 2-002443 3 SENSOR, PHOTOELECTRIC, 5mm SLOT,

24V PNP, 200mm M8 Lead
14 3-003532 1 ASSY, SENSOR & CABLE, PRESSURE

SENSOR W/ PLUG
TABLE 5-1. AUTOBAG 550 INTERMEDIATE PARTS KIT
Page 5-10
Autobag 550 Major Parts Kit P/N 3-004254-001
1 3-004254-002 1 KIT,SPARE PARTS AB550 -
INTERMEDIATE
2 2-001985 1 CYLINDER, SEALBAR 1-1/2" BORE, 5-1/2"

STROKE
3 3-004223 1 ASSY, MOTOR, SERVO NEMA23

W/ENCODER & 5:1 GEARBOX
4 2-001986 2 CYLINDER, HEATERBAR 3/4" BORE, 1-

1/2" STROKE
5 3-002454 1 ASSY, MOTOR SERVO NEMA23

W/ENCODER WIRED
6 2-002182 2 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW M5 TO

4mm TUBE x 1mm IRIS
TABLE 5-2. AUTOBAG 550 MAJOR PARTS KIT
Heater Bar Part List

1 3-003162-001 1 ASSY, HEATER BAR REFLEX 12”
2 3-003162-002 1 ASSY, HEATER BAR TRIM 12”
TABLE 5-3. HEATER BAR SPARE PART LIST
Replacement heater bars are ordered as an assembly only and are

specific to Reflex or Trim wire machines. The heater bar assemblies are
not interchangeable.
Page 5-11
H-Class Printer Spare Part Lists
H-Class OneStep 203 DPI parts list – P/N 3-004120-203

1 3-001915 2 ROLLER, RUBBER RIBBON DRIVE
2 29738A1 1 PRINTHEAD, THERMAL TRANSFER, 203

DPI
3 3-004048 1 ASSY, CYLINDER AIR HEAD DOWN 14MM

BORE W/ FITTINGS
4 3-002521 1 NOSE, ROD END HEAD DOWN CYLINDER
TABLE 5-4. 203 DPI PRINTER SPARE PARTS KIT
H-Class OneStep 300 DPI parts list – P/N 3-004120-300

1 3-001915 2 ROLLER, RUBBER RIBBON DRIVE
2 2-002087 1 PRINTHEAD, THERMAL TRANSFER, 300

DPI H-CLASS
3 3-004048 1 ASSY, CYLINDER AIR HEAD DOWN 14MM

BORE W/ FITTINGS
4 3-002521 1 NOSE, ROD END HEAD DOWN CYLINDER
TABLE 5-5. 300 DPI PRINTER SPARE PARTS KIT
Page 5-12
H Class OneStep 406 DPI parts list – P/N 3-004120-406
The 406 DPI spare parts listed has not been released as of the printing of this manual.
H-Class OneStep Additional printer parts

1 28559A1 1 SPINDLE, RIBBON TAKE-UP LH 412
2 28559A2 1 SPINDLE, RIBBON TAKE-UP RH 412
TABLE 5-6. ADDITIONAL PRINTER PARTS
Page 5-13
Autobag 500 and 550 Tubing
Part Number OD Color Length
3-004859_1 10mm Black 15.75
3-004859_2 10mm Black 8.00
3-004859_3 10mm Black 2.75
3-004859_4 10mm Black 2.75
3-004859_5 10mm Black 18.00
3-004859_6 10mm Black 10.25
3-004859_7 6mm Black 24.50
3-004859_8 6mm Black 3.50
3-004859_9 6mm Blue 14.00
3-004859_10 6mm Blue 12.00
3-004859_11 6mm Blue 13.25
3-004859_12 6mm Black 24.50
3-004859_13 6mm Black 2.25
3-004859_14 4mm Black 9.75
3-004859_15 4mm Black 16.25
3-004859_16 6mm Blue 23.00
3-004859_17 4mm Blue 12.00
3-004859_18 4mm Blue 15.50
3-004859_19 6mm Black 35.25
3-004859_20 6mm Black 14.00
3-004859_21 6mm Blue 35.25
3-004859_22 6mm Blue 11.00
3-004859_23 6mm Black 35.25
3-004859_24 6mm Black 15.50
3-004859_25 6mm Blue 4.50
3-004859_26 6mm Black 2.25
3-004859_27 6mm Black 2.25
3-004859_28 4mm Black 4.50
3-004859_29 4mm Black 4.50
TABLE 5-7. AUTOBAG SERIES TUBING
Page 5-14
Bag and pouch materials
Automated Packaging Systems is the original manufacturer of genuine Autobag pre-opened bags-on-a-
roll. These bags are system matched for optimum performance and offer a variety of value-added
features.
To order Autobag packaging supplies, contact Automated Packaging Systems:

10175 Phillip Parkway
World Headquarters: 1-800-527-0733 / 330-342-2000

Field Service: 1-888-277-0785
Fax: 330-342-2400
On the Web: www.autobag.com
E-mail: customerservice@autobag.com / info@autobag.com
For information on bag and pouch materials, please visit our website at: http://www.autobag.com/bag-
and-pouch-materials/films-by-type
Page 5-15
BLANK PAGE
Page 5-16
THEORY OF OPERATION
Subject Page
Major Hardware Sections .....................................................6-3

Main Electrical Assembly ..............................................6-3
Powered Unwind ...........................................................6-3
Printer (optional) ...........................................................6-3
Main Nip .......................................................................6-3
Pneumatics ...................................................................6-4
Seal Area ......................................................................6-4
Load Shelf.....................................................................6-4
HMI ...............................................................................6-4
Page 6-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 6-2
Major Hardware Sections
The major hardware sections of the Autobag 600 and 650 consist of the following:
Main Electrical Assembly

The Main Electrical Assembly consists of the following:
• Main Electrical Enclosure (E-BOX)
• Electrical Boards
• Servo Motors
• Power Supplies (voltages)
• Fuses and LEDs
• Cables
• E-STOP Circuits
Powered Unwind
The powered unwind consists of the following hardware:
• Nip
• Dancer (1 servo motor)
Printer (optional)
The Printer consists of the following hardware:
• DataMax H-Class Printer Head
• Printer Pivot
• Printer Electrical Enclosure
Main Nip
The Main Nip consists of the following hardware:
• Feed buttons
• Nip (open) Levers
• Upper Nip Roller
• Lower Nip Roller
Page 6-3
Pneumatics
The Pneumatics consists of the following hardware:
• Air Preparation Assembly
• Hose Entry and Distribution Manifold
• Valve Manifold
• Seal Bar
• Heater Bar
• Air Pulse and Blower
• Load Shelf
• Air Guide
Seal Area
Sealing Area consists of the following hardware:
• Sealer Bar
• Heater Bar
• Air Blip
• Air Pulse
• Air Blower
• Trim Jet (optional)
Load Shelf
Load shelf consists of the following hardware:
• Vertical Shelf
• Articulating Load Shelf
HMI
The HMI consists of the following hardware:
• Control Screen
• Adjustable Arm
Page 6-4
E-STOP System
When the machine is in E-STOP, the following happens:
• Dump valve activates
• Valve manifold disables
• Safety contactor opens
Anti-Jam Safety
The Anti‐Jam safety circuit looks at a variety of sensors and signals to determine thru logic gates and
flip flops if the system is in a safe state or not. The logic then drives an output stage to power up two
intercept valves.
Boards Overview:
• Main Control Board (MCB)
• E‐Box Connector Board (EBCB)
• Upper Frame Connector Board (UFCB)
• Heat Wire Control Board (HWCB)
• Crowbar Board (CBB)
MCB
The Main Control Board (MCB) for the machine is the main brain of the machine. The MCB controls the
motion system for the machine. It collects and distributes Ethernet signals for the machine. The SRAM
battery is located on the MCB.
EBCB
This board is the heart of the Autobag electrical system. This board takes every signal to/from the Main
Control Board and redistributes them and/or manipulates the signal.
Page 6-5
UFCB
Takes bulk connections of I/O (J1‐J3) and power (J4) and distributes those to additional
connectors/devices located in the ‘upper frame’ section of the machine. The safety E-STOP is a large
part of this board.
HWCB
The machine has a Heat Wire Control Board (HWCB) that controls the heat of the wire by suppling
constant current thru the heat wire
CBB
This board looks for voltage spikes generated by the motors on the power rail. If a spike is detected, it
is diverted and suppressed thru power resistors.
Page 6-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Subject Page
General Troubleshooting ..................................................... 7-3

Power Supplies ................................................................... 7-4
Main Fuse Location and Replacement ................................ 7-5
Part Compatibility ................................................................ 7-7
E-STOP Safety Switches and Reporting Circuit .................. 7-8
Valve Pack .......................................................................... 7-9
E-BOX Connections .......................................................... 7-11
Heat Wire Board (HWB) .................................................... 7-12
Heater Bar and Heat Wire.............................................. 7-13
Dancer .............................................................................. 7-14
Upper Frame Connector Board (UFCB) ............................ 7-16
Main Control Board (MCB) ................................................ 7-19
Heartbeat Codes............................................................ 7-23
Blink Codes ................................................................... 7-23
E-BOX Connector Board (EBCB) ...................................... 7-26
Heat Wire Board (HWB) .................................................... 7-29
Crowbar Board .................................................................. 7-29
HMI Control Board (HMICB) .............................................. 7-30
Anti-Jam Safety System .................................................... 7-31
Possible Operational Faults............................................... 7-35
Printer E-BOX ................................................................... 7-37
Page 7-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 7-2
General Troubleshooting
A good maintenance policy includes checking the operation of the machine against known
specifications. When operating difficulties occur, observe what is happening, search out the cause, and
make an adjustment. Make only one adjustment at a time and then check for a result. If an adjustment
does not help or increases the difficulty encountered, adjust it back to the previous position and then
move on to the next step.
All adjustments must be performed by a qualified maintenance technician.
Before performing any maintenance, perform LOTO procedures.
Power is always live to line filters, contactors and power switch. Unplug
and perform LOTO procedures when servicing or troubleshooting.
Avoid damage to electronic components. Never weld on the unit.
Many common issues may be resolved by performing a power cycle after

clearing a fault.
If there are no causes or solutions listed in the following sections that

apply to your situation, do not make any adjustments. Call Automated
Packaging Systems at one of the following telephone numbers:
Customer Service: 1-800-527-0733 or 330-342-2000

Field Service: 1-888-277-0785
Technical Service: 1-800-316-6994
E-mail: techassistance@autobag.com
Page 8-3
Power Supplies
The Autobag 500 and 550 has three power supplies used to power the machine and are in the Main E-
BOX:
• PS10031 15VDC, 600W Heat power supply
• PS10101 48VDC, 600W Motor power supply
• PS10251 24VDC, 200W Bagger power supply

The Autobag 550 has an additional power supply used for the printer and is in the Printer E-BOX:
• PS10201 Printer power supply
Page 7-4
Main Fuse Location and Replacement
The main fuse locations for the machine are mounted on the DIN rail assembly in the E-BOX. The DIN
rail also contains other components used in the electrical system.
FIGURE 7-1. DIN RAIL ASSEMBLY

1 Safety Relay SR13171 6 Terminal Board 1 (5-8)
2 Fuse 10031 7 Fuse 10021
3 Fuse 10101 8 Fuse 10201
4 Terminal Board 1 (1-4) 9 Fuse 10251
5 E-STOP contactor CR13151
TABLE 7-1. DIN RAIL ASSEMBLY
Page 8-5
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines require different fusing depending on
the input power. Refer to Table 7-2 for correct fusing based on the power
kit selected.
Fusing for 100V and 120V

USA
Part
Location Description
Number
Fuse 10251 27014A8 Fuse, 5 Amp CC, Time Delay
Europe, South Korea, China, Thailand, India 50Hz
Part
Number
Fuse 10251 27014A5 Fuse, 2.5 Amp CC, Time Delay
Japan, Australia, Thailand 60Hz
Part
Number
TABLE 7-2. FUSING FOR POWER KITS
Page 7-6
Fuse replacement must be accomplished by a qualified maintenance
technician.
Replace fuses as follows:

1. Ensure that the power is switched to OFF (O).
2. Open the E-BOX door and locate the fuse holders in the upper left corner of the E-BOX.
3. Open fuse holder and remove fuse.
4. Insert a new fuse.
5. Close fuse holder and E-BOX door
6. Turn the power switch to ON (I) to verify operation.
The fuses are ATDR type arc flash rated and must be replaced with the
correct fuse. The fuse holders are designed to accept only ATDR type arc
flash rated fuses and will not work with incorrect fuses.
Part Compatibility
The Autobag 500 and 550 machines use software, firmware and hardware that must be compatible with
each other in order to function correctly. When troubleshooting or ordering parts ensure that parts
ordered are the correct versions. These parts may include, but are not limited to:
• Webserver Board
• Heat Wire Control Board
• Main Control Board
• HMI software
• Machine Firmware
In addition to correct compatibility, some parts may need to be programmed when ordered as spare
parts.
Page 8-7
E-STOP Safety Switches and Reporting
Circuit
The Autobag 500 and 550 machine uses a reporting circuit and switched for the E-STOP circuit. The E-
STOP HMI page shows the state of the switches in the circuit.
Green shows the contact closed. Red shows the contact open. Any switch that is open will cause the
machine to enter an E-STOP condition.
The reporting contact must be in the circuit for it to show for it to show that the reporting contact was
made. If a jumper on the upper frame connector board is missing or the contacts are broken for the
reporting contact, it will show as green (closed) in the HMI screen instead of open (red).
FIGURE 7-2. CONTACTS CLOSED
FIGURE 7-3. CONTACT OPEN
Page 7-8
Valve Pack
Valve pack stations assignments are listed in Figure 7-4. Blanks will be installed for machines that do
not require the needed valves for an option.
A tool is required to open the drawer containing the valve pack.
Station valves may be manually actuated using the manual override

buttons contained on the valve. Manually overriding a station valve will
actuate the system attached to it and safety circuits will be bypassed
during this method of valve actuation.
Ensure station valves are returned to their normal (non-locked) position

prior to returning the machine to normal operating condition.
Page 8-9
FIGURE 7-4. VALVE PACK
ITEM NOMENCLATURE ITEM NOMENCLATURE

1 Station 1V1, Seal Bar 8 Station 8V1, Trim Nozzles
2 Station 2V1, Heat Bar 9 Station 9V1, Blank (reserved for
future use)
3 Station 3V1, Air Pulse/Blower 10 Valve Pack Connector
4 Station 4V1, Air Guide/Seal Bar 11 Air Input
Home
5 Station 5V1, Support Shelf 12 Air Input
6 Station 6V1, Accumulating Funnel 13 Top row 2B ports (blue airline)
7 Station 7V1, Seal Flatteners 14 Bottom row 4A ports (black airline)
TABLE 7-3. VALVE PACK
Page 7-10
E-BOX Connections
The E-BOX connections are shown in Figure 7-5.
FIGURE 7-5. E-BOX CONNECTIONS

1 Main Power Cable 13 Printer Power Cable
2 Unwind Home Hall Position 14 Ground Cable Upper Machine
Sensor Frame
3 TCU Motor Feedback 15 Heat Wire Power Cable
4 Interface Signaling 16 Heat Wire Ethernet to MCB
Connections
5 Ground Cable Unwind 17 Webserver to Main Control
Cable
6 ETHERNET Connection 18 Tablet to Main Control Cable
7 Valve Pack Signal cable 19 Footswitch Palm #1 Switch
Cable
8 Input Signals Cable 20 Palm Switch #2
9 Output Signal Cable 21 Upper Frame bd Power Cable
10 Misc Signal Cable 22 Unwind Motor Feedback Cable
11 Main Nip Motor Feedback 23 Dancer Feedback Cable
12 Main Nip Motor 24 Unwind Servo Motor Cable
TABLE 7-4. E-BOX CONNECTIONS
Page 8-11
Heat Wire Board (HWB)
The HWB controls the heat wire for proper sealing. There are (2) heat wires available for the Autobag
500 and 550 machines, Reflex for standard machines and Trim for trim model machines. Below is a
table showing values for each heat wire.
MODEL
REFLEX TRIM
Wire
resistance
0.050 (Ω/inch) 0.027 (Ω/inch)
/ inch
(default)
Wire
12 inch 12 inch
length
Heat state Current Current
Current Current
Temperature Channel Temperature Channel
Level Level
Number Number
OFF N/A N/A ≤ 0.005 A N/A N/A ≤ 0.005 A
IDLE 130 °F 3 6.59 A 130 °F 5 10.68 A
RUN 180 °F to 180 °F to
3 6.59 A 5 10.68 A
234 °F 204 °F
235 °F to 205 °F to
6 12.7 A 10 20.91 A
374 °F 384 °F
375 °F to 375 °F to
7 14.75 A 12 25.01 A
450 °F 450 °F
TABLE 7-5. HEAT WIRE VALUES
Temperature drift in the heat wire could be an issue for troubleshooting in

environments where large temperature variances occur.
The HWB has a specific MAC address that is stored in the machine software during calibration. The
MCB and HWB boards MAC addresses must match; otherwise a heat wire error will occur. When either
the HWB or the MCB is changed, a heat wire calibration must be performed.
Page 7-12
Heater Bar and Heat Wire
The heater bar requires calibration whenever any of the follow criteria are met:
• HWB is changed.
• Main Control Board (MCB) is changed.
• SD card is reprogrammed or replaced.
• Heat Wire is changed.
• Machine sealing performance is degraded.

If a heat wire calibration is performed and fails, or heat wire values are not as expected check the
following items:
1. Check for shorts in the heat bar assembly.
a. Remove the heat wire sense and power cable to HWCB.
b. Measure the resistance (in ohms) from the heatwire to the machine frame. If a short is measured,
the heat bar is shorted to machine and must be repaired or replaced.
c. Connect the heat wire sense and power cables after checking for shorts.
2. Verify that the heat firmware is the latest version. Update the machine firmware if required.
3. Verify in the Machine Setup Data the correct Heat Wire Type is selected.
4. In the Heat Wire screen, the Calibrated Wire Temperature should read at or near ambient room
temperature. If this value is not within a few degrees, check the thermocouple on the HWCB.
a. Check the thermocouple wiring for secure connections and/or broken wiring.
b. Thermocouple should read low resistance (in ohms) when measured with a meter. If the
thermocouple reads high resistance or open, repair or replace as needed.
A reflex wire should measure between .55 to .64 ohms for Calibrated Wire
Resistance in the Heat Wire screen.
A standard multi-meter cannot be used to measure millivolts.
Page 8-13
Dancer
The dancer menu in the HMI is explained below for aiding troubleshooting.
Name Indication
APS Hall Sensor Count A number representation of the position of the Hall
Sensors for Homing Unwind
Dancer Encoder Count Number representation of the Encoder position in relation
to the Homed position. Hall Sensors are only used during
Homing of the Unwind, after the homing is complete the
Unwind is controlled by using the Encoder count and the
calculated Dancer Angle.
Dancer Angle in degrees A calculated number that is used to control the start, stop,
speed, bag out and up positions for the Unwind.
Homed Status Green is indication that the Unwind was Homed
Tensioning Position Goes green when homed and has bags in place. Will go
Status red if the machine is in e-stop.
TABLE 7-6. DANCER HMI MENU
The dancer menu will show the counts and angle of the dancer in real time. Below are some expected
values to expect during machine operation.
FIGURE 7-6. MACHINE ON AND NOT HOMED
Page 7-14
FIGURE 7-7. MACHINE WAS JUST HOMED BUT HAS NOT MOVED
THE FESTOON TO TENSION THE BAG WEB
FIGURE 7-8. MACHINE IS READY, THE UNWIND WAS HOMED

AND THE FESTOON HAS TENSION ON THE BAG WEB
Page 8-15
Upper Frame Connector Board (UFCB)
The upper frame connector board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Fuse
Connector Description Fuse Description
Value
J1 D SUB TO MAIN CONTROL F1 .75A 33Volt Guard Switch
BOX Input signals 123
J2 D SUB TO MAIN CONTROL F2 .75A 33Volt Start Stop
BOX Output signals Button
J3 D SUB TO MAIN CONTROL F3 .75A 33Volt Guard Switch 4
BOX Slot Sensors and I/O
J4 +12 and +24 VDC Power F4 OPEN
supply
J5 HMI Reset Button, Start F5 .75A Light Curtain
Stop, HMI Report Contacts E 33Volts
stop, E Stop button String A
and B
J6 +24 VDC Ground and Earth F6 OPEN
J7 Guard Switch 1-2-3 Strings F7 .75A 33 Light Curtain 2
A and B E-stop Volts
J8 Heat Board Signaling and E- F8 .20A 30Volt Heat E-stop
stop Strings A and B string
J9 Rear E-stop Left reporting E- F9 .20A 30Volt E-stop buttons
stop Strings A and B, Dancer
Thread
J10 Rear E-stop Right reporting F10 .20A 30Volt Spare E-stop
E-stop Strings A and B, Heat board
Dancer Thread signals
J11 External E-stop Strings A F11 OPEN
and B
J12 Guard Switch 4 Strings A F12 .20A 30Volt Count Eye
and B E-stop
J13 Light Curtain Muting LED F13 .20A 30Volt SureFill
J14 Light Curtain #2 F14 .20A 30Volt Bag Detect
Sensor Back
J15 Curtain Fans 1-4 F15 .20A 30Volt Bag Detect
Sensor Front
J16 Light Pole F16 .20A 30Volt Air Pressure
Sensor
J17 Count Eye and Cycle Eye F17 .20A 30Volt SureFill Emitter
J18 Air Pressure Sensor F18 .20A 30Volt Count/Cycle
Emitter
Page 7-16
TABLE 7-7. UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD
Page 8-17
Connector Description Fuse Fuse Value Description
J19 High Voltage Perf Sensor F19 .20A 30Volt Anti-Jam

Legacy NPN and PNP. Refer Emitter
to schematic for jumper
settings
J20 Dump Valve F20 .20A 30Volt Sensors 3
J21 Light curtain #1 F21 .20A 30Volt Sensors 2
J22 SureFill Sensor F22 .20A 30Volt Funnel open
sensor
J23 Jog Forward and Jog F23 .20A 30Volt Funnel closed
Reverse sensor
J24 Seal Bar Out Sensor #1, Seal F24 .20A 30Volt Sensors 4
Bar Sensor In, Anti-Jam Mute Clamp
Sensor #1 Sensors
J25 Seal Bar Out Sensor #2 and F25 OPEN
Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #2
J26 Anti Jam Sensor Seal Bar F26 .20A 30Volt Threading
Switch Top
J27 Bag Detect Sensor Back F27 .20A 30Volt Sensors 9
J28 Bag Detect Sensor Front F28 .20A 30Volt Heat Bar
Sensors L&R
J29 Funnel Closed Sensor, F29 OPEN
Funnel Open Sensors #1 and
#2
J30 Clamp Senor Left and Right F30 .05A 60 Anti Jam Safe
Volts to EBCB
J31 Heat Bar Sensor Right and
Left
J32 Anti - Jam Sensor Safe
Interrupter Valve
J33 Seal Bar out pressure Sensor
TABLE 7-7. UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD (CONTINUED)
Page 7-18
Main Control Board (MCB)
The main control board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Connecto Descriptio
Supplies LED Color Status Description
r n
J1 Ethernet +1.2 Vdc DS Blue On when Reset
block of 4 500mA 1 button is Button LED
Supply for pressed
FPGA
J2 Ethernet +2.5 Vdc DS Red / Various Heartbeat
block of 2 500mA for 2 Green (Refer to LED
FPGA Heartbeat
Codes)
J3 Ethernet + 3.3Vdc DS Green On unless +3.3 Vdc
block of 4 for always 3 fuse blown Supply
on LDO Regulator
J4 SD Card +1.5 Vdc DS Green On unless +5 Vdc
Port 220mA for 4 fuse blown Supply
DDR Regulator
J5 Boot +3.3Vdc DS Yellow On unless +24 Vdc
Jumpers 200ma For 5 fuse blown Supply FH1
for SD Battery
Booting
J6 DataMax +3.3Vdc 1 DS Yellow Off unless Valve Pack
and A for 6 fuse blown FH2
Pressure VYBRID
Sensor and
Analog
Input
Interface
J7 JTAG +24Vdc DS7 Yellow Off unless Safety
Main fuse blown String FH3
Supply
J8 3.7Vdc +12 Vdc DS Yellow Off unless PMW
lithium 8 fuse blown Supply FH4
Battery
J9 Batter off +5 Vdc DS Yellow Off unless Motor 1
or on 9 fuse blown Main Nip
Battery on Servo
= 2 and 3
J10 VYBRID +3.3 Vdc DS Yellow Off unless Motor 2
COM 0 10 fuse blown Dancer
Spare RS TCU Servo
232
J11 VYBRID DS Yellow Off unless Motor 3
COM 2 11 fuse blown Unwind Nip
DEBUG Servo
RS 232
Page 8-19
J12 Sensors, DS Yellow Off unless Motor 4
Signaling 12 fuse blown Seal Bar
and Spare Servo
Inputs
TABLE 7-8. MAIN CONTROL BOARD
Page 7-20
Connector Description Supplies LED Color Status Description
J13 High Voltage
interface and
spare
outputs
J14 External pins
for External
Software
Test Probing
J15 +24 Vdc IN
from power
supply
J16 VYBRID
COM 3
DataMax
RS232
Interface
J17 PMD
DEBUG RS
232 Interface
J18 Valve Station
1 -5
J19 FPGA JTAG
Programming
Port
J20 Signaling,
Light Pole,
Heat Bd,
Light Curtain
muting and
spare
outputs
J21 External
UART COM
A and B
J22 External
UART COM
A and B
J23 Valve Station
6-12
J24 E-stop
strings HMI,
Heat Bd,
Guards and
reporting
TABLE 7-7. MAIN CONTROL BOARD (CONTINUED)
Page 8-21
Connecto Descriptio Descriptio
Supplies LED Color Status
r n n
J25 PMD Atlas
Motor
Power
from
Crowbar
Bd
J26 Main Nip
Encoder
feedback
J27 Unwinder
Dancer
Encoder
Feedback
J28 Unwinder
Nip
Encoder
Feedback
J29 Seal Bar
Encoder
Feedback
J30 PMD
Position
Limit I/O
J31 Servo
Motor Main
NIP
J32 Servo
Motor
Unwind
Dancer
850S
J33 Servo
Motor
Unwind
NIP
J34 Servo
Motor Seal
Bar 850S
J35 Light
Curtain
fans, Print
Head
solenoid
J36 E stop
string A
and B In
and out
TABLE 7-7. MAIN CONTROL BOARD (CONTINUED)
Page 7-22
Heartbeat Codes
The MCB contains a heartbeat LED indicator on the board. This LED indicator will indicate status of the
machine using a red and green LED indicator.
Machine state MCB Heartbeat LED indication

E-STOP Blinking ON and OFF RED in 2 seconds intervals.
Idle Blinking ON and OFF GREEN 0.5 second intervals.
Cycle Blinking ON and OFF GREEN in 0.125 second intervals.
Jogging Blinking ON and OFF GREEN in 0.0625 second intervals.
Error Blinking ON and OFF GREEN in 0.5 second intervals.
Failure/Fault Blinking ON and OFF RED in 0.25 second intervals. Number of blinks is
equal to the error code. 1 second pause in between code.
TABLE 7-8. HEARTBEAT CODES
Blink Codes
The heartbeat LED will indicate blink codes for machine errors. If the heartbeat LED is indicating a blink
code, use Table 7-9 for fault codes and Table 7-10 for failure codes to determine the likely fault.
Fault codes and failure codes overlap for blink codes. Confirm with
diagnostics log in the HMI if you have a fault or failure in the event of an
overlapping code.
Blink Code Fault Code

3 FaultControlMotor1Voltage
16 FaultMainNipDriveOvercurrent
17 FaultMainNipDriveOperatingModeMismatch
18 FaultMainNipDriveOvervoltage
19 FaultMainNipDriveUndervoltage
20 FaultMainNipDriveFoldback
21 FaultMainNipDriveOverTemperature
22 FaultMainNipDriveSPIChecksum
TABLE 7-9. FAULT BLINK CODES
Page 8-23
Blink Code Fault Code
24 FaultDancerDriveOvercurrent
25 FaultDancerDriveOperatingModeMismatch
26 FaultDancerDriveOvervoltage
27 FaultDancerDriveUndervoltage
28 FaultDancerDriveFoldback
29 FaultDancerDriveOverTemperature
30 FaultDancerDriveSPIChecksum
32 FaultUnwinderDriveOvercurrent
33 FaultUnwinderDriveOperatingModeMismatch
34 FaultUnwinderDriveOvervoltage
35 FaultUnwinderDriveUndervoltage
36 FaultUnwinderDriveFoldback
37 FaultUnwinderDriveOverTemperature
38 FaultUnwinderDriveSPIChecksum
40 FaultSealbarDriveOvercurrent
41 FaultSealbarDriveOperatingModeMismatch
42 FaultSealbarDriveOvervoltage
43 FaultSealbarDriveUndervoltage
44 FaultSealbarDriveFoldback
45 FaultSealbarDriveOverTemperature
46 FaultSealbarDriveSPIChecksum
48 FaultHeat
52 FaultHeatWire
TABLE 7-9. FAULT BLINK CODES (CONTINUED)
Page 7-24
Blink Code Failure Code
3 FailureControlFPGAVersionInvalid
5 FailureControlHighVoltage
6 FailureControlSealbarSensors
7 FailureControlSafetyRelay
16 FailureMainNipDriveBoot
17 FailureMainNipDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
18 FailureMainNipHallSensor
24 FailureDancerDriveBoot
25 FailureDancerDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
26 FailureDancerHallSensor
32 FailureUnwinderDriveBoot
33 FailureUnwinderDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
34 FailureUnwinderHallSensor
40 FailureSealbarDriveBoot
41 FailureSealbarDriveSoftwareVersionInvalid
42 FailureSealbarHallSensor
48 FailureHeatBoot
49 FailureHeatSoftwareVersionInvalid
50 FailureHeatCommunications
53 FailureHeatWireBoot
54 FailureHeatWireSoftwareVersionInvalid
55 FailureHeatWireCommunications
58 FailurePrinterBoot
59 FailurePrinterSoftwareVersionInvalid
61 FailurePMDBoot
62 FailurePMDSoftwareVersionInvalid
TABLE 7-10. FAILURE BLINK CODES
Page 8-25
E-BOX Connector Board (EBCB)
The E-BOX connector board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Fuse Fuse Test

Connector Description Description
Number Value Point
J1 To UFCB F1 EBCB .40A Valve Station NC
60Volt Common
J2 To UFCB F2 EBCB 8Ohm 3 Safety TP24
amp Contacts
J3 To UFCB F3 EBCB .20A 30 Reset Blue TP113
Volt LED
J4 +24 and +12 F4 EBCB .05A 60 AutoMode TP97
Vdc in Volt State Fused
J5 To +24Vdc F5 EBCB .05A 60 Dancer
Volt Position
Feedback
J6 DataMax Printer F6 EBCB .05A 60 Printer OK to TP117
Interface Volt Print Fused
J7 A and B Valve Pack F7 EBCB .05A 60 Curtain Fan 3
Volt
J8 E Stop and F8 EBCB .20A 30 Curtain Fan 1
relay, contactor Volt
and reset button
contacts
J9 Shorting F9 EBCB .05A 60 Curtain Fan 4
Jumper Volt
connector
J10 Palm and F10 .20A 60 Curtain Fan 2
Footswitch EBCB Volt
Input 1 and 2
J11 Print Head F11 .20A 30 Dump Valve TP14
Solenoid or EBCB Volt
Valve
J12 Input sensors F12 .75A Contactor TP132
and signals to EBCB 33Volt Power
MCB
J13 High Voltage F13 .05A 60 Valve Station 1 TP26
Sense and EBCB Volt A Permitted
ground
J14 DataMax Printer F14 .20A 30 Foot and Palm
GPIO EBCB Volt switch 1 and 2
TABLE 7-11. E-BOX CONNECTOR BOARD
Page 7-26
Fuse Fuse Test
Number Value Point
J15 To MCB Spare F15 .20A 30 Spares out
I/O EBCB Volt
J16 Spare I/O and F16 .05A 60 Signaling TP64
Anti-jam EBCB Volt Spare 2 Input
J17 Take Away F17 .05A 60 Feeder OK TP60
Conveyor Start EBCB Volt cycle Bagger
J18 Valve Pack 1-5 F18 .05A 60 Inhibit Cycle TP57
stations +24 EBCB Volt
Vdc and Palm
and foot switch
In
J19 Dancer F19 .05A 60 Printer Busy TP52
Position EBCB Volt Fused
Feedback
J20 Output Signals F20 .05A 60 Signaling TP79
from MCB pass EBCB Volt Spare 2 Fused
thru
J21 Signaling and F21 .05A 60 Feeder OK TP80
Spare in EBCB Volt Cycle Bagger
Fused
J22 Shorting F22 .05A 60 Printer Busy
Jumper EBCB Volt
connector
J23 Valve Station F23 0.05A Inhibit Cycle TP83
6-12 and EBCB 60Volt Input
common
J24 E Stop Status F24 .05A 60 Inputs Output TP88
Reporting EBCB Volt Pull up or down
J25 Not used F25 .05A 60 Outputs, TP91
EBCB Volt Output pull up
or down
J26 F26 .05A 60 Inputs Input TP 95
EBCB Volt pull up or down
J27 F27 .05A 60 Bagger Stop TP96
EBCB Volt Error Fused
J28 F28 .05A 60 Bagger Hold TP93
EBCB Volt Fused
J29 F29 .05A 60 Signaling TP131
EBCB Volt Spare 1
TABLE 7-11. E-BOX CONNECTOR BOARD (CONTINUED)
Page 8-27
Fuse Fuse Test
Number Value Point
J30 F30 .05A 60 Bagger OK TP121
EBCB Volt Ready to load
Fused
J31 F31 .05A 60 Signaling Spare TP118
EBCB Volt Output 1 fused
J32 F32 .20A Conveyor Start NC
EBCB 30V Stop Out
J33 F33 .05A Signaling Spare TP136
EBCB 1 Input fused
J34 BF1 2A
58Volt
J35 Curtain Fans,
Print Head
Solenoid and
spare PWM
J36 E Stop String A F36 .20A 30
-B in and A-B EBCB Volt
out
F37 .20A
EBCB 30Volt
F38 TP13
EBCB
LED Seal Bar F39
out Pressure EBCB
LED Anti Jam F40 .20A 30 NC
Safety Logic EBCB Volt
Output
Power On Red F41 .20A 30 NC
EBCB Volt
Fuse Red F42 .05A 60 Foot and Palm TPTP96
EBCB Volt Switch In
F43 .05A 60 Input Output TP160
EBCB Volt Pull up or down
F44 .05A 60 Input, Input Pull TP176
EBCB Volt up or down
TABLE 7-11. E-BOX CONNECTOR BOARD (CONTINUED)
Page 7-28
Heat Wire Board (HWB)
The heat wire board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.
Connector Description Connector Description

J1 Heat Reporting, Power, E J10 E stop String A
stop and I/O
J2 Heat Wire + & - J11 E stop String B
J3 Heat Power In DS 1 Heart Beat Red/Green
LED
J4 Thermocouple DS2 Firmware Update Success
Green LED
J5 Ethernet Port RJ -45 type DS3 Firmware Update Failed
Red LED
J6 DEBUG and Programming DS4 Spare LED Green
J7 Spare UART Port DS5 Spare LED Green
J8 UART DEBUG Port BF1 25A 58 Volt fuse
J9 Wire Voltage Connection
TABLE 7-12. HEAT WIRE BOARD
Crowbar Board
Regulates voltage for Servo Power Supply from the high regenerative voltage created in the Servo
motors during deceleration and braking

J1 48 Vdc from power supply J3 Connections for External
Resistors
J2 Power supply to MCB J4 Not used
TABLE 7-13. CROWBAR BOARD
Page 8-29
HMI Control Board (HMICB)
The HMI control board connections are explained below for aiding in troubleshooting.

J601 Power Connection to J609 +24 Vdc from UFCB J-6
Webserver bd.
J602 LAN connections to Main J611 To Start/Stop Push Button
E box Top and Bottom
connections to MCB J1
J603 LAN connections to J612 To Reset Push Button
Webserver board (top) and
Tablet (bottom)
J604 Power Connection to BF 601 2A 58Vdc +5v Webserver
Android Tablet Supply
J605 E-stop and I/O to MCB F1 .75A 33Vdc +24 Vdc
supply
J606 To HMI E-stop push button F2 .20 30V HMI Buttons
+24Vdc
J607 USB to exterior of +24 V Supply Red LED
enclosure for programming
J608 USB connection to +5V Supply LED
Webserver Bd
TABLE 7-14. HMI CONTROL BOARD
Page 7-30
Anti-Jam Safety System
The Anti‐Jam safety circuit looks at a variety of sensors and signals to determine thru logic gates and
flip flops if the system is in a safe state or not. The logic then drives an output stage to power up two
intercept valves.
These intercept valves control air to the Seal Bar In and the Heat Bar Out. The following devices are
integral to the circuit:
1. Anti-Jam Receiver. Detects the beam from the Anti-Jam Emitter. If the emitter signal is not detected,
the receiver will trip the Anti-Jam circuit. The receiver has a gray cabling and a red LED that will be
illuminated when it is operation.
2. Anti-Jam Emitter. Emits the beam for the Anti-Jam system. The beam is bounced off 2 reflecting
mirrors on the seal bar and is detected by the receiver. The emitter has black cabling.
3. Seal Bar Out Sensor #1. Detects when the seal bar is fully out. The LED light on the sensor will be
illuminated when the sensor is OFF and dark when the sensor is ON.
4. Seal Bar Out Sensor #2. Mutes the anti-jam sensors for the bounce when the seal bar reaches the
end of its travel. The LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and dark when
the sensor is ON.
5. Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #1. Detects when the seal bar enters the safe zone near the gripper plate, just
before the seal cycle starts. The LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and
dark when the sensor is ON.
6. Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #2. Detects when the seal bar enters the safe zone near the gripper plate, just
before the seal cycle starts. The LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and
dark when the sensor is ON. Allows for the Anti-Jam safety logic to be muted during the retract of the
seal bar.
Page 8-31
7. Seal Bar In Sensor. Detects when the seal bar is all the way in and the seal cycle can begin. The
LED light on the sensor will be illuminated when the sensor is OFF and dark when the sensor is ON.
When the seal bar is retracting away from the gripper plate, this acts as a start to the mute for the
retract of the seal bar.
a. The mute clears when any of the following happen:
(1). Seal Bar Out Sensor 1 is actuated.
(2). Seal Bar Out Sensor 2 is actuated.
(3). Valve Station 1A (seal bar in signal) is activated.
(4). Machine goes into E-STOP.
(5). It receives a clear signal from the software.
8. Intercept Valves. The intercept valves must be active to allow the sealbar to cycle. If they are tripped
or faulted, they interrupt the Seal Bar In Valve pneumatic/air lines to Valve Station 1A.
b. 1V2 Seal Bar on top.
c. 2V2 Heater Bar on bottom.
9. Seal Bar Out Pressure Sensor. Pressure sensor must read 50 Psi for the seal bar to close properly.
Sensor is not interchangeable with the machine pressure sensor located

in the belly pan.
10. Fixed Flow Control Valve. Restricts flow to the seal bar cylinder. 1.4mm iris for normal operation
and 1.0mm iris for slow operation.
The Anti-Jam signals can be monitored and troubleshot using the Sealbar menu in the HMI
Diagnostics. To troubleshoot individual sensors, place the machine in E-STOP or dump air and move
the seal bar manually to engage/disengage each sensor.
Page 7-32
Sealbar Sealbar Heatbar Heatbar
Diagnostic Name Indication
Open Closed Engage Disengage
Main Air Pressure Actual Reading in
N/A N/A N/A N/A
psi
Sealbar Out Green ON,
Green Red Red Red
Red OFF
Sealbar Out Mute Green ON,
Green Red Red Red
Red OFF
Sealbar In Green ON,
Red Green Green Green
Red OFF
Jam Green ON.
Green Red Red Red
Red OFF
Jam Mute 1 Green ON.
Red OFF
Jam Mute2 Green ON.
Red OFF
Jam Reset Output Green ON.
Green Green Green Green
Red OFF
Jam Detect Input * Green ON.
Red Red Red Red
Red OFF
Sealbar close Green ON.
Output Red OFF
Sealbar Open Green ON.
Green Red Red Red
Output Red OFF
Sealbar Home Green ON.
Red Red Red Red
Output Red OFF
Heaterbar Output Green ON.
Red Red Green Red
Red OFF
TABLE 7-15. SEALBAR DIAGNOSTICS STATES
FIGURE 7-9. SEALBAR DIAGNOSTICS MENU
Page 8-33
2
1
8
10
4 9
6
7
FIGURE 7-10. ANTI-JAM SAFETY SYSTEM COMPONENTS
ITEM NOMENCLATURE ITEM NOMENCLATURE

1 Anti-Jam Receiver (gray cable) 6 Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #1
2 Anti-Jam Emitter (black cable) 7 Anti-Jam Mute Sensor #2
3 Seal Bar Out Sensor #1 8 Intercept Valves 1V2 and 2V2
4 Seal Bar Out Sensor #2 9 Pressure Sensor
5 Seal Bar In Sensor 10 Fixed Flow Control Valve
TABLE 7-16. ANTI-JAM SAFETY SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Page 7-34
Possible Operational Faults
Listed in table 7-17 are some possible operational faults a user may encounter and suggested items to
check to resolve the problem.
For an explanation of HMI pop up errors, refer to POPUP MESSAGES in

Operation Module.
Symptom Possible Problem Possible Solution

Machine does not power No power to the machine Check input power
up. FU 10021 Replace fuse
Machine powers up, FU 10201 Replace fuse
WAITING FOR PRINTER
ID 61 popup error on
screen, No printer screen
on E-BOX
E-BOX printer screen FU 10251 Replace fuse
comes on, No power to the
rest of the machine
Machine powers up, Hall effect connector on Repair connection
DANCER HOMING unwinder
ERROR #121 and #122 broken/disconnected
Machine powers up, Cable 18071 on unwinder Repair connection
UNWINDER HALL broken/disconnected
SENSOR FAILURE ID 313,
machine won’t cycle
Machine powers up, when Unwinder motor drive Repair connection
cycled UNWINDER DRIVE connecter
ERROR #103 popup error broken/disconnected
Machine powers up, when Anti-jam beam blocked Check mirrors on Anti-jam
cycled SEAL BAR JAM assembly
popup error
SEAL BAR CLOSING #109 Valve pack not getting Repair valve pack
popup error, Machine won’t power/signal connection
cycle, No power to valve
pack (no lights on valve
pack)
TABLE 7-17. OPERATIONAL FAULTS
Page 8-35
Machine won’t come out of Dump valve inoperative Replace dump valve
E-STOP, LOW AIR Connection to UFCB Repair connection
PRESSURE #151 popup broken/disconnected
error
HEAT WIRE BOOT Network connection to Repair connection
FAILURE #320 popup error, HWCB broken/disconnected
Machine won’t come out of
E-STOP
Seal bar goes in and stays FU10031 Replace fuse
in, HEAT SYSTEM FAULT
#233 popup error
MOTOR 1 & 3 MOTOR FU10101 Replace fuse
VOLTAGE FAULT #200
and #202 popup error
HMI screen blank with HMI connection 34301 on Repair connection
machine powered on UFCB broken/disconnected
Power switch inside HMI Turn power switch on
turned off
Machine won’t come out of Jumper on J7 of UFCB Replace jumper
E-STOP, No error popups, broken/disconnected
E-STOP screen shows Main E-STOP switch broken Replace switch
error on main E-STOP
switch
Funnel not operating No air, pressure regulators Adjust air pressure
set at 0
Valve in valve pack not Replace valve
operating
Seal Flattener not operating No air, pressure regulators Adjust air pressure
set at 0
Valve in valve pack not Replace valve
operating
Machine fails safety circuit Sensors and/or flags not Inspect sensor and flags for
test functioning correctly proper operation, Repair or
replace as needed
Seal rubber deformed or Replace seal rubber
deteriorated
Funnel jam error Funnel physically obstructed Remove obstruction
Sensor misaligned or not Align sensor
functioning Verify sensor connection to
UFCB
Check HMI setting for funnel
TABLE 7-15. OPERATIONAL FAULTS (CONTINUED)
Page 7-36
Gateway timeout on HMI Bad or corrupted SD card on Verify SD card and files
MCB
FAB Disconnecting Bad or corrupted SD card on Check blink code on
message on HMI MCB heartbeat LED
Bad or corrupted SD card Verify SD card and files for
Webserver MCB and Webserver board
Webserver board
Printer E-BOX repeatedly Shorted wiring on DATA side Check cabling for shorts to
reboots ground on DATA side
Ensure metal retaining clip
on black connecter on the
printer has not shorted wiring
440R-S12R2 relay Relay is not programmed or Program relay
PWR/Fault LED blinking red lost programming Replace relay
Solid amber LED on Machine configuration lost or Check machine is configured
heartbeat light. Seal bar defaulted correctly
does not go in, load shelf
cycles one direction only
when machine is cycled, no
errors on HMI
TABLE 7-15. OPERATIONAL FAULTS (CONTINUED)
Printer E-BOX
The printer E-BOX power switch should always remain on . Control of the printer E-BOX should be
controlled by the main E-BOX power switch only. If the printer E-BOX is turned on after the main E-
BOX, the machine will not communication with the printer correctly and will require a power cycle.
Page 8-37
BLANK PAGE
Page 7-38
MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
Subject Page
Kit, Decal, AB500 3-004313 Rev K ......................................8-5

Kit, Decal, AB550 3-004332 Rev J .......................................8-6
Assy, Stand Manual Adjust AB500
3-003095 Rev J Sheet 1 of 2................................................8-7
Assy, Stand Manual Adjust AB500
3-003095 Rev J Sheet 2 of 2................................................8-8
Assy, Stand Raised Unwind 3-002996 Rev C ......................8-9
Assy, FRL, AB500 Series 3-002912 Rev G ........................8-10
ASSY, MOUNTING, VALVE MANIFOLD
3-004052 Rev A .................................................................8-11
Assy, Covers, AB500 3-003104 Rev F Sheet 1 of 2 ........... 8-12
Assy, Covers, AB500 3-003104 Rev F Sheet 2 of 2 ........... 8-13
Assy, Internal Guards, AB500 3-004217 Rev A.................. 8-14
Assy, Belly Pan, AB500 3-003649 Rev C.1
Sheet 1 of 2 .......................................................................8-15
Assy, Belly Pan, AB500 3-003649 Rev C.1
Sheet 2 of 2 .......................................................................8-16
Assy, Base AB500 3-002667 Rev C...................................8-17
Assy, Main Motor Drive 3-002771 Rev C ...........................8-18
Assy, Main Nip F12 3-002758 Rev J ..................................8-19
Assy, Main Nip, F12 W/O Print Roller
3-003827 Rev F .................................................................8-20
Assy, Passthrough Adjust, AB500 3-005291 Rev A ........... 8-21
Assy, Passthrough Adjust 3-005373 Rev A ........................8-22
Assy, Short Frame CE Reflex 12”
3-005601-001 Rev B ..........................................................8-23
Assy, Long Frame CE Reflex 12”
3-005601-002 Rev B ..........................................................8-24
Assy, Short Frame CE Trim 12”
3-005601-003 Rev D ..........................................................8-25
Page 8-1
Assy, Long Frame CE Trim 12” 3-005601-004 Rev D ........ 8-26
Assy, Sealer with Shutter 3-003150 Rev M.1..................... 8-27
Assy, Heater W/ Scroll CE 12” Reflex
3-005600-001 Rev B ......................................................... 8-28
Assy, Heater W/ Scroll CE 12” Trim
3-005600-002 Rev B ......................................................... 8-29
Assy, Elec Routing Kit CE, AB-500 3-005593 Rev D ......... 8-30
ASSY, PNEUMATIC ROUTING KIT, F12V
3-003138 Rev K ................................................................ 8-31
Assy, EBOX Main Control, AB500 3-005591 Rev B........... 8-32
Assy, DIN Rail AB Series EBOX 3-004845 Rev C ............. 8-33
Assy, Hotwire Thermal, Mounting 3-003306 Rev E............ 8-34
Assy, HMI Display 3-006612 Rev B ................................... 8-35
Assy, HMI Arm 3-003470 Rev D ........................................ 8-36
Assy, Powered Unwind 12” 3-001800 Rev N
Sheet 1 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-37
Assy, Powered Unwind 12” 3-001800 Rev N
Sheet 2 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-38
Assy, Latch Printer Pivot, Ext 3-003018 Rev C .................. 8-39
Assy, Printer AB H-Class, CE 3-004010 Rev J
Sheet 1 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-40
Assy, Printer AB H-Class, CE 3-004010 Rev F
Sheet 2 of 2 ....................................................................... 8-41
Assy, EBOX Printer Top Mount 3-002746 Rev G............... 8-42
Kit, DPI AB H-Class Printer 3-002400 Rev D
Sheet 1 of 3 ....................................................................... 8-43
Sheet 2 of 3 ....................................................................... 8-44
Sheet 3 of 3 ....................................................................... 8-45
Kit, Tie-In for PI-412C to AB500 3-006626 Rev A.1 ........... 8-46
Kit, Tie-In for PI-412CW to AB500 3-006627 Rev A ........... 8-47
Kit, Tie-in Autolabel 500 to AB500 3-004396 Rev C .......... 8-48
Assy, Transition Roller, AB500 3-003185 Rev B ................ 8-49
Assy, Load Shelf 12” W 3-002873 Rev C .......................... 8-50
Assy, Shelf Articulating Load 12’ W 3-003168 Rev E......... 8-51
Kit, Simple Count SM-AB500 3-003573-001 Rev B ........... 8-52
Kit, Simple Count LG-AB500 3-003573-002 Rev B ............ 8-53
Assy, Unwind, Tower, Bag-In-Box, AB500
Page 8-2
3-003640 Rev D ................................................................. 8-54
Kit, Weight STD Powered Unwind 3-003717 Rev B ........... 8-55
Kit, Weight Cross Bar Additional AB500
3-003734-001 Rev C ..........................................................8-56
Assy, HMI Arm Z-Riser 3-005142 Rev A ............................8-57
Assy, Front Guard Safety Switch 3-005118 Rev A ............. 8-58
Assy. Rotary Seal Flattener 3-003219 Rev E .....................8-59
Assy, Seal Flattener, Finger Style 3-003466 Rev B ............ 8-60
Assy, Seal Flattener, Paddle Style 3-003611 Rev B .......... 8-61
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – .75”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-62
Assy, Funnel SQ Acum CE Metric – 1.00”
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-63
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-64
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-65
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-66
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-67
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-68
3-005297 Rev C .................................................................8-69
Assy, Funnel 3 Round Basic – 595942A30 Rev B.............. 8-70
Assy, Funnel Round 3 CE – 595941B30 Rev C ................. 8-71
Assy, Funnel Round 3.5 CE – 595941B35 Rev B .............. 8-72
Assy, Cable E-STOP 8 pin to flying leads 10’
3-005588 Rev A .................................................................8-73
Assy, Sure-Fill 3-003742 Rev B .........................................8-74
Page 8-3
BLANK PAGE
Page 8-4
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 3 27488A4 DECAL, BURN HAZARD-HOT SURFACE 3/4 IN.
2 1 3-005028 DECAL, UNWIND, SAFETY RELEASE
3 1 3-004324-001 DECAL, MANIFOLD, AB500 SERIES, DOMESTIC
4 1 3-004321-002 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES, OPP.
5 1 3-004321-001 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES
6 2 3-004306 DECAL, AUTOBAG 500
7 1 3-004080-002 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL, OPP.
8 1 3-004080-001 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL
9 2 3-004079 DECAL, NIP FEED
10 1 3-004077 DECAL, AIR PULSE
9
11 1 3-004076 DECAL, AIR GUIDE 1
12 1 3-004075 DECAL, AIR BLOWER
9
13 1 2-002647-003 DECAL, DECAL, DO NOT REACH INTO, 1.5" DIA. 1
14 1 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
15 4 2-002482-002 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 1.5" DIA.
16 2 2-002482-001 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 3/4" DIA.
17 1 2-002478-002 DECAL, GENERAL DANGER 1.30"
3
OPEN TRAY TO APPLY DECAL
1
DETAIL A
SCALE 3/4
15
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
1
1
A
16 APPLY TO EXTRUSION
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
5
1
14 APPLY TO TOP SURFACE

1 OF LEXAN GUARD
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
2
1 DETAIL B
SCALE 1/2
15
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
SEE DETAIL A
7 11 10 12
8 1 1 1 1
1
6
1 6
17 1
1
15
2 4
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
NEARSIDE AND FARSIDE
APPLY NAMEPLATE
DECAL IN SHOWN
LOCATION
SEE DETAIL B
1 13 1 K DMF 3-20-19 1870

REMOVED AB-500-OP, AB-500-MM, 2-002480-002,
APPLY TO GRIPPER PLATE

28640A1, REMOVED ALL LANGUAGE KITS
1 1 1 APPLY TO GRIPPER PLATE

MAIN E-BOX REMOVED FOR CLARITY J GHM 10-29-18 1504 ADDED ITALIAN -009
ADDED 3-004313-028, -031, -032, -037, -039;
H DMF 4-27-18 1455 REMOVED SHEET 2; REPLACED 28640A2 WITH 28640A1
ADDED 3-004313-008, -012, -013, -016 & -018
G GHM 10-23-17 1267 ADDED SHEET 2 OF 2
ADDED AB-500-OP, -FR, -DE, -ES
F GHM 7-27-17 1165 -NL
E GHM 6-12-17 1095 ADDED AB-500-MM MANUALS
D GHM 04/26/17 1046 ADDED REVISION ROW, & AB-500-OP
ADDED 2-002482-001, 3-005028, 2-002647-003,

C DMF 11-15-16 831 CHANGED QTY 27488A4 (3) WAS (2)
B LDC 08-17-16 716 ADDED 4X 2-002482-002, 1X 2-002478-002
FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
Under Review
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
2 PLACE DIMS # .02 # 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: DMF
AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 7/32 DATE: 04-13-16
CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
Fabricated & Documented TITLE
KIT, DECAL,
DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
3-004313 K
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB 500, CE
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 1 595163A1 DECAL, APS DOMED
2 3 27488A4 DECAL, BURN HAZARD-HOT SURFACE 3/4 IN.
3 1 3-005028 DECAL, UNWIND, SAFETY RELEASE
4 1 3-004324-001 DECAL, MANIFOLD, AB500 SERIES, DOMESTIC
5 1 3-004321-002 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES, OPP.
6 1 3-004321-001 DECAL, THREADING DIAGRAM, AB500 SERIES
7 2 3-004307 DECAL, AUTOBAG 550
8 1 3-004080-002 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL, OPP.
9 1 3-004080-001 DECAL, NIP TENSIONER CONTROL 14
1
10 2 3-004079 DECAL, NIP FEED 10
11 1 3-004077 DECAL, AIR PULSE 1
12 1 3-004076 DECAL, AIR GUIDE
13 1 3-004075 DECAL, AIR BLOWER
14 1 3-003269 DECAL, PRINTHEAD, THREADING DIAGRAM 10
1
15 1 2-002647-003 DECAL, DECAL, DO NOT REACH INTO, 1.5" DIA.
16 1 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
17 4 2-002482-002 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 1.5" DIA.
18 2 2-002482-001 DECAL, DO NO OPERATE W/GUARDS REMOVED, 3/4" DIA.
19 1 2-002478-002 DECAL, GENERAL DANGER 1.30"
4
OPEN TRAY TO APPLY DECAL
DETAIL A 1
SCALE 3/4
17
BEHIND MAIN COVER 1
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
2
1
6
1
3 16 APPLY TO TOP SURFACE

1 1 OF LEXAN GUARD
1 UNDER LEXAN GUARD
17 DETAIL B
BEHIND MAIN COVER SCALE 1/2
1
SEE DETAIL A
7 9 1 8 12 11 13 19 7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BEHIND MAIN COVER

NEARSIDE AND FARSIDE
17
5
2
1
APPLY NAMEPLATE
DECAL IN SHOWN
LOCATION
SEE DETAIL B
REMOVED AB-500-OP, AB-500-MM, 2-002480-002,

J DMF 3-20-19 1790 28640A1, REMOVED ALL LANGUAGE KITS
H GHM 10-29-18 1504 ADDED ITALIAN -009

ADDED 3-004332-028, -031, -032, -037, -039;
G DMF 4-27-18 1455 REMOVED SHEET 2; REPLACED 28640A2 WITH 28640A1
ADDED 3-004332-008, -012, -013, -016 & -018
F GHM 10-23-17 1267 & SHEET 2 OF 2
2 2 PRINTER AND MAIN E-BOX NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY E GHM 7-28-17 1165 ADDED AB-500-OP, -FR,-GR, -ES, -NL
APPLY TO GRIPPER PLATE APPLY TO GRIPPER PLATE
1 1 D GHM 6-12-17 1095
ADDED AB-500-MM & AB-500-OP
ADDED REV TO TABLE
ADDED 2-002647-003, 3-005028, 2-002482-001;
C DMF 831
15 11-15-16 CHANGED QTY- 27488A4 (3) WAS (2)
1 B LDC 08-17-16 716 ADDED 4X 2-002482-002, 1X 2-002478-002
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
Under Review
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
KIT, DECAL,
3-004332 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB 550, CE
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-005016 ASSY, STAND, UPRIGHT, AB500
2 1 3-002912 ASSY, FRL, AB500 SERIES
3 2 3-002886 BLOCK, UNWIND MOUNT
4 1 3-002859 BASE, FRAME, STAND
5 2 3-002703-1 BLOCK, E-BOX MOUNT ADAPTER
6 2 1-32165A NUT, JAM, M10X1.5, STEEL, ZINC PLATED
J
7 2 1-14465A-020M SCREW, SET, FLAT POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 20MM, ZINC PLATED
8 4 1-11165F-035M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 35MM LG, SS
1
1
2
1
3 9
2 4
8
1
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)

M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
6
M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
M12 X 1.75 604.1
7 5 10
2 2 4 J KJD 08-08-18 1618 REMOVED 1-21365D
H KJD 04-25-18 1448

4
1-11165F-035 WAS 1-11165F-030
G GHM 1069
8 1 5-24-17 ADDED 1-32165A & 1-14465A-020M
F DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED SHEET 2 WITH LH CONFIGURATION

3 MOVED UPRIGHT COMPONENTS TO NEW
F DMF 11-11-16 817 ASSEMBLY 3-005016
1-11163F-030M (4) WAS 1-11163F-045M
E LDC 07-08-16 618 ADDED DIMENSION
REPLACED SPRING 3-001976 WITH 3-003898
D DMF 12-18-15 376 ADDED 3-002703-1 (2)
REPLACED 3-003097, 3-002872, 3-003008, 3-003009 WITH
3-003507, 3-003096 WITH 3-003508, 3-002883 WITH 3-003524,
C DMF 10-1-15 226 3-002888 WITH 3-003521, 3-001824 WITH 592073A1,
2-002185 WITH 2-002256; REMOVED 3-002905, 3-002904,
3-002877; ADDED 2-002257
B LDC 09-15-15 226 REMOVED 3-002894, 1-11459F-012M WAS (4)
A BJS 6-30-15 42 PROTOTYPE
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
ASSEMBLY FOR RIGHT-HAND MACHINE

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
ASSY, STAND,
3-003095 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION MANUAL ADJUST AB500
1 1 3-005016 ASSY, STAND, UPRIGHT, AB500
2 1 3-002912 ASSY, FRL, AB500 SERIES
3 2 3-002886 BLOCK, UNWIND MOUNT
4 1 3-002859 BASE, FRAME, STAND
5 2 3-002703-1 BLOCK, E-BOX MOUNT ADAPTER
6 2 1-32165A NUT, JAM, M10X1.5, STEEL, ZINC PLATED
J 7 2 1-14465A-020M SCREW, SET, FLAT POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 20MM, ZINC PLATED
1
1
9 3
4 2
2
1


M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
J KJD 08-08-18 1618 REMOVED 1-21365D
H KJD 04-25-18 1448 1-11165F-035 WAS 1-11165F-030
G GHM 5-24-17 1069 ADDED 1-32165A & 1-14465A-020M

6 F DMF 1-11-17 897
10 5
ADDED SHEET 2 WITH LH CONFIGURATION
2 MOVED UPRIGHT COMPONENTS TO NEW
4 2 F DMF 11-11-16 817 ASSEMBLY 3-005016
1-11163F-030M (4) WAS 1-11163F-045M
E LDC 07-08-16 618 ADDED DIMENSION
REPLACED SPRING 3-001976 WITH 3-003898
D DMF 12-18-15 376 ADDED 3-002703-1 (2)
7
4
REPLACED 3-003097, 3-002872, 3-003008, 3-003009 WITH
3-003507, 3-003096 WITH 3-003508, 3-002883 WITH 3-003524,
2 C DMF 10-1-15 226 3-002888 WITH 3-003521, 3-001824 WITH 592073A1,
1 2-002185 WITH 2-002256; REMOVED 3-002905, 3-002904,

3-002877; ADDED 2-002257
B LDC 09-15-15 226 REMOVED 3-002894, 1-11459F-012M WAS (4)
8 A BJS 6-30-15 42 PROTOTYPE
4 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
1/2
ASSEMBLY FOR LEFT-HAND MACHINE DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN
DATE: 5-15-15
ASSY, STAND,
3-003095 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION MANUAL ADJUST AB500
14 C 1 6 27473A1 STRAP, TIE MOUNTING
C
4
3 2 1 3-003638 STANCHION, INNER, RAISED UNWIND
C 1 3 1 3-002992 PLATE, MOUNTING, RAISED UNWIND
8
9 4 4 1 3-002988 STANCHION, INNER, RAISED UNWIND
C 4 5 2 3-002986 STANCHION, OUTER, RAISED UNWIND
6 2 2-002126 PIN, COTTER, 3MM DIA WIRE, SS
C 7 2 2-002125 PIN, CLEVIS, 10MM DIA X 70MM LG
C 8 4 1-33163F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M8X1.25, SS
C C 9 4 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
10
4 10 4 1-12163F-030M SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD, M8X1.25 X 30MM LG, SS
C 11 6 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
C 12 8 1-11163F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
5
2
C 11 1
6 6
13
4
7
2
6
2
4 12
1 4
REPLACED 1-11161F-012M WITH -020M, ADDED
C GHM 5-19-17 1069 1-33163F, 1-21163F, 1-12163F-030M,
27473A1 & 1-11457F-006
REPLACED 1-12163F-012M WITH
B DMF 10-1-15 226 1-11163F-012M
A DMF 6-5-15 42 PROTOTYPE
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
2 12
Vaulted

LARGER OFFSET BRACKET ON E-BOX SIDE 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
1 4 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C

ASSY, STAND,
3-002996 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION RAISED UNWIND
1 1 3-004591 ARM, FRL MOUNT
2 1 3-002592 ASSY, AIR PREPARATION
3 1 2-002260 FITTING, ELBOW, SWIVEL, 10MM TUBE, R1/4
4 1 2-001031 SILENCER, RESIN, G1/8
5 1 2-001013 VALVE, ELEC EXHAUST, 24V, G1/4
6 2 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
G 7 2 1-11161F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 20MM LG, SS
G 8 8 2 1-11159F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 20MM LG, SS
2
7
2 6
2 G
8 7
1 2
6 2
1
2
1
1
5
1
5
3
1
1
3
1
2
1 2
1
4
1
4
1
ASSEMBLY FOR RIGHT-HAND MACHINE
ASSEMBLY FOR LEFT-HAND MACHINE

G JRR 05-30-17 1058 1-11161F-020M WAS 1-11161F-012M
F DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED LH CONFIGURATION VIEW
F MDS 11-22-16 823 ADDED TORQUE TABLE, PRESSURE TEST NOTE

3-004591 (1) WAS 3-003518 (1)
E LDC 618
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 07-08-16 CHANGED MTG HARDWARE
REPLACED FRL COMPONENTS WITH 3-002592
D MDS 03-28-16 372 ADDED SILENCER 2-001031
REMOVED 2-002105, CHANGED QTY- 2-001038 (1) WAS (3),
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE. C DMF 10-1-15 226 2-001035 (4) WAS (6), ADDED 3-003518, 2-002260, 1-11161F-010M,
1-11157F-010M
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) B DMF 7-2-15 42

REMOVED 3-002409, 2-001948, 10126A1; CHANGED
QTY 2-001035 (6) WAS (5), 2-001038 (3) WAS (1)
A DMF 5-22-15
M2 X 0.4 2.5
PROTOTYPE

NOTES: M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
MATERIAL SEE BOM
M3 X 0.5 9.0
1. PRESSURE TEST COMPLETED ASSEMBLY FOLLOWING MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
ASTM A 1047/A 1047M. PRESSURE DECAY SHALL NOT M4 X 0.7 21.0 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
EXCEED 12 PSI PER HOUR. STARTING PRESSURE FOR M5 X 0.8 42.4

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

TEST SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 80 PSI. M6 X 1.0 72.1
3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION
M8 X 1.25 175.0
NAME: DMF
Fabricated & Documented M10 X 1.5 346.4

TITLE
ASSY, FRL,
3-002912 G
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant M12 X 1.75 604.1
INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500 SERIES
1 1 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
2 1 3-004054-001 REGULATOR, FIXED, 6MM INLINE, 30 PSI
19 3 1 3-002585 BRACKET, MOUNTING, PRESSURE REG
6
4 1 3-002565 BRACKET, RETENTION, PNEUMATICS, F22V
14 5 2 3-002564 BRACKET, SUPPORT, PNEUMATICS, F22V
6 6 1 3-002562 PLATE, SLIDING, PNEUMATICS, F22V
7 1 3-002498 ASSY, VALVE MANIFOLD, 12 STATION
8 1 2-002195 TUBE FITTING, STR, PLUG-IN, 6mm-4mm
7
1 9 1 2-002010 PLUG, BLANKING, 6mm TUBE
10 1 2-001375 KNOB, KNURLED GRIP YELLOW 25MM X 22.5MM LG X M4
11 2 2-001021 REGULATOR, W/ GAUGE, 6MM INLINE
18
6 12 6 1-23155F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M3, SS
13 4 1-21255F WASHER, FLAT, FENDER, M3, SS
11
2 15 6 1-11161F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 10MM LG, SS
6
2
1
9
1
8
10 1
1
17
15 1
4
1
5 1
2
3
1
4
13 1
A MDS 01-27-16 387 NEW DRAWING
4 15 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION

2
16 MATERIAL SEE BOM
20 1 R
4
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
6
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: MDS

ASSY, MOUNTING,
3-004052 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION VALVE MANIFOLD
1 1 3-006257 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, LH, IM
2 1 3-006255 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, RH, IM
3 1 3-006240 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, LONG, RH, IM
4 1 3-006239 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, LONG, LH, IM
10 5 APPLY LOW STRENGTH 5 1 3-005008 COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
2 1 LOCTITETO SET SCREW
6 1 3-004711 COVER, AB500 LONG REAR
BEFORE INSTALLATION
10 7 IN STANDOFF. 7 1 3-004593 BRACKET, COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
2 1 6X LOCATIONS 8 6 3-004587-001 STANDOFF, ROUND, 0.5" OD, AL, M5x0.8, 2.18" LONG
8 9 9 6 1-14159F-025M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 25MM, SS
1 1 10 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
11 4 1-11457F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
9 8
1 1 1
9 8 1
1 1
8 9
1 1
8 9
1 1 8 9
1 1
2
1
4
1
11 6
4 1
REPLACED VF COVERS WITH MOLDED COVERS

F MDS 03-15-18 1345 CHANGED STANDOFFS; ADDED LOCTITE NOTE
REMOVED 1-11659F-012M (1)
E MDS 10-28-16 790
3-003104-001
3 ADDED 1-11659F-012M (8)
ADDED 3-004711 (1), REMOVED
D LDC 08-12-16 707
1 3-004232 (2)
REPLACED 3-003025 WITH 3-004581, 3-003024
WITH 3-004580, 3-003039 WITH 3-004501,
LONG BAGGER C MDS 7-15-16 618 3-002394 WITH 3-004587-XXX; ADDED 3-004577,
3-004576, 3-004593
B LDC 03-17-16 372 ADDED 3-004232 (2) & 1-11457F-006M (4)
A BJS 7-2-15 42 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: B.STINARD

ASSY, COVERS,
3-003104 F
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500
1 1 3-006257 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, LH, VF
2 1 3-006255 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE LARGE, RH, VF
3 1 3-006252 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, SHORT, RH, VF
4 1 3-006241 ASSY, COVER, 12" BAGGER SIDE SMALL, SHORT, LH, VF
APPLY LOW STRENGTH
10 5 LOCTITETO SET SCREW 5 1 3-005008 COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
2 1 BEFORE INSTALLATION 6 1 3-004712 COVER, AB500 SHORT REAR
IN STANDOFF. 7 1 3-004593 BRACKET, COVER, 12" BAGGER, CENTER
6X LOCATIONS
8 6 3-004587-001 STANDOFF, ROUND, 0.5" OD, AL, M5x0.8, 2.18" LONG
10 7 8 9 9 6 1-14159F-025M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 25MM, SS
2 1 1 1
10 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
1
1
9 8
1 1
9 8
1 1
8 9
1 1
8 9
1 1 2
8 9
1
1 1
4
1
11 6
4 1
REPLACED VF COVERS WITH MOLDED COVERS

F MDS 03-15-18 1345 CHANGED STANDOFFS; ADDED LOCTITE NOTE
REMOVED 1-11659F-012M (1)
E MDS 10-28-16 790 ADDED 1-11659F-012M (8)
3 D LDC 08-12-16 707

ADDED 3-004712 (1), REMOVED
3-004235 (2)
1 REPLACED 3-003025 WITH 3-004581, 3-003024
3-003104-002
WITH 3-004580, 3-003039 WITH 3-004501,
C MDS 7-15-16 618 3-002394 WITH 3-004587-XXX; ADDED 3-004577,
3-004576, 3-004593
B LDC 03-17-16 372 ADDED 3-004232 (2) & 1-11457F-006M (4)

SHORT BAGGER A BJS 7-2-15 42 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: B.STINARD

ASSY, COVERS,
3-003104 F
THIRD ANGLE
4 7 1 3 3-004298 STANDOFF, MOUNTING, BELT GUARD
1 4
2 1 3-004292 GUARD, BELT, AB500
3 2 3-004278 COVER, INTERNAL, SIDE, TIE BAR, AB500
4 1 3-003385 COVER, SEAL BAR, AB500
5 4 2-002232 STANDOFF, M/F, 8MM HEX, 52mm LG, M5X0.8 THREAD, ZINC PLATED BRASS
6 3 1-14157F-020M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 20MM, SS
5
4
FRAME COMPONENTS SHOWN

FOR REFERENCE ONLY
3
2
8
8
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
6 1 2 9 DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
D
3 3 1 3 AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT

ASSY, INTERNAL
3-004217 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION GUARDS, AB500
1 6 3-004426 SCREW, BHC M5 X 12mm LG, SS, MODIFIED
2 1 3-003656 PLATE, PNEUMATIC, PORTS, AB500
3 1 3-003655 PLATE, BOTTOM, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
MOUNTS TO MAIN BASE PLATE 9 4 1 3-003654 PLATE, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
4
5 1 3-003653 PLATE, TRAY-SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
12
8 6 1 3-003652 PLATE, SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
7 1 3-003651 PLATE, BOTTOM, BELLY PAN, AB500
8 1 3-003650 PLATE, REAR, BELLY PAN, AB500
9 4 3-002572 BLOCK, SUPPORT, LOWER COVER
C 10 6 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
5
1 11 22 1-11459F-008M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
8
1

M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
MOUNTS TO RESERVOIR
CLAMP BLOCKS
6
1
11
22
7
TOWARDS FRONT 1
OF MACHINE 10
6
1 C
6
4
1
3
1
C DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED SHEET 2 WITH LH CONFIGURATION
C LDC 11-10-16 821 1-61507F (6) WAS 2-002411 (6)

2 B LDC 07-18-16 618
1-11459-F-008M (22) WAS 28, ADDED
1 3-004426 (6) & 2-002411 (6) CAPTIVE
A MDS 10-30-15 226 RELEASED
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
ASSEMBLY FOR RIGHT-HAND MACHINE TOLERANCE

1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
ASSY, BELLY PAN,

3-003649 C
THIRD ANGLE
2 1 3-003656 PLATE, PNEUMATIC, PORTS, AB500
3 1 3-003655 PLATE, BOTTOM, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
4 1 3-003654 PLATE, FRONT, BELLY PAN, AB500
5 1 3-003653 PLATE, TRAY-SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
6 1 3-003652 PLATE, SIDE, BELLY PAN, AB500
7 1 3-003651 PLATE, BOTTOM, BELLY PAN, AB500
9 8 1 3-003650 PLATE, REAR, BELLY PAN, AB500
4
9 4 3-002572 BLOCK, SUPPORT, LOWER COVER
12 C 10 6 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
MOUNTS TO MAIN BASE PLATE
6
1 8 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
1 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
MOUNTS TO RESERVOIR
CLAMP BLOCKS
5
1
11
22
7
1
10
6
TOWARDS FRONT 1 C
OF MACHINE 6
4
1
3
1
C DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED SHEET 2 WITH LH CONFIGURATION
C LDC 11-10-16 821 1-61507F (6) WAS 2-002411 (6)

2 B LDC 07-18-16 618
1-11459-F-008M (22) WAS 28, ADDED
1 3-004426 (6) & 2-002411 (6) CAPTIVE
A MDS 10-30-15 226 RELEASED
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
ASSEMBLY FOR LEFT-HAND MACHINE PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
ASSY, BELLY PAN,

3-003649 C
THIRD ANGLE
1 1 3-002609 PLATE, BASE, MAIN FRAME
2 2 3-002603 PLATE, SPINE NARROW BAGGER
3 2 3-002602 ASSY, GUIDE, SEALER ROD
C 4 2 1-15112F-012M SCREW, SHOULDER, 12MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
C 5 2 1-11165F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M10X1.5 X 30MM LG, SS

1
4 C 5 C 7 8 1-11161F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 16MM LG, SS
1 1
C 5 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
1 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)

M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
2 6 M4 X 0.7 21.0
2 12 M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
3
2
1 USE LOCTITE 271 TO SECURE LISTED

FASTENERS AFTER ALIGNMENT
4 C
1
1 7
1 8 C GHM 8-16-17 1186
REPLACED (2) 1-11165F-030M WITH
1-15112F-012M
ADDED LOCTITE NOTE, TORQUE NOTE,
B LDC 11-09-16 821 ADDED 1-11165F-030M (4)
1 A ZR 4-1-15 42 PROTOTYPE
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C

ASSY,
3-002667 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION BASE, AB500
1 1 3-004223 ASSY, MOTOR, SERVO NEMA23 W/ENCODER & 5:1 GEARBOX
2 1 3-002725 PULLEY, MAIN NIP F12 DRIVE MOTOR END
3 1 3-002711 PLATE, MOUNTING MAIN NIP MOTOR
4 1 3-001963 BLOCK, MOUNTING NIP BELT TENSION SCREW
5 4 1-22161F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M6, SS
C 7 4 1-11459F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS
1
1
8
1
4 9
1 2
6
1
9 5 3
4 4 1
7 2
C 4 1
C JRR 09-06-17 1214 4X 1-11459F-016M WAS 4X 1-11159F-016M
B LDC 06-18-16 372 3-004223 WAS 2-001364-005
A LDC 07-02-15 42 RELEASE
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
SCALE 1/4 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
---
NAME: LDC

ASSY, MAIN MOTOR
3-002771 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION DRIVE
1 2 3-004233 BRACKET, NIP GUARD, AB 500
2 1 3-004224 RAKE PLATE, REAR, AB 500
3 1 3-004221 INNER NIP GUARD, AB 850
4 1 3-003082 ASSY, FINGER PERF DETECTOR
5 1 3-003077 ASSY, MAIN AIR KNIFE
6 1 3-003040 ASSY, NIP WELDMENT W/ PINS
7 2 3-002739 CAM, NIP LIFTING
8 1 3-002731 ASSY, HIGH VOLTAGE FINGER
10 1 3-002714 PULLEY, NIP ROLL DRIVE
12 2 3-002710 PLATE, SPRING MOUNTING CAP
13 1 3-002707 ASSY, CROSS BAR, MAIN NIP, F12V
14 1 3-002702 SHAFT, NIP ROLLER, UPPER
15 1 3-002698 ASSY, ROLLER, UPPER NIP, F12V
16 1 3-002663-002 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, LH
17 1 3-002663-001 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, RH
18 1 3-002661-002 ASSY, NIP BEARING HOUSING, RH
19 1 3-002661-001 ASS'Y, NIP BEARING HOUSING, LH
20 1 3-002635 ROLLER, PRINT 12" BAGGER
21 1 3-002634 ROLLER, NIP RUBBER 12" BAGGER
22 2 3-001974 ASSY, NIP HANDLE
23 1 2-002607 WASHER, FLAT OVERSIZED .16"ID X .56"OD X .05"THK SS
24 2 2-002429 SPRING, COMPRESSION .477 OD X 1.75 LG X .087 MW BLACK
25 2 2-002153-002 SCREW, SHOULDER, PREC, SOCKET, 10MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS
26 1 2-002040 BELT, ROUND, 1/8"DIA, 5.00" OUTER CIRCLE, URETHANE
27 2 1-63253F-010M KEY, 4MM SQ, 10MM LG, ROUND END, SS
28 1 1-63153F-028M KEY, 4MM X 4MM, 28MM LG, SS
29 4 1-61512F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 9MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
J 36 2 1-11463F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
2 35 38 1 1-11455F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 6MM LG, SS
1 4
39 6 40 4 1-11159F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 14MM LG, SS
22
2
25
12 40 1 32 10
2 4 1 1
17 USE LOW-STRENGTH LOCTITE
1
24
2 5
1 13
1 9 34
1 1
11 32
1 1
26
1
18
1
14
29
1
4
2 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
27 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
2 LUBRICATE NIP FRAME UNDER CAM SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
WITH MOBILITH SHC PM 460 M2 X 0.4 2.5
SYNTHETIC GREASE.
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
36
J M4 X 0.7 21.0
2
8 41 M5 X 0.8 42.4
31 30 42 4 2
1 M6 X 1.0 72.1
1 1 1 1
3 28 M8 X 1.25 175.0
1 1 M10 X 1.5 346.4
23 M12 X 1.75 604.1
15
1 1
38
1
ASSEMBLE BLIP TUBE HERE.
USE: 3-002722 SHORT FRAME
uSE: 3-003777 LONG FRAME
1
2
37 20
10 1
16
1
21
1 J KJD 01-10-19 1784 1-11463F-020M WAS 1-11463F-025M
1-11159F-010M 1-22161F 1-14159F-006M 1-14157F-003M

H DAR 11-9-16 819 REMOVED. 1-11159F-014M 1-14159F-005M 1-14157F-006M ADDED.
ADDED 1X 2-002607, 1X 1-11455F-006M,
G LDC 09-07-16 749 1-11155F-006M WAS 1-11155F-010M
1-21161F, 3-002724 REMOVED. 3-002725,
F DAR 618F
25 7-8-16 LOCTITE NOTE ON 1-14157F-003M ADDED.
2-00189 REMOVED. ADDED 2-002429, GREASE
1 E DAR 2-5-16 433 NOTE, NIP GUARD, REPLACED RAKE PLATE
1-11157F-016M, 1-21157F, 3-002722
D DAR 12/8/15 226 REMOVED.
3-003040 WAS 3-002620,
C ZR 9-14-15 226 ADDED 2X 1-11157F-008M
3-003077 WAS 3-002752, 3-003082 WAS
B JAS 7-2-15 42 591147A1
A ZR 4-20-15 PROTOTYPE
FINISH N/A REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION

19
1 MATERIAL SEE B/M
R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
ASSY, MAIN
3-002758 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION NIP, F12V
1 2 3-004233 BRACKET, NIP GUARD, AB 500
2 1 3-004224 RAKE PLATE, REAR, AB 500
3 1 3-004221 INNER NIP GUARD, AB 850
4 1 3-003826-002 ASSY, NIP BEARING HOUSING W/O PRINTER BEARING, RH
5 1 3-003826-001 ASSY, NIP BEARING HOUSING W/O PRINTER BEARING, LH
6 1 3-003082 ASSY, FINGER PERF DETECTOR
7 1 3-003077 ASSY, MAIN AIR KNIFE
8 1 3-003040 ASSY, NIP WELDMENT W/ PINS
9 2 3-002739 CAM, NIP LIFTING
10 1 3-002731 ASSY, HIGH VOLTAGE FINGER
13 2 3-002710 PLATE, SPRING MOUNTING CAP
14 1 3-002707 ASSY, CROSS BAR, MAIN NIP, F12V
15 1 3-002702 SHAFT, NIP ROLLER, UPPER
16 1 3-002698 ASSY, ROLLER, UPPER NIP, F12V
17 1 3-002663-002 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, LH
18 1 3-002663-001 ASSY, PIVOT BLCK NIP ROLLER 12" BGR, RH
19 1 3-002634 ROLLER, NIP RUBBER 12" BAGGER
20 2 3-001974 ASSY, NIP HANDLE
21 1 2-002607 WASHER, FLAT OVERSIZED .16"ID X .56"OD X .05"THK SS
22 2 2-002429 SPRING, COMPRESSION .477 OD X 1.75 LG X .087 MW BLACK
23 2 2-002153-002 SCREW, SHOULDER, PREC, SOCKET, 10MM DIA X 12MM LG, SS
24 2 1-63253F-010M KEY, 4MM SQ, 10MM LG, ROUND END, SS
25 1 1-63153F-028M KEY, 4MM X 4MM, 28MM LG, SS
F 33 2 1-11463F-020M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
2 32
1 4
4 1 20
2
23
1 USE LOW-STRENGTH LOCTITE
13 37
2 4
18
1
22
7
2 14
1
1
11 31
1 1
12 29
1 1
10
1 15 4
1 1
26
4
2 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
2 LUBRICATE NIP FRAME UNDER CAM SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
WITH MOBILITH SHC PM 460
M2 X 0.4 2.5
SYNTHETIC GREASE.
33 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
F
2
M3 X 0.5 9.0
28 27 39 6 M4 X 0.7 21.0
38
1 1 1 1 2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
25
1 M10 X 1.5 346.4
16 M12 X 1.75 604.1
21 1
3 1
1
1
2 35
1 ASSEMBLE BLIP TUBE HERE.
USE: 3-002722 SHORT FRAME
USE: 3-003777 LONG FRAME
34
10
17
1
19
1
F KJD 01-11-19 1784 1-11463F-020M WAS 1-11463F-025M
1-11159F-014M 1-14159F-005M 1-14157F-006M ADDED.

E DAR 11-10-16 819 1-11159F-010M 1-22161F 1-14159F-006M 1-14157F-003M REMOVED.
ADDED 1X 2-002607, 1X 1-11455F-006M,
D LDC 09-07-16 749 1-11155F-006M WAS 1-11155F-010M
23 C DAR 7-8-16 618F

1-21161F, 3-002724 REMOVED. 3-002725,
LOCTITE ADDED TO 1-14157F-003M.
1 B DAR 2-5-16 433

2-00189 REMOVED. ADDED 2-002429, GREASE
NOTE. ADDED NIP GUARD, REPLACED RAKE
A DAR 12/8/15 226 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE B/M

5 R
1 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: D ROMO
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 1/1 DATE: 12/8/15
ASSY, MAIN NIP F12V

3-003827 F
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION W/O PRINT ROLLER
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 1 3-005369 PLATE, SLIDING, PT ADJUST
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 2 2 3-005290 SIDE RAILS, PT ADJUST
M2 X 0.4 2.5 3 1 3-003496 SHAFT, PT ADJUST, F12
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 4 1 3-002984 KNOB, PT ADJUST
M3 X 0.5 9.0 5 1 3-002981 BEARING BLOCK, PT ADJUST
M4 X 0.7 21.0 6 2 2-002740 SPRING, DIE, URETHANE, 60A, OD.69 X L.75
M5 X 0.8 42.4 7 1 2-002122 WASHER, FLAT, ID8.4mm X OD16mm X 3mm THICK, SS
M6 X 1.0 72.1 8 2 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
M8 X 1.25 175.0 9 1 1-22163F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M8, SS
M10 X 1.5 346.4 10 2 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
1 11 2 1-11657F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
M12 X 1.75 604.1 1
11
12
8
3
1
2
2
13
4
5
1
14
1
10
1
9
1
10
1
7 A MDS 03-30-17 973 NEW DRAWING
8 MATERIAL SEE BOM

TIGHTEN NUT SO THAT THERE IS NO PLAY
2 R
IN SHAFT BUT TORQUE TO TURN SHAFT MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
4
DOES NOT EXCEED 0.75 IN-LBS
1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
---
NAME: LDC

ASSY, PASSTHROUGH
3-005291 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ADJUST, AB500
1 1 3-005374 PLATE, SLIDING, PT ADJUST
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 2 2 2-002740 SPRING, DIE, URETHANE, 60A, OD.69 X L.75
M2 X 0.4 2.5 3 2 1-11657F-016M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 4 2 1-11163F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 14MM LG, SS
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0 4
M5 X 0.8 42.4 2
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0 1
M10 X 1.5 346.4 1
M12 X 1.75 604.1 2
2
3
2
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
B
---
NAME: LDC
ASSY, PASSTHROUGH
3-005373 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ADJUST, AB500
1 1 3-006537-001 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS SHORT
2 1 3-005600-001 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" REFLEX
7
3 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN 1
14
4 1 3-004131 ASSY, AIR GUIDE 4"
6
5 2 3-003415 STANDOFF, FACEPLATE
6 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500
7 1 3-002763 TRAY, INFEED 12" SHORT
8 1 3-002751 FACEPLATE, SHORT 12" BAGGER
9 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
10 1 3-002722 TUBE, AIR BLIP SHORT FRAME
12 4 1-11659F-012M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS 4
15
14 6 1-11459F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS 4
5
ITEMS NOT SHOWN 2
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION

1 2-002166 BELT, TIMING, 140XL, 14.0" OC, 70T, 3/8" WIDE
10 2
1 1
12
4
8
1
1
B 1
9
1
13 3
4 2
6
1 11
7
B DAR 5-3-18 1462 3-006537 WAS 3-002958.
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: LDC
ASSY, SHORT
3-005601-001 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE REFLEX 12"
1 1 3-006537-002 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS REFLEX LONG
2 1 3-005600-001 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" REFLEX
3 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN 15
4 2 3-004158 STANDOFF, M/F 10 HEX X 49 L X M4X0.7 X 6 L (MODIFIED) 6
5 1 3-004131 ASSY, AIR GUIDE 4" 9
1
6 1 3-003777 TUBE, AIR BLIP LONG FRAME
8 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500
9 1 3-002762 TRAY, INFEED 12" LONG
5
10 1 3-002750 WELDMENT, FACE PLATE, NIP ROLLER
1
11 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
2
4
7
2
6
ITEMS NOT SHOWN 1
1 2-002165 BELT, TIMING, 150XL, 15.0" OC, 75T, 3/8" WIDE
2
1
13
4
10
1
1
B 1
11
1
14
4
3
2
8
1 12
7
B DAR 5-3-18 1462 3-006537-002 WAS 3-002957
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: LDC
ASSY, LONG
3-005601-002 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE REFLEX 12"
1 1 26988A1 DECAL, EAR PROTECTION
2 1 3-006537-001 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS SHORT
3 1 3-005600-002 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" TRIM
4 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN
5 1 3-004962 BAR, MOUNTING TRIM CHUTE
6 1 3-004503 CHUTE, TRIM COLLECTOR
10
1
8 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500 19
9 1 3-002916 ASSY, AIR GUIDE W/ TRIM JETS 4" 6
10 1 3-002763 TRAY, INFEED 12" SHORT
11 1 3-002751 FACEPLATE, SHORT 12" BAGGER
12 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
13 1 3-002722 TUBE, AIR BLIP SHORT FRAME
14 1 2-002170-M8 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M8x1.25
21 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS 21
4
ITEMS NOT SHOWN 7

1 2
1
1 21036A1 BAG, RECEIPT 18 X 30 IRON CLAD WHITE
* 1
1
200398A1
3-004883
VALVE, DOUBLE 3 WAY NC 2 POS 24VDC
KIT, TUBE ROUTING TRIM NOZZLES
1 2-002166 BELT, TIMING, 140XL, 14.0" OC, 70T, 3/8" WIDE 13
D 5 1
16
1 4 3
6 1
* PLACE VALVE P/N 200398A1 INTO STATION 8

OF VALVE PACK D
1
20
4 18 11
2 1
14
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 1
12
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 1
M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 4
17 2
M3 X 0.5 9.0 4
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
2
M6 X 1.0 72.1
8 1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
1
M10 X 1.5 346.4 15
M12 X 1.75 604.1 7
D LDC 10-15-18 1697 REMOVED 2-002006, 2-002010, 2-002053
C LDC 06-11-18 1533 ADDED 1X 26988A1 DECAL
B DAR 5-3-18 1462 3-006537-001 WAS 3-002958
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
-
NAME: LDC
ASSY, SHORT
3-005601-003 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE TRIM 12"
1 1 26988A1 DECAL, EAR PROTECTION
2 1 3-006537-003 ASSY, PLATE GRIPPER W/ SENSOR BARRELS LONG TRIM
3 1 3-005600-002 ASSY, HEATER W/ TEFLON SCROLL CE 12" TRIM
4 2 3-005554 NUT, T FASTENER W/ PIN
5 1 3-004962 BAR, MOUNTING TRIM CHUTE
6 1 3-004844 BLOCK, GAP FILLING TRIM CHUTE LONG FRAME
7 1 3-004503 CHUTE, TRIM COLLECTOR
8 1 3-004131 ASSY, AIR GUIDE 4" 22
6
9 1 3-004127 ASSY, BLOCK TRIM AIR JETS 4"
10 1 3-003777 TUBE, AIR BLIP LONG FRAME
13
12 1 3-003129 ASSY, FRONT GUARD, CLEAR, AB500 1
13 1 3-002762 TRAY, INFEED 12" LONG
14 1 3-002750 WELDMENT, FACE PLATE, NIP ROLLER
15 1 3-002727 PLATE, STRIPPER 12"
16 2 2-002445 STANDOFF, 10MM HEX X 46MM LONG X M4X0.7 THREAD
8
17 1 2-002170-M8 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M8x1.25
1
24
22 6 1-11459F-006M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS 4 1
24 4 1-11159F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 16MM LG, SS 6 11
1 2
1
1
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
1 21036A1 BAG, RECEIPT 18 X 30 IRON CLAD WHITE 5
* 1
1
200398A1
3-004883
VALVE, DOUBLE 3 WAY NC 2 POS 24VDC
KIT, TUBE ROUTING TRIM NOZZLES
23
2
1
1 2-002165 BELT, TIMING, 150XL, 15.0" OC, 75T, 3/8" WIDE 3

21 19 10
1
2 4 1
D 14
1
D
* PLACE VALVE P/N 200398A1 INTO STATION 8

OF VALVE PACK AND PLUMB
7
1
23
4
17
1
15
1
20
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 4
M2 X 0.4 2.5 4
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 2
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0 2
M5 X 0.8 42.4 1
M6 X 1.0 72.1 12
1 18
M8 X 1.25 175.0 7
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
D LDC 10-15-18 1697 REMOVED 2-002006, 2-002010, 2-002053
C LDC 06-11-18 1533 ADDED 1X 26988A1 DECAL
B DAR 5-3-18 1462 3-006537-003 WAS 3-004137
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
-
NAME: LDC
ASSY, LONG
3-005601-004 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FRAME CE TRIM 12"
1 1 3-006531 SHIELD, SENSOR SEAL BAR
2 1 3-005379 NUT, CYLINDER ROD, M10x1.5
3 1 3-003151 ASSY, SEALBAR W/ INTERNAL ANTI-JAM
4 1 3-003148 ASSY, SHUTTER SEALBAR
5 1 3-003122 BAR, PRESSURE 12" MACHINE
6 2 3-003121 ROD, GUIDE, SOLID
7 5 3-003081 BRACKET, FLAG, MUTING SENSOR
13 8 1 3-002759 SPACER, MAIN CYLINDER
2 9 1 2-002189 WASHER, PLASTIC 10.5mm ID x 22mm OD x 2.5mm THK
5 10 1 2-002188 COLLAR, SHAFT, M10x1.5 BORE x24mmOD x 9mm LG
1
9 11 1 2-001985 CYLINDER, SEALBAR 1-1/2" BORE, 5-1/2" STROKE
1
7
10
6
2
2 3
1 1
13
2
1
8 1
1 M
4
1

M DAR 5-3-18 1462
3-006531 ADDED.
M2 X 0.4 2.5 15 L GHM 4-10-18 NEVER RELEASED (REMOVED 1 OF 2-002189)
4 K GHM 12-7-17 1286 3-003081 WAS QTY 4, 1-11457F-008M WAS QTY 8
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 J GHM 10-9-17 1253 2-002189 WAS QTY (1) NOW (2)
M3 X 0.5 9.0 H MDS 03-30-17 973

REPLACED 1X 2-002188 & 2-002189 WITH 3-005379, CHANGED
ORIENTATION OF 2X 3-003081, REMOVED 2-002701
G MDS 02-02-17 922

M4 X 0.7 21.0
REPLACED 2-002180 WITH 2-002701
REMOVED: 1-11159F-030M 1-22159F 1-21159F 1-11165F-030M

F DAR 11-8-16 819 ADDED: 1-11161F-030M 1-22161F 1-21161F 1-11165F-025M
M5 X 0.8 42.4 E MDS 06-03-16 581 REMOVED FITTING 2-002181
M6 X 1.0 72.1 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
M8 X 1.25 175.0 MATERIAL SEE BOM

M10 X 1.5 346.4 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
M12 X 1.75 604.1 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
---
NAME: D ROMO

ASSY, SEALER
3-003150 M
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION WITH SHUTTER
B 1 1 4-001083-XX_XX ASSY, HEAT WIRE CONTROLLER, PROGRAMMED CE
2 1 3-003954 ASSY, HEATER MOUNTING BAR W/ BEARINGS 12"
3 1 3-003915 ASSY, TEFLON SHEET WITH RODS
4 2 3-003298 ARM, PIVOT TRIM ADVANCE
5 1 3-003162-001 ASSY, HEATER BAR 12" REFLEX
6 2 2-002490 SCREW, SHOULDER 1/4 DIA X 3/8 L LOW HEAD SLOTTED SS
7 2 2-002396 GEAR, SPUR HUBLESS PLASTIC, TEFLON LARGE
8 4 2-002182 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW M5 TO 4mm TUBE x 1mm IRIS
9 2 2-001986 CYLINDER, HEATERBAR 3/4" BORE, 1-1/2" STROKE
10 2 1-41104F-014M PIN, DOWEL, 4MM DIA X 14MM LG, SS
11 2 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
12 2 1-15104F-004M SCREW, SHOULDER, 4MM DIA X 4MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
B 14 2 1-11155F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 16MM LG, SS

15 2
8 M2 X 0.4 2.5
4 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
2 M3 X 0.5 9.0
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
10 M8 X 1.25 175.0
2 M10 X 1.5 346.4
5 M12 X 1.75 604.1
1
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
REMOVE THERMAL PAD LINER
1
1
14
3 13 2
1 4 USE LOW USE LOW B
16
STRENGTH B 12 STRENGTH
4 1-11155F-016M WAS -014M, 1-11155F-012M
ROLL TEFLON TO INSIDE LOCTITE. 2 LOCTITE. B GHM 10-12-17 1235 WAS -010M, 4-001083-XX.XX WAS 4-001083
A LDC 06-07-17 1066

OF SHAFTS AS SHOWN. RELEASE
TOP SHAFT IS THE TEFLON SUPPLY. SCALE 7/16 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL SEE B/M

11 4 7 6 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
TIGHTEN NUT UNTIL FULLY SNUG. 2 2 2 2

IF GEAR DOES NOT ROTATE EASILY

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

BY HAND, UNTHREAD NUT SLIGHTLY 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
UNTIL IT DOES.
C
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: LDC
GEAR CANNOT WOBBLE.

ASSY, HEATER
3-005600-001 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION W/ SCROLL CE 12" REFLEX
B 1 1 4-001083-XX_XX ASSY, HEAT WIRE CONTROLLER, PROGRAMMED CE
2 1 3-003954 ASSY, HEATER MOUNTING BAR W/ BEARINGS 12"
3 1 3-003915 ASSY, TEFLON SHEET WITH RODS
4 2 3-003298 ARM, PIVOT TRIM ADVANCE
5 1 3-003162-002 ASSY, HEATER BAR TRIM 12"
6 2 2-002490 SCREW, SHOULDER 1/4 DIA X 3/8 L LOW HEAD SLOTTED SS
7 2 2-002396 GEAR, SPUR HUBLESS PLASTIC, TEFLON LARGE
8 4 2-002182 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW M5 TO 4mm TUBE x 1mm IRIS
9 2 2-001986 CYLINDER, HEATERBAR 3/4" BORE, 1-1/2" STROKE
10 2 1-41104F-014M PIN, DOWEL, 4MM DIA X 14MM LG, SS

15 2 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.

8
4 M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
2 M3 X 0.5 9.0
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
10
2 M12 X 1.75 604.1
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
REMOVE THERMAL PAD LINER
1
1
13
3 4 14
1 5 2
B 12 USE LOW
1 16
2 STRENGTH
USE LOW 4 LOCTITE
STRENGTH B 1-11155F-016M WAS -014M, 1-11155F-012M
ROLL TEFLON TO INSIDE SCALE 7/16 LOCTITE B GHM 10-12-17 1235 WAS -010M, 4-001083-XX.XX WAS 4-001083
OF SHAFTS AS SHOWN. A LDC 06-07-17 1066 RELEASE
FINISH NONE
TOP SHAFT IS THE TEFLON SUPPLY. REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
11 4 7 6 MATERIAL SEE B/M
TIGHTEN NUT UNTIL FULLY SNUG. 2 2 2 2 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R

IF GEAR DOES NOT ROTATE EASILY PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
BY HAND, UNTHREAD NUT SLIGHLTY

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

UNTIL IT DOES. 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10

GEAR CANNOT WOBBLE.
C
ASSY, HEATER
3-005600-002 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION W/ SCROLL 12" CE TRIM
1 2 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
ASSEMBLE 2X SENSORS TO SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 2 16 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
ADJUSTABLE PASSTHROUGH M2 X 0.4 2.5 3 2 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
(SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY) 4 2 25289A1 SWITCH, ROCKER
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0 5 1 3-008254 ASSY, ANTI-JAM RX SHIELD
17 6 1 3-004843 INSULATOR, UFCB, AB500
M4 X 0.7 21.0
6
M5 X 0.8 42.4 7 1 3-003198-X ASSY, FAB UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD POPULATED
11
5 M6 X 1.0 72.1 8 2 3-002643 FOAM, WIRE ENTRY, F22V
M8 X 1.25 175.0 9 2 3-002642 BRACKET, WIRE ENTRY, F22V
M10 X 1.5 346.4 10 2 3-002397 BRACKET, JOG BUTTON
M12 X 1.75 604.1 11 5 2-002443 SENSOR, PHOTOELECTRIC, 5mm SLOT, 24V PNP, 200mm M8 Lead
12 8 2-001978 STANDOFF, M/F, 6MM HEX, M3X0.5, 8MM LG, SS
13 6 2-001928 STANDOFF, M/F, 8MM HEX, 25mm LG, M4X0.7 THREAD
1 D
(RECEIVER)
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

19 1 3-005594 KIT, CABLE, AB500/600 CE EXTERNAL TO EBOX
BASE FRAME SHOWN
FOR REFERENCE ONLY
17
2
18
4
(TRANSMITTER)
4 14 10 16 2 13 17
2 4 2 14 14 6 2
14 9 8 2 16 16 1 3 7 15 12 6
4 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 1 8 8 1
D DMF 5-10-19 1922 REPLACED 3-002709, 2-002167 WITH 3-008254; CHANGED QTY:
29638A1 (16) WAS (18), 1-11157F-010M (20) WAS (22)
DRAWING INSTANCE 3-005593 WAS 3-003111, REMOVE 3-005373,

C KJD 02-19-18 1337 ADD 1-11155F-012M QTY (4), 1-1155F-014M QTY (10) WAS (14),
REVISE DRAWING NOTE TO REMOVE FIXED PASSTHROUGH
B GHM 12-8-17 1286 RELOCATED ANTI JAM SENSORS
TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW MATERIAL SEE BOM

BOTTOM VIEW
SCALE 1/4 RIGHT-HAND MACHINE MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
LEFT-HAND MACHINE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

SCALE 1/4 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
SCALE 1/4 TOLERANCE

1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
ASSY, ELEC ROUTING

3-005593 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION KIT CE, AB 500
2 1 3-005224 ASSY, PRESSURE SENSOR W/ PLUG 10 1 19 4 11 16 20 17
3 1 3-003532 ASSY, PRESSURE SENSOR W/ PLUG 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 19
4 1 3-003356 BRACKET, NEEDLE, AB 500 1 1
5 1 3-003351 ASSY, VALVE, SEAL BAR HOME 1
6 1 3-003118 ASSY, MOUNTING, VALVE MANIFOLD, F12 18
7 6 2-002843 CLAMP, DUAL TUBING FOR 1/4 (6mm) OD 6
8 2 2-002702 VALVE, SOLENOID, 3/2 NC, EXT PILOT, SILENCER, 24VDC
9 1 2-002701 FITTING, 45DEG ELBOW, 6MM TUBE, R1/4
7
10 1 2-002276 FITTING, BULKHEAD, ELBOW, 10mm 6
11 3 2-002231 VALVE, NEEDLE, 6MM INLINE, 8MM BODY
12 2 2-002186 FITTING, TEE, UNEQUAL UNION, 10mm - 6mm
13 1 2-002010 PLUG, BLANKING, 6mm TUBE
14 3 2-002007 FITTING, WYE UNION, REDUCING, 6-4mm
15 2 2-002006 FITTING, WYE UNION, 6mm
16 4 1-23155F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M3, SS
19 4 1-11157F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS 12
2
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

19 1 3-004568 LABELS, PNEUMATIC, AB500
20 1 3-004859 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, AB500
9
14 1
14 3 1
1 14
1 1
13 20
1 15 2
1 16
1 2 2
K 8
2
19
2
5 2
1 1
15
1
6
1
K
ALTERNATE ASSEMBLY LOCATIONS
LEFT HAND BAGGER
SCALE 1/4
K LEFT HAND FLOW CONTROLS

WITH LEFT HAND PNEUMATICS
ADDED LEFT HANDHAND FLOW CONTROLS ANDLEFT HAND

K GHM 4-29-19 1873 PNEUMATICS VIEW
29683A1 WAS QNTY 13, 1-11157F-010M WAS QNTY 13
J GHM 9-26-17 1242 ADDED (6) EACH OF 2-002843 & 1-11457F-016M
ADDED 2-002701; REPLACED 2-002519 WITH
H MDS 03-30-17 973 2-002746, 3-002409 WITH 3-003532
21 G MDS 02-02-17 922
REPLACED VALVES 3-004555 AND 3-004554
WITH 2-002702. ADDED 3-005224,
1 21
2X 2-002006, 1X 2-002007
REMOVED TUBING, TUBING LABELS
F MDS 09-27-16 768 ADDED TUBING KIT, ADDITIONAL TIE DOWN
1
22
MOVED WYES, ADDED SAFETY VALVES
E MDS 06-06-16 581 CREATED TABULATED VIEWS FOR FITTINGS
1 D MDS 03-21-16 372 ADDED 2-002010, TUBING
C MDS 10-30-15 226 MODIFIED BULKHEAD FITTINGS
3-003138-001: ASSY, PNEU ROUTING KIT, AB500, NORMAL

ADDED HOME VALVE ASSEMBLY, TIE-DOWNS
B MDS 09-23-15 226 CHANGED FLOW CONTROLS
3-003138-002: ASSY, PNEU ROUTING KIT, AB500, SLOW FINISH NONE

A
REV
MDS
BY
07-14-15
DATE
42
ECN
NEW DRAWING
DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL SEE BOM

ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
1 6 1-11457F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
H PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
21 1 2-002746 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW R1/4 TO 6mm TUBE x 1.4mm IRIS 1 6 1-11457F-016M SCREW, BUTTON HEAD, SOCKET, M4X0.7 X 16MM LG, SS TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
21 1 2-002523 FITTING, PLUG-IN STRAIGHT, 8mm - 6mm
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
22 1 2-002520 FITTING, AIR ELBOW FIXED FLOW R1/4 TO 8mm TUBE x 1.0mm IRIS E
ASSY, PNEUMATIC
3-003138 K
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUTING KIT, AB500
2 1 29996A1 TERM,WAGO,NO.LABELS,1-50(2SET) (NOT SHOWN)
3 1 29113A1 OUTLET, IEC SCREW ON QUICK CONNECT TERM
REFERENCE: FUSES ON POWER KIT
4 1 27483A2 DECAL, ELECTRICAL SHOCK 1 1/4 IN.
5 4 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND FUSING FOR 100V AND 120V
6 1 200280A1 DECAL, PE 3/8 X 3/8 LOCATION PART NO. DESCRIPTION
7 1 3-008049 ASSY, SHIELD BUSBAR CLAMP 1 27014A8 FUSE, 5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
8 1 3-007869 PLATE, MOUNT, MOV BOARD, AB500 2 27014A8 FUSE, 5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
9 1 3-007215-X ASSY, AC INPUT MOV BOARD POPULATED
41 3 5 4 3 2 1 3 27014A14 FUSE, 15 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
10 1 3-005066-002 ASSY, MAIN CONTROL BOARD, 2 MOTOR DRIVES 4 27014A14 FUSE, 15 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
2 1
11 1 3-004971 PANEL, CONTROL BOARD 5 27014A17 FUSE, 30 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
12 1 3-004884 ASSY, CHASSIS, EBOX, AB SERIES
13 1 3-004845 ASSY, DIN RAIL, AB SERIES EBOX
FUSING FOR 200V AND 220V
14 1 3-004753 PANEL, MOUNTING MAIN EBOX 1 27014A5 FUSE, 2.5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
15 1 3-004523-2 DECAL, EBOX DOOR, AB500, CONTROL BOARD SIDE 2 27014A5 FUSE, 2.5 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
16 1 3-004523-1 DECAL, EBOX DOOR, AB500, POWER SUPPLY SIDE 3 27014A10 FUSE, 7.0 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
17 1 3-003705 ASSY, EBOX COVER W/CAPTIVE FASTENERS 4 27014A14 FUSE, 15 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
18 1 3-003513 PLATE, CONNECT BOARD 34 5 27014A17 FUSE, 30 AMP CC, TIME DELAY
1
19 1 3-002674 COVER, BATTERY MOUNT DETAIL A
20 1 3-002595 ASSY, MOTOR CABLE CLAMP SCALE 1/1
21 4 3-002574 STANDOFF, EBOX PANEL

22 1 3-002003 ASSY, E-BOX CONNECTOR BOARD POPULATED
23 1 3-001999-X ASSY, ABFX MOTOR CROWBAR BOARD
24 4 2-002271 RIVET, RATCHET .188" DIA X .47" LG, BLK NYLON
26 1 2-002219 FILTER, IEC INLET,15 AMP, 6.3mm SPADE CONNECTORS
27 1 2-002214-003 POWER SUPPLY, 600W, 48V, COSEL PLA600F
28 1 2-002214-001 POWER SUPPLY, 600W, 15V, COSEL PLA600F
29 1 2-002192 BATTERY, LITHIUM ION POLYMER 3.7V 2500mAH
1 34 38
30 1 2-002 SUPPLY, POWER, 24VDC, 200W
1 2 8
32 1 2-001868 SWITCH, ROCKER, DPST 20A 125VAC 13 37 SEE DETAIL A
1 2 SEE NOTE 1 6
1
28 43 14 40
36 6 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS 1 6
1 4
37 2 1-16159F-006M SCREW, PHILLIPS PAN HEAD, M5X0.8, 6MM LG, SS
39 19
39 30 1-16155F-006M SCREW, PHILLIPS PAN HEAD, M3X0.5, 6MM LG, SS 4 1
40 6 1-13357F-014M SCREW, BUTTON HD TORX, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
5
41 4 1-11655F-008M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M3X0.5 X 8MM LG, SS 24 38 1
4 2
1
34 39 23
1 B 6 1
39 9
4 1 B
29
1 8
1 B
APPLY DECAL TO BACKSIDE 16 33

OF COVER PANEL 1 1
25
4
5
1
1 34 38
1 2 8
27 43
1 4
5
1
34 30 43
1 1 2
21
4 4
1
20 43
1 2
11 42 ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1 4 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
26 41
1 2 10 39 1 3-005592 KIT, CABLE, AB500/600 MAIN CONTROL EBOX CE, NON-SUBASSEMBLIES
1 8
32
44
1
4 18 39
36 31 1 3
4 1
22 39
35 1 5
4 7
B 1
45
B 2
NOTES:
36 1. USE FIXTURE 3-004977 FOR ELECTRICAL ROUTING
B
2
35
B
2
17
1
12 ADDED 3-007215-X, 3-007869, 3-008049,
1-11159F-008M (2); CHANGED QTY- 1-33157F (7)
B DMF 3-1-19 1790
1 WAS (6), 1-16155F-006M (30) WAS (26),
1-22159F (6) WAS (4), 1-22159F (6) WAS (4)
15 APPLY DECAL TO BACKSIDE A LDC 06-07-17 1066 RELEASED
1 OF COVER PANEL 9.4 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
---
NAME: LDC
Fabricated & Documented 8.1

TITLE
ASSY, EBOX MAIN

3-005591 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CONTROL CE, AB500
1 1 3-002577 RAIL, DIN 35mm X 15MM X 12" LG
2 5 29496A1 FUSE, HOLDER 10 X 38 CLASS CC
3 1 27355A1 FILTER, MULTI-STAGE, 20A
4 2 200716A1 BRACKET, TERMINAL RAIL END, 6MM W
5 1 200689A1 DIVIDER, TERMINAL BLOCK BLACK 2004 SERIES
6 4 200688A1 BLOCK, TERMINAL BLACK 2004 SERIES 4 WIRE
7 2 2-002474 TERMINAL BLOCK, JUMPER 2- POLE 2006 SERIES
8 1 2-002472 TERM. BLOCK, DIVIDER/END PLATE 2006 SERIES 3 POS
9 4 2-002471 TERMINAL BLOCK, 2006 SERIES 3 WIRE, 20-8AWG
10 1 2-002115 CONTACTOR, E-STOP WITH N.O. AUX CONTACT
11 1 2-002113 RELAY, SAFETY, 24VDC, ONE DUAL CHANNEL INPUT
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1 3-004874 KIT, CABLE, AB500/600 MAIN CONTROL EBOX, DIN RAIL ASSEMBLY
1 2 200597A1 TERMINAL,MARKER,FOR WAGO 1-10
1 4
1 11
1 2
1 2
1 9
4 8
1 10
1 6
4 5
1 2
3 4
1
C
7
CONNECTS COLUMNS 1 & 2
1
3
1
C DMF 3-1-19 1790 ADDED 2-002474 (2)
B DMF 9-5-17 1066 REMOVED JUMPERS 2-002474
A DMF 9-16-16 746 RELEASED
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
7
C CONNECTS COLUMNS 2 & 3 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
---
NAME: DMF
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 0.625 DATE: 9-15-16
Fabricated & Documented USE FIXTURE 3-004977 FOR CABLE KIT WIRING
TITLE DRAWING NO. SHEET 1 OF 1 REV
ASSY, DIN RAIL,
3-004845 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB SERIES EBOX
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 1 1 3-004897 ASSY, CABLE, HEAT WIRE BOARD THERMOCOUPLE
MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE. 2 1 3-003397 GAP PAD, HEAT SPREADER, HOTWIRE
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 3 1 3-003386 COVER, HOTWIRE BOARD
M3 X 0.5 9.0 4 2 3-003310 GAP PAD, THERMAL CLAMP, HOTWIRE
5 1 3-003309 PLATE, THERMAL CLAMP, HOTWIRE
NOTED BOARD MOUNTING FASTENERS
1 6 1 3-003305 PLATE, THERMAL CLAMP, HOTWIRE
HAVE TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
10 7 1 3-002001-X ASSY, HEAT STICK CONTROL PCB
1 SCREW FOR GROUNDING
E
8 1 2-002623 STANDOFF, M/F, 6MM HEX, M3X0.5, 22MM LG, NYLON
2
6 9 4 2-002233 STANDOFF, M/F, 6MM HEX, 25mm LG, M3X0.5 THREAD, SS
1
1
7
9 1
E 1
4
12
5
3
1
13
4
VERIFY PAD ORIENTATION

(HOLE ALIGNMENT)
PRIOR TO REMOVING
LINER (THIS SIDE ONLY)
4 PINK SIDE E LDC 11-16-16 821

REMOVED STAR WASHERS AND ADDED
TORQUE NOTE
1 (TOWARDS ALUMINUM D MDS 09-28-16 773

ADDED 3-004897, 2-002623,
1X 1-11155F-006M
BLOCK) C LDC 07-07-16 618

REMOVED FASTENERS 1-11155F-010M (4)
1-11155F-014M (2) AND ADDED NOTES
&
B MDS 03-21-16 379 ITEM 11 QTY CHANGED TO 9, WAS 10
4 A MDS 09-18-15 226 NEW DRAWING

1 REMOVE ADHESIVE FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
LINER
5 MATERIAL SEE BOM
1
R
11 PINK SIDE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

4 (TOWARDS ALUMINUM TOLERANCE

1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
8
Vaulted
PLATE) 2 PLACE DIMS

3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
1 1 1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
E
NAME: MDS
1
13 CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
Fabricated & Documented 1

TITLE
ASSY, HOTWIRE
3-003306 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION THERMAL MOUNTING
1 1 29910A3 SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, MOMENTARY, ILLUMINATED BLUE 1 NO
8 TIGHTEN PANEL MOUNT KIT (INCLUDED WITH ITEM 8): 2 1 29910A1 SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, MOMENTARY, ILLUMINATED WHITE 1 NO
1 -MINIMUM TORQUE: 0.28 Nm (2.5 in-lbf) 3 1 29907A1 SWITCH, PUSHBUTTON, RED 22mm, EMERGENCY STOP 1NC
-MAXIMUM TORQUE: 0.45 Nm (4.0 in-lbf)
B 4 2 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
5 1 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
INSTALL BUTTONS IN ORIENTATION SHOWN
6 1 200189A1 SWITCH, CONTACT BLOCK, NC
2
1 7 1 200188A1 SWITCH, CONTACT BLOCK, NO
B 8 1 4-001098-X_X_X ASSY, LINUX HMI, PROGRAMMED
12 9 1 3-004648 PANEL, WIRE INLET, HMI
1 10 2 3-004608 BLOCK, HMI PIVOT
B
11 1 3-004606 BRACKET, HMI FACE
13
2 12 1 3-004595 PLATE, HMI FACE
15 1 3-004582 ASSY, COVER, HMI BACK, F22V, VF
1 16 1 3-004312-X ASSY, HMI CONNECTOR BOARD POPULATED
1
17 1 3-003477 OVERLAY, HMI HARD BUTTONS
18 1 3-003476 BRACKET, WEBSERVER
SCALE 3/4
3 19 1 2-003070 COVER, CAP FOR ETHERNET RJ45 CONNECTORS
1
20 1 2-002169 HANDLE, NYLON, ADJUSTABLE, M8 x 1.25, 20mm STUD
22
1 B 22 6 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS
18 27
1 4
1
22 ITEMS NOT SHOWN
1
21 11
29 1 3-006684 KIT, CABLE, AB500/600 DETACHABLE HMI
4 1
14
2
6
1
7 16 28
1 1 4
24 9 22
2 1 2
20
1
26 23 10
4 4 2
25
1
5
1
B 22 4
2 2 15
1
19
1
REMOVED (1) EA OF 29638A1 & 1-33157F
B GHM 2-11-19 1818 ROTATED SWITCHES 180 $
A LDC 6-19-18 1548 NEW ASSEMBLY
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
---
NAME: LDC
ASSY, HMI
3-006612 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION DISPLAY
1 4 3-003113 GASKET, HMI SUPPORT LOCKING
2 1 3-003112 PLATE, HMI MOUNT
3 1 3-003110 BLOCK, HMI MOUNT MAIN
4 1 3-003108 BRACKET, HMI MOUNT STRAIGHT
5 1 3-003107 BRACKET, HMI MOUNT
6 2 3-003106 BRACKET, HMI MOUNT W/ STUD
7 1 3-002923 BAR, HMI SUPPORT ARM
8 2 2-002170-M8 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M8x1.25
9 2 2-002168 HANDLE, NYLON, ADJUSTABLE, M8 x 1.25, FEMALE
D 10 2 1-11163F-016M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 16MM LG, SS
9 4
1 1 11
2
1
1
3
DETAIL A 1
SCALE 3/2
SEE DETAIL A
11 1
2 1
9
1
5
1
6
1 1
D 1 SCALE 3/8
11
10 2
2 2
1
1 1
8
2
7 D CAS 10-30-18 1711 1-11163F-016M WAS 1-11163F-012M
1 C KJD 04-06-17 1024 ADD DETAIL A FOR MOUNTING CLARIFICATION

REMOVED 3-002941, 3-002924, 2-002169,
B MDS 07-22-16 618 1-15108F-008M
FINISH NONE
11 REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
2 MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
6
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
3-003469
NAME: LDC

ASSY, HMI
3-003470 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ARM
ITEMS NOT SHOWN ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
( .19 ) 1 3-003717 KIT, WEIGHT STD POWERED UNWIND 2 1 595101A4 DECAL, BAG LOCATION
3 2 591091A1 SPRING, EXTENTION NIP
4 3 55015A33 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-7/8 LG
SHAFT 5 5 55015A23 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 13-3/8 LG
REFERENCE ITEMS ONLY
SILVER OR BLACK SIDE EXPOSED 6 1 55015A21 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-3/4 LG
SEE NOTE 1 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 3-005014 KIT, CABLE, AB500 LOWERED POWERED UNWIND
8 10 28748A1 FASTENER, RATCHET NYLON 1/4 DIA X 1-1/16 LG
1 3-005015 KIT, CABLE, AB500 RAISED POWERED UNWIND
9 2 28352A1 MAGNET, SENSOR 1/4 OD X 1/4 LG
10 1 28351A1 BEARING, RULON LR 5/16 ID X 1/2 OD X 3/8 LG
RED SIDE EXPOSED 11 1 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
SEE NOTE 1 12 2 24722A5 BEARING, FLANGED
13 4" 21679B2 GROMMET, NYTRIM EXTRUDED BLACK
5 16
DETAIL A 1 1
14 1 20521A1 BELT, TIMING 1/5 PITCH 3/8 WIDE 110 TEETH
SCALE 1/1 15 1 3-004592 COVER, GAP FILLING POWERED UNWIND

16 1 3-004575 ASSY, COVER, UNWIND, LH, VF
17 1 3-004574 ASSY, COVER, UNWIND, RH, VF
NOTES:
1. USE LOCTITE #430 INSTANT METAL BONDING 18 1 3-004270 GUARD, INTERNAL UNWIND DRIVE PULLEYS
ADHESIVE TO BOND MAGNETS IN DISC 19 1 3-003720-002 BRACKET, MOUNTING EXTENSION UNWIND EXIT ROLLER LH
57 20 1 3-003720-001 BRACKET, MOUNTING EXTENSION UNWIND EXIT ROLLER RH
1
21 1 3-003625-X ASSY, DANCER TRIPLE HALL EFFECT BOARD
22 1 3-003087 LATCH, DANCER OPEN
23 1 3-003084 PIN, PIVOT DANCER LATCH
24 1 3-002454 ASSY, MOTOR SERVO NEMA23 W/ENCODER WIRED
25 1 3-001807 ROLLER, NIP 1.12"DIA X 13.37"LG
26 1 3-001806 SHAFT, PIVOT DANCER
27 1 3-001805 ASSY, FRAME, UNWIND, 12"
8 28 1 3-001804 SHAFT, BAG ROLL REMOVABLE
2
29 1 3-001803 ROLL, NIP RUBBER COVERED
30 3 3-001802 SHAFT, ROLLER
69 31 1 3-001801 SHAFT, ROLLER SPRING LOADED
1 32 1 3-001799 ARM, DANCER AZ LOAD
2" PER SIDE. 13
ADHERE WITH 37 33 1 3-001796 PLATE, INFEED SUPPORT
2 47
LOCTITE 441. 2 34 1 3-001789 PULLEY, TIMING, 12T, MODIFIED
1 ATTACH MOTOR GROUND
LUG HERE 35 1 3-001788 PULLEY, TIMING 1/2" BORE
32
1 54 65 24 36 1 3-001783 SPACER, DANCER ARM
4 4 1
5 37 2 3-001782 PLATE, MOTOR CLAMP
4 38 1 3-001780 ASSY, HUB
31 39 1 3-001779 ASSY, HUB, BAG ROLL UNWIND, MODIFIED
1
40 1 3-001777 PLATE, ARM, POWER UNWIND
8 41 1 2-002485 HANDLE, ADJUSTABLE 40mm LG M6X1.0 X 15mm STUD YELLOW
8 42 1 2-002452 ENCODER, OPTICAL E5 4096CPR W/INDEX, .313" SHAFT
36 43 2 1-61512F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 9MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
1 19 67 25 44 2 1-61510F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 7MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
1 2 1
45 46 2 1-33161F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M6X1.0, SS
1
22 49 4 1-23153F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M2.5, SS
1
66 29 43 50 1 1-22171F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M16, SS
23 1 2
1 52 1 1-22159F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M5, SS
51 64 12
2 2 1 53 4 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
6 55 4 1-16253F-006M SCREW, SLOTTED PAN HEAD, M2.5X0.45, 6MM LG, SS
1 56 2 1-16157F-010M SCREW, PHILLIPS PAN HEAD, M4X0.7, 10MM LG, SS
57 1 1-15106B-012M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 12MM LG, BLACK OXIDE, ISO 7379
15 61
27 1 2 58 2 1-14159F-008M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 8MM, SS
4
60 1 1-12171F-045M SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD, M16X2.0 X 45MM LG, SS
H
FOR SPARE PARTS ORDER 63 4 1-11163F-020M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M8X1.25 X 20MM LG, SS
42 70
1 2 PART NUMBER 3-006026
67 20 2
ALIGN ETCHING 67 4 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
2 WITH THIS SURFACE
11
3 1
1 7 68 70 2 1-11153F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M2.5X0.45 X 6MM LG, SS
2 2
48
56 1 44 1
2 1 2
12 46
ALIGN ETCHING
1 2
45 WITH "0" MARK FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS
6 58 35
2 1 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
M2 X 0.4 2.5
53 63 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
4 4 38 M3 X 0.5 9.0
1
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
39 M6 X 1.0 72.1
33 64 1
1 2 M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
34 59
1 1
17 14
1 1 28
55 49 21 10 1
4 4 1 1
18 62
1 2 N CAS 11-30-17 1299 ADDED SPARE PARTS P/N
61 40 M GHM 10-11-17 1235

REMOVED 3-005014 & 3-005015 FROM BOM
ADDED REFERENCE ONLY TABLE
2 1 K GHM 7-11-17 1138

ADDED 3-003717, CHANGED ASSEMBLY NOTE
OF UNWIND DESCRIPTION
J GHM 04-17-17 1036 ADDED 1-11157F-006M
H DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED SHEET 2 FOR LH CONFIGURATION
H LDC 01-04-17 879 1-11153F-006M (2) WAS 1-11154F-006M (2)

ADDED 1-21163F, 27144A1, REPLACED 1-11157F-010M (2)
26 G DMF 11-11-16 821 WITH 1-16157F-010M; 1-15106B-010M WITH 1-15106B-012M,
ADDED TORQUE SPECS AND CABLE KITS
1 F LDC 09-30-16 781

ADDED (2) 29638A1, (1) 1-33157F,
50 60 (2) 1-11157F-010M
1 1
MATERIAL SEE B/M
R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
9 ASSEMBLY FOR LEFT HAND UNWIND

1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
SEE DETAIL A 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
2 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
-
NAME: DMF
ASSY, POWERED
3-001800 N
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION UNWIND, 12"
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 656084A1 BAR, BUS GROUNDING
1 3-003717 KIT, WEIGHT STD POWERED UNWIND 2 1 595101A4 DECAL, BAG LOCATION
3 2 591091A1 SPRING, EXTENTION NIP
REFERENCE ITMES ONLY 4 3 55015A33 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-7/8 LG
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 5 5 55015A23 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 13-3/8 LG
1 3-005014 KIT, CABLE, AB500 LOWERED POWERED UNWIND 6 1 55015A21 ASSY, ROLLER 3/4 OD X 14-3/4 LG
1 3-005015 KIT, CABLE, AB500 RAISED POWERED UNWIND 7 2 29638A1 MOUNT, CABLE TIE
8 10 28748A1 FASTENER, RATCHET NYLON 1/4 DIA X 1-1/16 LG
9 2 28352A1 MAGNET, SENSOR 1/4 OD X 1/4 LG
10 1 28351A1 BEARING, RULON LR 5/16 ID X 1/2 OD X 3/8 LG
16 12 2 24722A5 BEARING, FLANGED
1
13 2 21679B2 GROMMET, NYTRIM EXTRUDED BLACK
14 1 20521A1 BELT, TIMING 1/5 PITCH 3/8 WIDE 110 TEETH
5 15 1 3-004592 COVER, GAP FILLING POWERED UNWIND
1 16 1 3-004575 ASSY, COVER, UNWIND, LH, VF
17 1 3-004574 ASSY, COVER, UNWIND, RH, VF
18 1 3-004270 GUARD, INTERNAL UNWIND DRIVE PULLEYS
19 1 3-003720-002 BRACKET, MOUNTING EXTENSION UNWIND EXIT ROLLER LH
20 1 3-003720-001 BRACKET, MOUNTING EXTENSION UNWIND EXIT ROLLER RH
21 1 3-003625-X ASSY, DANCER TRIPLE HALL EFFECT BOARD
22 1 3-003087 LATCH, DANCER OPEN
23 1 3-003084 PIN, PIVOT DANCER LATCH
8 24 1 3-002454 ASSY, MOTOR SERVO NEMA23 W/ENCODER WIRED
2 25 1 3-001807 ROLLER, NIP 1.12"DIA X 13.37"LG
26 1 3-001806 SHAFT, PIVOT DANCER
27 1 3-001805 ASSY, FRAME, UNWIND, 12"
69 28 1 3-001804 SHAFT, BAG ROLL REMOVABLE
2" PER SIDE 1 29 1 3-001803 ROLL, NIP RUBBER COVERED
13
ADHERE WITH
2 30 3 3-001802 SHAFT, ROLLER
LOCTITE 441 37 ATTACH MOTOR GROUND 31 1 3-001801 SHAFT, ROLLER SPRING LOADED
2 LUG HERE
32 5 32 1 3-001799 ARM, DANCER AZ LOAD
1 4 33 1 3-001796 PLATE, INFEED SUPPORT
54 65 24 34 1 3-001789 PULLEY, TIMING, 12T, MODIFIED
4 4 1
35 1 3-001788 PULLEY, TIMING 1/2" BORE
47 36 1 3-001783 SPACER, DANCER ARM
1
57 31 37 2 3-001782 PLATE, MOTOR CLAMP
1 1 38 1 3-001780 ASSY, HUB
8 39 1 3-001779 ASSY, HUB, BAG ROLL UNWIND, MODIFIED
8 36 19 67 40 1 3-001777 PLATE, ARM, POWER UNWIND
1 1 2 25
41 1 2-002485 HANDLE, ADJUSTABLE 40mm LG M6X1.0 X 15mm STUD YELLOW
1
42 1 2-002452 ENCODER, OPTICAL E5 4096CPR W/INDEX, .313" SHAFT
45 3 49 4 1-23153F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M2.5, SS
1 2
29 43 50 1 1-22171F WASHER, SPLIT LOCK, M16, SS
22 1 2
6
1 23 53 4 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
27 1 51 64 12 54 4 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
4 2 2 1
1 3 55 4 1-16253F-006M SCREW, SLOTTED PAN HEAD, M2.5X0.45, 6MM LG, SS
52 57 1 1-15106B-012M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 12MM LG, BLACK OXIDE, ISO 7379
1 58 2 1-14159F-008M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 8MM, SS
FOR SPARE PARTS ORDER 59 1 1-14157F-008M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 8MM, SS
PART NUMBER 3-006026 H
67 20 66 60 1 1-12171F-045M SCREW, CAP, HEX HEAD, M16X2.0 X 45MM LG, SS
2 1 1
1 2
11
30
48 ALIGN ETCHING 67 4 1-11159F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 6MM LG, SS
1 WITH THIS SURFACE 68 2 1-11157F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 10MM LG, SS
44
2 7 68 69 1 1-11157F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 6MM LG, SS
56 1 2 2
70 2 1-11153F-006M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M2.5X0.45 X 6MM LG, SS
2 1
45 12 46
6 1 2
58 35
2 1
53 63 60 50 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
4 4 1 1 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
ALIGN ETCHING 40 61 M4 X 0.7 21.0
WITH "0" MARK 1 2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
15 61
1 2 33 64 M8 X 1.25 175.0
2 1 2 M10 X 1.5 346.4
34 59 1 M12 X 1.75 604.1
14 1 1
1
55 49 21 10
18 62 4 4 1 1
1 2
41
1
17 28 N CAS 11-30-17 1299 ADDED SPARE PARTS P/N
1 1
M GHM 10-11-17 1235 SEE SHEET 1 OF 2
26 38
1 1
K GHM 7-11-17 1138 SEE SHEET 1 OF 2
J GHM 04-17-17 1036 SEE SHEET 1 OF 2
H DMF 1-11-17 897 ADDED SHEET 2 FOR LH CONFIGURATION
H LDC 01-04-17 879 1-11153F-006M (2) WAS 1-11154F-006M (2)

ADDED 1-21163F, 27144A1, REPLACED 1-11157F-010M (2)
G DMF 11-11-16 821 WITH 1-16157F-010M; 1-15106B-010M WITH 1-15106B-012M,
ADDED TORQUE SPECS AND CABLE KITS
ADDED (2) 29638A1, (1) 1-33157F,
F LDC 09-30-16 781 (2) 1-11157F-010M
9 SEE DETAIL A 39
MATERIAL SEE B/M
2 ON SHEET 1 1 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]

R
ASSEMBLY FOR RIGHT HAND UNWIND

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
-
NAME: DMF
ASSY, POWERED
3-001800 N
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION UNWIND, 12"
1 1 3-003019 SHAFT, PRINTER PIVOT REAR SHORT
2 2 3-002960 BOSS, DAMPER PRINTER PIVOTING
3 1 3-002780 SHAFT,PIVOT PRINT HEAD, FRONT
4 1 3-002778-002 ASSY, PRINT HEAD STOP, LH
5 1 3-002778-001 ASSY, PRINT HEAD STOP, RH
6 2 3-002773 ASSY, BEARING BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER, REAR
7 1 3-001900 ASSY, PRINTER LOCK HANDLE
8 2 3-001898 HOOK, LATCHING, PRINTER PIVOT
9 1 3-001896-2 BAR, LINKAGE, PRINTER PIVOT, LH
10 1 3-001896-1 BAR, LINKAGE, PRINTER PIVOT, RH
11 2 3-001894 BAR, MOUNT DAMPER REAR
5 22
12 2 2-002137 DAMPER, 100 LBS, 4" STROKE, 5/16-18 THREAD STUDS, EXTENSION
1 2
24 13 2 2-001925 BUMPER, M8X1.25 x 15MM STUD, 70 DURO.
1 14 2 2-001853-121 BEARING, BALL, SHIELDED, 6mm ID x 13mm OD x 5mm, SS
3 15 2 2-001851-064 BEARING, BALL, SHILEDED, 10mm ID x 22mm OD x 6mm, SS
1 16 2 2-001379 SHIM, 10MM ID, 16MM OD, 2MM THK, SS
17 2 1-63152A-006M KEY, 3MM X 3MM, 6MM LG, STEEL, ZINC PLATED
18 2 1-61110F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 10 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
19
2 14
10 4
1 C 21 2 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
1
18 22 4 1-15106F-016M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 16MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
17
26 4 1-11161A-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 14MM LG, ZINC PLATED
12
7
1
1
HANDLE LOCATION
CORRESPONDS 8
TO LEFT OR RIGHT-HAND 2 16
BAGGER 2 15 22
CONFIGURATION.
2 2
25
2
9
1
2
2
26
1 2
1 26
2
6 23
2 4 21
2 20
C 2 12
13
1
2 11
2
C LDC 07-18-16 618 ADDED 2X 1-21163F WASHERS
1-11161A-014M ADDED. 1-14161F-010M REMOVED.
B DAR 10/5/15 226 1-63152A-006M ADDED. 1-63152F-006M REMOVED.
A BJS 6-11-15 42 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION NAME: B.STINARD
ASSY, LATCH
3-003018 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION PRINTER PIVOT, EXT
1 1 597242A1 ASSY, SPINDLE SUPPLY W/ LOCKING KEYS & PLUG RH
20 ITEM
1 2 1 56994A1 SPRING, COIL
QTY 3 1 29740A1 CLAMP, CABLE "U" TYPE 11/16 DIA
40 BALLOON 4 2 29726A1 SPRING, COMPRESSION .300 OD X 1 LG X .032 WIRE
1 DESIGNATION
6 1 29537A1 HINGE, BLACK ACETAL
7 1 28559A1 SPINDLE, RIBBON TAKE-UP CCW (LH)
48 69 6
2 4 1 8 4 27144A1 LABEL, GROUND
9 2 26705A1 WASHER, SPRING
10 1 3-008100 BRACKET, CABLE SUPPORT, AUTOLABEL
11
1 11 1 3-004570 ASSY, COVER, SIDE PRINTER, RH, VF
21
1 13 1 3-004050 ASSY, SOL VALVE HEAD DOWN W/ CABLE AND FITTINGS - 6mm
14 1 3-004048 ASSY, CYLINDER AIR HEAD DOWN 14mm BORE W/ FITTINGS
15 1 3-003867 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER
16 1 3-002522 PAD, WEAR HEAD DOWN CYLINDER NOSE
17 1 3-002521 NOSE, ROD END HEAD DOWN CYLINDER
18 1 3-002515 BLOCK, SUB MOUNTING HEAD DOWN VALVE
19 1 3-001936 BLOCK, VERTICAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
20 1 3-001931 COVER, DUST PRINTER RIBBON
67 39 21 1 3-001930 MOUNT, HANDLE AND DUSTCOVER FRONT
2 1 22 1 3-001929 BRACKET, REAR DUSTCOVER SUPPORT
58 23 1 3-001927 BLOCK, BELT TENSIONING
45
41 1
1 12 24 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
1
1 25 1 3-001925 ROLLER, REAR RIBBON
26 1 3-001924 SHAFT, REAR RIBBON ROLLER
27 2 3-001920 BLOCK, HORIZONTAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
22 73 53
1 2 2 28 1 3-001919 PLATE, PRINT HEAD MOUNTING
52 68
2 2 29 1 3-001918 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
30 1 3-001917 SHAFT, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
31 1 3-001916 PULLEY, RIBBON DRIVE ROLLER LARGE
32 1 3-001915 ROLLER, RUBBER RIBBON DRIVE
33 1 3-001914 BRACKET, SIDE PIVOT BLOCK
52 34 1 3-001912 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER REAR
3 69
3 MOUNT CYLINDER 35 1 3-001911-001 PLATE, SIDE PRINTER RH
43 1 INTO HOLE PATTERN
1 DETAIL A 36 1 2-003136 GROMMET, SPLIT, LOCKING, 1" ID HOLE, BLACK NYLON
1 SCALE 1/1 AS SHOWN
37 2 2-001879 BEARING, FLANGED, 10MM ID X 22MM OD X 6MM LG
38 2 2-001378 THUMBSCREW, KEY DRIVE 10-32 X 1/2 LG BLACK SS
39 1 2-001376 MAGNET, FLAT RETAINING WITH COUNTERSUNK HOLE
41 1 2-001374 HANDLE, PULL ALUM 7MM X 16MM OVAL X 102MM LG X M4X.7 THD
34 42 1 2-001373 COLLAR, CLAMP TWO-PIECE 10MM ID X 25.4 OD X 9MM WD STEEL
1 43 1 2-001372 LEVER, PLASTIC ADJUSTABLE YELLOW STEEL STUD M5 X 25MM
62
1 51 44 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
1 52 45 1 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
61
59 49 3 69
2 46 1 1-61112F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 12 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
2 2 3 7
8 1 47 1 1-61110F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 10 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
35
1
50 70
2 1
25 54 2 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
1
37 56 1 1-15106F-006M SCREW, SHOULDER, 6MM DIA X 6MM LG, SS, ISO 7379
1
46
1 29 67 1
55
1 2
ASSEMBLE RETAINING RING 68 2 1-11157F-014M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 14MM LG, SS
IN THIS GROOVE (1ST FROM END) SEE DETAIL A 69 10 1-11157F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 12MM LG, SS
BEND THIS LEG 90 $ OVER 19 14
TOP OF PIVOT BLOCK 2 1 72 4 1-11155F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 12MM LG, SS
1 1 1
AFTER INSTALLATION 73 6 1-11155F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 10MM LG, SS
SEE 47 27
NOTE 1 2
70 71
FOR GROUND 2
1
USE FOR ITEMS NOT SHOWN
8
GROUNDING 1 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
49 65 1 3-003876-011 ASSY, STRAP PRINTER PLATE TO PRINT HEAD
53 73 16 66 2 1
4 4 1 2 1 3-004871 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, ONESTEP PRINTER
64
4 18 2
8 2 66 1
1 17 2
1 DPI KITS (REF.)
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
72 55
2 8 3-002400-203 KIT, 203 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
4 1
70 3-002400-300 KIT, 300 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
9 13 2 3-002400-406 KIT, 406 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
2 1
28
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 1 54
2
TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3
38 1 J DMF 04-10-19 1891 ADDED 3-008100, 1-11155F-008M (2)
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) 49 65
2 ADDED 27144A1 (4), 3-004426, 1-61507F,
M2 X 0.4 2.5 2 1 H DMF 03-01-19 1790

29638A1(2), 1-23157F (2); REPLACED 28680A1
WITH 2-003136; REMOVED 597335A1; CHANGED
QTY:1-23159F (7) WAS (3)
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 USE FOR COVER 3-004570 WAS 3-004497

74 10 G MDS 03-14-18 1345 CHANGED COVER FASTENERS & STANDOFFS
GROUNDING
M3 X 0.5 9.0 2 1 F KJD 04-06-17 1024 REPLACED 1-11153F-030M WITH 1-11155F-030M
4X 1-23159F 597304A2 REMOVED. LOCITE
E DAR 11-10-16 819
M4 X 0.7 21.0 J NOTE 1X 1-11157F-008M 3-003876-011 ADDED.
ADDED RETAINING RING, LOCTITE NOTES,
24 D DAR 10-11-16 795 CHANGED COVER, ADDED TUBE KIT
M5 X 0.8 42.4 1 C MDS 7-15-16 618
REPLACED 3-004018-001 WITH 3-004570;
REMOVED 2-002411, 1-11459F-010M
M6 X 1.0 72.1 B LDC 03-21-16 499 REMOVED 3-003986 CABLE KIT (1)
A DMF 1-19-16 404

M8 X 1.25 175.0
RELEASED
USE LOW FINISH NONE

56
3-004010-001
REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
M10 X 1.5 346.4 STRENGTH 1 MATERIAL SEE B/M
M12 X 1.75 604.1 LOCTITE
R
ASSY, PRINTER AB H-CLASS, CE, RH 63 23 44 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
1 1 60 5 31 57
1 1 1 2
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
49 62 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
1 1
E
-
NAME: DMF
ASSY, PRINTER
3-004010 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS, CE
40 20
1 1 ITEM 1 1 597242A2 ASSY, SPINDLE SUPPLY W/ LOCKING KEYS & PLUG RH
2 1 56994A1 SPRING, COIL
MOUNT CYLINDER INTO QTY 3 1 29740A1 CLAMP, CABLE "U" TYPE 11/16 DIA
HOLE PATTERN AS SHOWN
BALLOON 4 2 29726A1 SPRING, COMPRESSION .300 OD X 1 LG X .032 WIRE
DESIGNATION
6 1 29537A1 HINGE, BLACK ACETAL
7 1 28559A2 SPINDLE, RIBBON TAKE-UP CCW (RH)
9 2 26705A1 WASHER, SPRING
10 1 3-008100 BRACKET, CABLE SUPPORT, AUTOLABEL
11 1 3-004571 COVER, SIDE PRINTER, CE, RH
13 1 3-004050 ASSY, SOL VALVE HEAD DOWN W/ CABLE AND FITTINGS - 6mm
14 71 39
1 2 6 69 14 1 3-004048 ASSY, CYLINDER AIR HEAD DOWN 14mm BORE W/ FITTINGS
1 1 4
15 1 3-003867 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER
LOW STRENGTH SERVICEABLE 58 16 1 3-002522 PAD, WEAR HEAD DOWN CYLINDER NOSE
17 1
1 LOCTITE THIS PART 17 1 3-002521 NOSE, ROD END HEAD DOWN CYLINDER
ONTO THE CYLINDER
18 1 3-002515 BLOCK, SUB MOUNTING HEAD DOWN VALVE
48 11
1 19 1 3-001936 BLOCK, VERTICAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
2
20 1 3-001931 COVER, DUST PRINTER RIBBON
35
1 21 1 3-001930 MOUNT, HANDLE AND DUSTCOVER FRONT
22 1 3-001929 BRACKET, REAR DUSTCOVER SUPPORT
45 23 1 3-001927 BLOCK, BELT TENSIONING
12
1 1 24 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
53 73 22
25 1 3-001925 ROLLER, REAR RIBBON
2 2 1
26 1 3-001924 SHAFT, REAR RIBBON ROLLER
27 2 3-001920 BLOCK, HORIZONTAL HEAD ALIGNMENT
28 1 3-001919 PLATE, PRINT HEAD MOUNTING
29 1 3-001918 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
30 1 3-001917 SHAFT, PIVOT PRINT HEAD
31 1 3-001916 PULLEY, RIBBON DRIVE ROLLER LARGE
32 1 3-001915 ROLLER, RUBBER RIBBON DRIVE
33 1 3-001914 BRACKET, SIDE PIVOT BLOCK
52 69 1
3 3 1 34 1 3-001912 BLOCK, PIVOT PRINTER REAR
35 1 3-001911-002 PLATE, SIDE, PRINT HEAD LH
36 1 2-003136 GROMMET, SPLIT, LOCKING, 1" ID HOLE, BLACK NYLON
DETAIL A
SCALE 1/1 37 2 2-001879 BEARING, FLANGED, 10MM ID X 22MM OD X 6MM LG
38 2 2-001378 THUMBSCREW, KEY DRIVE 10-32 X 1/2 LG BLACK SS
43 39 1 2-001376 MAGNET, FLAT RETAINING WITH COUNTERSUNK HOLE
1
41 1 2-001374 HANDLE, PULL ALUM 7MM X 16MM OVAL X 102MM LG X M4X.7 THD
49 59 34 42 1 2-001373 COLLAR, CLAMP TWO-PIECE 10MM ID X 25.4 OD X 9MM WD STEEL
2 2 1 37
1 43 1 2-001372 LEVER, PLASTIC ADJUSTABLE YELLOW STEEL STUD M5 X 25MM
52 69 7 44 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
3 3 1 45 1 1-61507F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 4MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
8
1 47 1 1-61110F RING, RETAINING, EXTERNAL, 10 MM DIA SHAFT, SS
36
50 70 1
2 1
1
49 62 26 54 2 1-21159F WASHER, FLAT, M5, SS
1 1 1
1
46
61 15 1 2
61 33 2 1 63 1 1-11159F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 12MM LG, SS
2 1
SEE DETAIL A 64 2 1-11159F-010M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 10MM LG, SS
BEND THIS LEG 90 $ OVER 65 2 1-11159F-008M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
TOP OF PIVOT BLOCK
AFTER INSTALLATION 66 4 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS

64 1 2
30 62 51 1
55 52 67 19 1 1 1 71 2 1-11155F-030M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 30MM LG, SS
2 2 2 1 72 4 1-11155F-012M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M3X0.5 X 12MM LG, SS
29
2 1
72 27 70 ASSEMBLE RETAINING RING ITEMS NOT SHOWN

FOR GROUND
4 2 47 1 IN THIS GROOVE (2ND FROM END)
1 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 3-003876-011 ASSY, STRAP PRINTER PLATE TO PRINT HEAD
4
2 1 3-004871 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, ONESTEP PRINTER
DPI KITS (REF.)

9
PART NO. DESCRIPTION
2
8 3-002400-203 KIT, 203 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
54 1
3-002400-300 KIT, 300 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
2
16 73 53 3-002400-406 KIT, 406 DPI, AB H-CLASS PRINTER
3 70 55
1 4 4 1 2 2
38
2 28
1
FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS 8

10 74
1
1 2 J DMF 4-10-19 1891 ADDED 3-008100, 1-11155F-008M (2)
ADDED 27144A1 (4), 3-004426, 1-61507F,
SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF) J H DMF 03-01-19 1790

29638A1(2), 1-23157F (2); REPLACED 28680A1
65 49
WITH 2-003136; REMOVED 597335A1; CHANGED
QTY:1-23159F (7) WAS (3)
M2 X 0.4 2.5 1 2 G MDS 03-14-18 1345

COVER 3-004571 WAS 3-004498
CHANGED COVER FASTENERS & STANDOFFS
2X USE FOR GROUNDING F KJD 1024
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1 65 49
04-06-17 REPLACED 1-11153F-030M WITH 1-11155F-030M
4X 1-23159F 597304A2 REMOVED. LOCITE
E DAR 11-10-16 819
M3 X 0.5 9.0 1 2 NOTE 1X 1-11157F-008M 3-003876-011 ADDED.
ADDED RETAINING RING, LOCTITE NOTES,
D DAR 10-11-16 795 CHANGED COVER, ADDED TUBE KIT
M4 X 0.7 21.0 C MDS 7-15-16 618
REPLACED 3-004018-002 WITH 3-004571;
8 REMOVED 2-002411, 1-11459F-010M
M5 X 0.8 42.4 1 B LDC 03-21-16 499 REMOVED 3-003986 CABLE KIT (1)
A DMF 404
M6 X 1.0 72.1 1-19-16 RELEASED

M8 X 1.25 175.0 44 1 1
3-004010-002
MATERIAL SEE B/M
M10 X 1.5 346.4 1 56
USE LOW STRENGTH LOCTITE R
M12 X 1.75 604.1 23 63 1 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
24
57 31 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
ASSY, PRINTER AB H-CLASS, CE, LH 2 1 1 1 1 TOLERANCE

1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
E
-
NAME: DMF
ASSY, PRINTER
3-004010 J
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS, CE
** 2 1 597317AX_XX ASSY, PROGRAMMED PRINTER CPU BOARD
3 1 29735A1 BUSHING, SPLIT 1.25 OD X .937 ID BLK NYLON
4 1 29718A1 SUPPLY, POWER SMALL
5 1 29714A1 PLATE, COVER CARD SLOT
6 1 29713B1 BOARD, PRINTER GPIO
7 1 29710A1 BEZEL, PCB CARD HOUSING
8 1 28629A1 NUTPLATE, POWER SUPPLY
10 4 10035A1 WASHER, INTERNAL STAR LOCK NO. 4
11 4 10005RS1_5 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 3/16 LG SS
12 1 3-007632 SHELL, PRINTER E-BOX
13 1 3-007631 PLATE, GROMMET MOUNT
14 1 3-004521 DECAL, PRINTER POWER SWITCH
15 1 3-004172 DECAL, PRINTER POWER
16 1 3-003707 ASSY, PRINTER COVER W/CAPTIVE FASTENERS
17 1 3-003648 COVER, REAR, EBOX PRINTER CARD
18 1 3-003132 DECAL, DATAMAX PRINTER ELEC. ENCLOSURE
19 1 3-002790 ASSY, CARD CAGE W/ BACKPLANE PCB MODIFIED
20 1 3-002745 COVER, PRINTER E-BOX CABLE
21 1 3-002678 PANEL, PRINTER E-BOX
22 1 3-002646 SHELL, PRINTER E-BOX
38 29 22 34 8
4 4 1 2 1 23 1 3-002622 ASSY, PRINTER HMI, H-CLASS
27 24 1 3-002619 BRACKET, CAGE MOUNT
4 33
2
1 2 25 1 2-002705 CLAMP, LOOP, VIBRATION DAMPING, 5/8" ID X 1/2" W
27 6 1-31157F NUT, HEX, M4X0.7, SS
SEE DETAIL B 20 37 28 2 1-23157F WASHER, LOCK, INTERNAL TOOTH, M4, SS
23 1 4
1 26
9 21 35
1 1 4
5 36
1 2
G G ITEMS NOT SHOWN

36 12 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
36
2 1 1 1 3-004207 KIT, CABLE, PRINTER EBOX AB500/600
1 3-004208 KIT, CABLE, AB500/600 PRINTER EXTERNAL TO EBOX
18 2 36
ADHERE TO 3-003707 1 1 2
** REFERENCE ONLY - COMPONENT IS FUNCTION OF PRINTHEAD DPI KIT

SELECTED AT TIME OF ORDER ENTRY
24 27 19
1 2 1
36 7
2 1
11 10
17 37 4 4
1 4 36 6
USE FOR ATTACHING
2 1
PRINTER RIBBON CABLES
G G
37 13
4 1
3
1
16
1
9
14 1
1
28
2 25 31 30
1 1 1
27 ADDED 3-007632, 3-007631; REMOVED 3-003810-X,
G DMF 3-1-19 1790
2
3-003874, 3-003686, 3-003647, CHANGED QTY:
1-11455F-006M (12) WAS (8)
15 F DMF 2-8-17 937

ADDED 2-002705, 1-21157F, 1-16157F-010M;
CHANGED QTY- 1-16157F-006M (7) WAS (8)
1 E DMF 9-9-16 746

ADDED 27144A1, 10035A1, 10005RS1.5, 1-33157F;
CHANGED QTY 1-23157F (2) WAS (18), REMOVED 3-004171
ADDED DECALS: 3-004172, 3-004521,
D LDC 06-15-16 618 3-003132
32 C LDC 03-10-16 402 MULTIPLE COMPONENTS ADDED FOR CE
7 B LDC 9-14-15 241 ADDED 28629A1 (1), 3-003132 (1)
A JAS 4-15-15 42 RELEASE
DETAIL B MATERIAL SEE BOM

SCALE 1/1 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
DETAIL A NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

E 11/16
NAME: JAS
-
(COVER PANEL NOT SHOWN)
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN DATE: 4-15-15
ASSY, EBOX PRINTER

3-002746 G
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION TOP MOUNT
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 597241A1 ASSY, MOTOR RIBBON DRIVE W/ PLUG
1 597317A3-XX.XXXX PCB, CPU H-CLASS PRINTER PROGRAMMED 203 DPI 2 1 595388A1 BAR, RIBBON FLATTENING
1 3-002400-INS INSTRUCTION, H CLASS PRINT HEAD CONVERSION 3 1 29738A1 HEAD, PRINT THERMAL TRANSFER 203 DPI
4 1 29730A1 BELT, TIMING .080 (MXL) X 153 TEETH X 3/16 WD
E 5 1 3-007942 PLATE, GEAR COVER PRINTER
6 1 3-006779-203 DECAL, DPI, AUTOLABEL, 203
7 1 3-001928 STUD, BELT IDLER
8 1 3-001926 GEAR, RIBBON TAKEUP DRIVE
E 9 2 2-003239 STANDOFF, 5mm ID X 8mm OD X 13mm LG
10 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
PRINTER SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY
14
1 FASTENER TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

8 1 M2 X 0.4 2.5
1 1
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
E 9
2 M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
11 M6 X 1.0 72.1
USE LOW STRENGTH
SERVICEABLE LOCTITE 1 6 M8 X 1.25 175.0
1 M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
3
1
P/N 3-002400-203
16
4 1 REMOVED NOTE ABOUT COVER 3-004430-XXX
E GHM 5-29-19 1959
1 ADDED 3-007942 & (2) 2-003239
D MDS 07-30-18 1518 ADDED DECALS 3-006779, TORQUE TABLE

ADDED 3-002400-INS TO EACH BOM, ADDED
C GHM 10-10-17 1255
10 SHEET 4 OF 4 SHOWED CONVERSION
1 B DAR 5-23-16 597E GEAR COVER ADDED AS REFERENCE.
7 2 A DAR 3/9/15 8509 NEW DRAWING
E 1 1 FINISH N/A REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
5
MATERIAL SEE BOM
1 13
12
R

Under Revision
2 PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
SCALE 5/8
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: D ROMO
Fabricated & Documented E

TITLE
KIT, 203 DPI
3-002400 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB H-CLASS PRINTER
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 595388A1 BAR, RIBBON FLATTENING
1 597317A5-XX.XXXX PCB, CPU H-CLASS PRINTER PROGRAMMED 300 DPI E 2 1 3-007942 PLATE, GEAR COVER PRINTER
1 3-002400-INS INSTRUCTION, H CLASS PRINT HEAD CONVERSION 3 1 3-006779-300 DECAL, DPI, AUTOLABEL, 300
4 1 3-001933 GEAR, COMPOUND RIBBON DRIVE 300/600 DPI
6 1 3-001909 MOTOR, RIBBON DRIVE 300/600 DPI WIRED
8 1 2-002087 PRINT HEAD, THERMAL TRANSFER 300 DPI H-CLASS
9 1 2-002038 WASHER, THRUST G300 PLASTIC 6mm ID X 15mm OD X 1.5mm W
10 1 2-001377 BELT, TIMING NEOPRENE MXL 130 T X .188 W
PRINTER SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY 15 4 1-11157F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 18MM LG, SS
15
E TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
6
1
M2 X 0.4 2.5
5
3 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1
USE LOW STRENGTH 12 1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
SERVICEABLE LOCTITE 1
M4 X 0.7 21.0
9 M5 X 0.8 42.4
1 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
8 P/N 3-002400-300
10 1
1 E GHM 5-29-19 1959 SEE SHEET 1 OF 4
4 16 D MDS 07-30-18 1518 ADDED DECALS 3-006779, TORQUE TABLE
1 1 C GHM 10-10-17 1255 SEE SHEET 1 OF 4
B DAR 5-23-16 597E GEAR COVER ADDED AS REFERENCE.

11 USE LOW STRENGTH FINISH N/A REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
1 SERVICEABLE LOCTITE
MATERIAL SEE BOM
E 2 14
1
R
SCALE 5/8 1
Under Revision

13 1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
2 1 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: D ROMO
Fabricated & Documented E TITLE

KIT, 300 DPI
3-002400 E
THIRD ANGLE
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION 1 1 597241A1 ASSY, MOTOR RIBBON DRIVE W/ PLUG
1 597317A4-XX.XXXX PCB, CPU H-CLASS PRINTER PROGRAMMED 406 DPI 2 1 595388A1 BAR, RIBBON FLATTENING
1 3-002400-INS INSTRUCTION, H CLASS PRINT HEAD CONVERSION 3 1 29738A2 HEAD, PRINT THERMAL TRANSFER 406 DPI
4 1 29730A1 BELT, TIMING .080 (MXL) X 153 TEETH X 3/16 WD
E 5 1 3-007942 PLATE, GEAR COVER PRINTER
6 1 3-006779-406 DECAL, DPI, AUTOLABEL, 406
7 1 3-001928 STUD, BELT IDLER
10 1 2-001368-017 BEARING, SLEEVE, PLAIN, 6MM ID x 9MM OD x 6MM , BRONZE
PRINTER SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY

1
E SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
9
2 M2 X 0.4 2.5
8 15 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1 3 M3 X 0.5 9.0
USE LOW STRENGTH 11 M4 X 0.7 21.0
1 1
SERVICEABLE LOCTITE 1 M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
E M8 X 1.25 175.0
5 M10 X 1.5 346.4
1
12 M12 X 1.75 604.1
2
6
P/N 3-002400-406
1
E GHM 5-29-19 1959 SEE SHEET 1 OF 4
16 D MDS 07-30-18 1518 ADDED DECALS 3-006779, TORQUE TABLE

1 C GHM 10-10-17 1255 SEE SHEET 1 OF 4
B DAR 5-23-16 597E GEAR COVER ADDED AS REFERENCE.
4 3 A DAR 3/9/15 8509 NEW DRAWING
1 1 FINISH N/A REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
2 MATERIAL SEE BOM

1
R
Under Revision
1
7 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
1 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
13
C
-
NAME: D ROMO
5/8
1
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN DATE: 3/6/15

KIT, 406 DPI
3-002400 E
THIRD ANGLE
1 4 10017S7 SCREW, FLAT HD SOC CAP 5/16-18 X 7/8 LG
2 1 3-006628-002 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412C MOUNT - RH
3 1 3-006628-001 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412C MOUNT - LH
4 1 3-004251 SHAFT, IDLER ROLLER PI-412
5 1 3-003188 ROLLER, IDLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
3
1
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
1 28605A5 CABLE, SUB-D,15 PIN MALE-15 PIN MALE, 5 FEET
1 2-002070-004 CABLE, ETHERNET EXTENSION CAT5E 5 FEET
1 3-005735 ASS'Y, PI412C FESTOON WEIGHT/AB500
5
1 4
1
7
4
2
1
6
1 2
4
A GHM 7-26-18 1517 RELEASE
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
- - -
NAME: GHM

KIT, TIE-IN
3-006626 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500 - PI412C
1 4 10017S7 SCREW, FLAT HD SOC CAP 5/16-18 X 7/8 LG
2 1 3-006629-002 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412CW MOUNT - LH
3 1 3-006629-001 ASSY, BRACKET AB500 - PI412CW MOUNT - LH
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1 28605A5 CABLE, SUB-D,15 PIN MALE-15 PIN MALE, 5 FEET
1 3-005410 KIT, TUBING ROUTING AB500/600 TO PI412C/CW
1 2-002757 FITTING, REDUCER ELBOW PLUG-IN 1/4 STEM X 6mm TUBE
1 3-005735 ASS'Y, PI412C FESTOON WEIGHT/AB500
3
1
4
1
5 7
1 4
2
1
6
2
1
4
FOR ADDED SUPPORT DURING MOUNTING OF PRINTER

ADD (4) 3/8 X 1/4" SHOULDER BOTH TO BOTTOM
PRINTER MOUTING HOLES A GHM 7-26-18 1517 RELEASE
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
- - -
NAME: GHM

KIT, TIE-IN
3-006627 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB500 - PI412CW
1 1 3-004395-002 ASSY, BRACKET W/ PIN, AUTOLABEL 500 TO AB500, LH
2 1 3-004395-001 ASSY, BRACKET W/ PIN, AUTOLABEL 500 TO AB500, RH
7
2
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1
1 1 28605A5 CABLE, SUB-D,15 PIN MALE-15 PIN MALE, 5 FEET
4
1
3
1
6
2
7
2
6
2 5
2 2
1
C DMF 5-15-19 1932 REMOVED 2-002070-004

1-11163F-016M (4) WAS 1-11163F-020M (4),
B DMF 3-23-18 1386 CHANGED LOCATIONS
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
- - -
NAME: LDC

KIT, TIE-IN AUTOLABEL
3-004396 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION 500 TO AB500
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION B
1 2 59537A1 GUIDE, WEB
3 1 3-003187 SHAFT, ROLLER BAGGER ENTRY AB500
4 2 3-003186 BRACKET, MOUNTING, ENTRY ROLLER
6
5 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS 4 B
2
1
4 1 B
2 3 2
1 ADDED 2X 59537A1, 1-11459F-010M WAS
B LDC 9-06-15 226 1-11659F-008M
5 A ZR 7-21-15 42 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
B
- - -
NAME: ZR
ASSY, TRANSITION
3-003185 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROLLER, AB500
1 2 3-003316 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0, NON-CLAMPING
SEE TABLE * 2 1 3-002870 PLATE, LOAD SHELF
10 6 5 3 2 3-002846 WELDMENT, LOAD SHELF MOUNT
C
2 2 2
4 2 3-002845 CLAMP, LOAD SHELF MOUNT
5 2 2-002170-M6 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0
C 8 1 1-11659F-008M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M5X0.8 X 8MM LG, SS
C 1 10 6 1-11161F-018M SCREW, CAP, SOCKET HEAD, M6X1.0 X 18MM LG, SS
7
3 1
2
6
2
2 4
1 2
10
4 LOAD SHELF ASSY LOAD SHELF PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER LOAD SHELF ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
* 3-002873-12 3-002870-12
3-002873-12 ASSY, LOAD SHELF 12"W X 12"LG
* 3-002873-16 3-002870-16
* 3-002873-20 3-002870-20
9
1
C
3
2


M2 X 0.4 2.5
M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
M5 X 0.8 42.4
M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
M12 X 1.75 604.1
REPLACED 1-11159F-018M WITH 1-11161F-018M, ADDED

C DMF 11-11-16 821 1-11459-008M, 1-11659F-008M; CHANGED QTY-
1-11659F-016M (3) WAS (4)
3-003316, 2X 1-21261F, 2X 1-11161F-018M
B JAS 9-9-15 226 ADDED. 1-11457F-008M REMOVED.
A JAS 5-11-15 42 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
---
NAME: JAS
ASSY, LOAD
3-002873 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SHELF 12"W
SOLENOID VALVE AND HARDWARE (INCLUDED WITH KIT 3-003168)
ITEM QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION REMOVE BLANK IN
2 FIFTH POSITION
1 2 28240A1 FITTING, UNION FLOW RESTRICTOR IN-LINE BARBED .040 ID 1
2 1 200398A4 VALVE, SOLENOID, 3 POSITION BLOCKED CENTER
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1 3-004880 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, LOAD SHELF
LONG BAG CONFIGURATION

USE THIS FOR BAG 5
1
INSERT VALVE
IN PLACE OF BLANK
LENGTHS OF 5" OR GREATER 1
2
PLACE UNIONS
IN AIR LINES
TO CYLINDER
AND LOCATE CLOSE
TO VALVE PACK
6
1
SHORT BAG CONFIGURATION

USE THIS FOR BAG
7 LENGTHS LESS THAN 5"
2
1
1
2
1
4
1
8 3
4 1
E E

E DMF 11-11-16 821 ADDED 3-005013, 1-33157F
1 1 591275A2 DECAL, SHELF POSITION RH
D MDS 09-29-16 768 REMOVED TUBING, ADDED 3-004880
2 1 591275A1 DECAL, SHELF POSITION LH SWAP AIR LINES WHEN C LDC 08-22-16 724 2-002589 (2) WAS 2-001932 (2)
3 1 3-005013 GUARD, VL SHELF CYLINDER CHANGING BETWEEN B JAS 9-15-15 226 ADDED VALVING, TUBING, AND DECALS
CONFIGURATIONS FINISH NONE
4 1 3-002850 ASSEMBLY, CUSTOM CYLINDER, LOAD SHELF REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
5 1 3-002844 SHELF, SUPPORT MATERIAL SEE BOM
6 1 3-002843 BRACKET, LOAD SHELF MOUNT

R
7 2 2-002589 HANDLE, ADJ YELLOW PLASTIC 65mm LG X M6 INT STEEL THD TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
8 4 1-33157F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M4X0.7, SS 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
D
---
NAME: JAS
ASSY, SHELF,
3-003168 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ARTICULATING LOAD 12"W
1 1 28670B1 SENSOR, FRAME OPTOELECTRONIC- 80 X 80
2 1 3-005399 BRACKET, MOUNT SIMPLE COUNT AB500
3 1 3-003577 SPACER, SIMPLE COUNT
6 4 1 3-003536 ASSY, CABLE, COUNT EYE SENSOR
3
4 3
1 1
5
4
6
3
5
2
B MDS 05-09-17 1027 REPLACED BRACKET 3-003576 WITH 3-005399

1 A LDC 10-12-15 328 RELEASE
1
MATERIAL SEE BOM
R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
B
---
NAME: MDS
KIT, SIMPLE COUNT

3-003573-001 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SM-AB500
1 1 28761B1 SENSOR, OPTOELECTRONIC 80 X 120
2 1 3-005399 BRACKET, MOUNT SIMPLE COUNT AB500
3 1 3-003536 ASSY, CABLE, COUNT EYE SENSOR

1
5
3
4
4
5
3
1 B MDS 05-09-17 1027 REPLACED BRACKET 3-003576 WITH 3-005399
1 2 A LDC 10-12-15 328 RELEASE

MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
B
---
NAME: MDS
KIT, SIMPLE COUNT

3-003573-002 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION LG-AB500
ITEM 1 1 595026A1 STRAP, TENSION
22 28 1 4 28 22 2 1 3-005382-002 DECAL, THREADING BAG-N-BOX AB500/AB600 -LH
2 2 1 1 2 2 QTY D 3 1 3-005382-001 DECAL, THREADING BAG-N-BOX AB500/AB600 -RH
BALLOON
4 1 3-003645-003 WEIGHT, BELT TENSION
DESIGNATION
5 1 3-003646 GUIDE, ADJUSTABLE, BAG-IN-BOX
10 6 1 3-003644 EXTRUSION, GUIDE, BAG-IN-BOX, AB500
1 7 1 3-003643 BRACKET, CORNER, EXTRUSION MOUNT
12 11 8 1 3-003642 BAR, TENSION STRAP, AB500
2 2 9 1 3-003639 PLATE, MOUNTING, TOWER, BAG-IN-BOX
10 1 3-003635 WELDMENT, TOWER, BAG-IN-BOX, AB500
8
11 2 3-002452 COLLAR, FILM GUIDE
1
12 2 25325A1 SPRING, EXTENSION
13 2 2-002170-M6 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0
15
1 14 1 2-002485 HANDLE, ADJUSTABLE 40mm LG M6X1.0 X 15mm STUD YELLOW
15 1 2-001312 KNOB, M6 X 16MM LG STUD, SS
16 1 1-31171F NUT, HEX, M16X2.0, SS
9 25 18 21 17 2 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
1 4 4 4
20 1 1-21361D WASHER, FLAT, HARDENED, M6, DIN 6340
D 21 6 1-21163F WASHER, FLAT, M8, SS
13 2
1 22 4 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
1
14
1
20
1
1 23 18 21
2 2 2
6
1
13
1 5
1
17
24 2
16 1
1
D 3
1
D
REMOVED LANGUAGE NOTE & 595184A1
D GHM 04-06-17 1022 REPLACED WITH 3-005382-001, 3-005382-002
C DAR 6-17-16 560B 3-002452 MOVED TO OPPOSITE TUBE

27 19 26 B DAR 03-31-16 310 RELEASED
1 1 1 FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN 0.438 DATE: 10-27-15
ASSY, UNWIND, TOWER,

3-003640 D
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION BAG-IN-BOX, AB500
B 1 4 470395A1 PULLEY, SPRING BELT GRIPPER
B 2 2 29524A1 CUSHION, URETHANE
3 2 3-003718 WEIGHT, STANDARD UNWIND
4 2 2-002344 KNOB, M6 BLIND HOLE, SS INSERT
B 5 4 1-33161F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M6X1.0, SS
4 3
2 2
5 B
4
B
1
4
2 B GHM 7-26-17 1138
ADDED 470395A1, 29524A1, 1-33161F
2 B 6
& 1-11161F-010M

4
MATERIAL SEE BOM
7 R
2 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
---
NAME: LDC

KIT, WEIGHT STD
3-003717 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION POWERED UNWIND
1 1 3-003719-001 WEIGHT, CROSS BAR UNWIND AB500
1
1
REMOVED 470395A1, 29524A1, 1-33161F

C GHM 7-26-17 1138 & 1-11161F-010M
B DMF 3-6-17 976 REPLACED 1-11161F-012M WITH 1-11161F-010M
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
---
NAME: LDC

KIT, WEIGHT CROSS
3-003734-001 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION BAR ADDITIONAL AB500
1 1 3-005141 SUPPORT, HMI Z-RISER
SCALE 3/8
10.00
SCALE 3/8
1
1
NOTE: MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
ASSEMBLY TO BE FABRICATED WITH EXISTING

COMPONENTS FROM THE HMI MOUNTING ARM ASSEMBLY.

TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
PLACE APS# 3-002923 - BAR, HMI SUPPORT ARM

ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
OPTION
NAME: LDC
1/2
IN MACHINE SHIP KIT.
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN DATE: 01-13-17

ASSY, HMI
3-005142 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ARM Z-RISER
1 1 200175A1 SWITCH, SAFETY MAGNETICALLY CODED
2 1 3-004911 BLOCK, MOUNTING FRONT GUARD SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH
3 2 2-002170-M6 T-NUT, 3030 SERIES, M6x1.0
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

4 QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
2 1 3-004912 ASSY, CABLE FRONT SAFETY GUARD SWITCH
INCLUDED WITH 200175A1
3
2
7
2
6
2
8 2
2 1
1
1
6
2
5
2 9
2


A DAR 1-5-17 882
M2 X 0.4 2.5
NEW DRAWING
FINISH 123456 REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION

M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
MATERIAL 123456
M3 X 0.5 9.0 R
M4 X 0.7 21.0 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

M5 X 0.8 42.4
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
M6 X 1.0 72.1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
M8 X 1.25 175.0 AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
Fabricated & Documented M10 X 1.5 346.4

TITLE
ASSY, FRONT
3-005118 A
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant M12 X 1.75 604.1
INCH [MM] PROJECTION GUARD SAFETY SWITCH
1 1 200398A2 VALVE, SOLENOID 4 WAY
2 2 3-004342 HOUSING, BEARING PIVOT SEAL FLATTENERS
3 2 3-004331 ASSY, PIVOT LINK W/ SLEEVE BEARING
4 1 3-003330-002 FINGER, SHORT BAGGER, LH
5 1 3-003330-001 FINGER, SHORT BAGGER, RH
6 1 3-003327-002 COVER, SEAL FLATTENER, LH
7 1 3-003327-001 COVER, SEAL FLATTENER, RH
8 1 3-003217-002 FINGER, LONG BAGGER, LH
9 1 3-003217-001 FINGER, LONG BAGGER, RH
10 2 3-003216 ROD, SEAL FLATTENER
11 2 3-003214 LINK, SEAL FLATTENER, DRIVEN
12 1 3-003213-002 BRACKET, SEAL FLATTENER MOUNT, LH
13 1 3-003213-001 BRACKET, SEAL FLATTENER MOUNT, RH
14 2 3-002424 NUT, 'T' FASTENER, M6X1 THREAD
15 4 2-002493 WASHER, FLAT .198 ID X .373 OD X .09 THICK ALUM
14 16 2 2-002280 FITTING, REDUCER STR PLUG-IN 1/4 STEM X 6mm TUBE
12 15 23
2 4 17 2 2-002202 CYLINDER, ROTARY, 10mm SIZE x 180° SWIVEL ANGLE
1 4
THREAD NUT FULLY ONTO STUD
UNTIL TIGHTENED AGAINST WASHER. 19 4 2-001853-121 BEARING, BALL, SHIELDED, 6mm ID x 13mm OD x 5mm, SS
DO NOT LEAVE LOOSE. 20 4 2-001357 FITTING, ELBOW M3 MALE TO 4mm TUBE
29 E 21 2 1-61508F RING, RETAINING, E-CLIP, 5MM DIA. NOM, DIN 6799, SS
USE .040-.045 SHIM TO SUPPORT
2 22 2 1-41105F-014M PIN, DOWEL, 5MM DIA X 14MM LG, SS
CLEVIS WHEN PRESSING IN PIN.
25 11 23 4 1-33159F NUT, HEX, NYLON LOCK, M5X0.8, SS
2 2 PRESS CLEVIS ONTO CYLINDER 24 2 1-21157F WASHER, FLAT, M4, SS
SHAFT UNTIL OUTSIDE SURFACE
IS FLUSH WITH SHAFT END. 25 2 1-14157F-004M SCREW, SET, CUP POINT, SOCKET HEAD, M4X0.7 X 4MM, SS
10
2 2 27 6 1-11653F-010M SCREW, FLAT HEAD, SOCKET, M2.5X0.45 X 10MM LG, SS
3
20 26
4 4
ITEMS NOT SHOWN
8 FINGER FOR QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION
1 LONG BAGGER 1 3-004882 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, SEAL FLATTENERS
6
1
27 FINGER FOR 4
6 SHORT BAGGER 1
24
2
FINGER FOR 5 1 NOTES:
SHORT BAGGER 1 30 1
2 13 18
1 2 PLACE VALVE IN 7TH STATION.
28 PORT "4A" USED

2 FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
4
2 IN UP POSITION
17
2 E 21
2 PORT "2B" USED
19 FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
4 IN DOWN POSITION
LIGHT PRESS FIT POSSIBLE.
PRESS IN USING OUTER RACE ONLY.
DO NOT PRESS IN USING INNER RACE
AS DAMAGE TO BEARING WILL OCCUR.
VALVE PACK SHOWN
FINGER FOR 9 FOR REFERENCE ONLY
LONG BAGGER 1
16
2
USE WITH 1/4"
7 PORTS ON ENGLISH
1 VALVE PACKS E GHM 5-19-17 1069 1-61508F WAS 1-60507F
TUBING REPLACED WITH TUBING KIT.
D JAS 11-16-16 832 TIGHTEN NUT NOTE ADDED.
3-4331,3-4342,2-2493,1-33159F,2-1853-121,
C DAR 4-19-16 536 1-11653F-010M,2-2280 ADDED. 3-3326 DELETED.
B JAS 12-8-15 226 2-001357 ADDED.
A JAS 10-5-15 226 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
D
---
NAME: JAS
ASSY, ROTARY
3-003219 E
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SEAL FLATTENER
1 1 595341A2 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER R.H.
2 1 595341A1 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER L.H.
3 2 36598A1 ASSY, CLEVIS
4 2 36568A1 LINK, CYLINDER
5 1 36554A2 FINGER, SEAL FLATTENER - L.H.
6 1 36554A1 FINGER, SEAL FLATTENER - R.H.
7 1 36553A2 MOUNT,LH
8 1 36553A1 MOUNT,RH
9 2 25416A1 CYLINDER, AIR FLAT
10 2 23668A1 RING, RETAINER "E"
11 4 21252AS1 RING, RETAINING 'E' 1/4 SHAFT, SS
12 4 200108A2 FITTING, ELBOW 1/4" TUBE X 10-32 UNF
2 1
13 4 10041AS1 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK NO.4 (SS) 1 1
14 2 10016JS1 NUT, HEX JAM 1/4-28 (SS)
15 4 10005RS3 SCREW, SOC HD CAP #4-40 X 3/8 LG SS
17 2 3-003474 NUT, "T", FASTENER, LEGACY SEAL FLATTENERS, M6X1
18 4 2-002243 FITTING, REDUCER, 1/4 TUBE TO 5/32 TUBE
9 7 13 16 14 10 3 8 21 19 20 17
2 1 4 4 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
15
4
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1 3-004882 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, SEAL FLATTENERS B
12 18
4 4
NOTES: 1
1 4 11 5 6
PORT "4A" USED 2 4 1 1
FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
IN UP POSITION
PORT "2B" USED

FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
IN DOWN POSITION
SECURE WYES TO FACEPLATE

STANDOFF BLOCK WITH ZIP-TIES
3
SCALE 3/8 2
B JAS 11-16-16 832 TUBING REPLACED WITH TUBING KIT
4 A JAS 10-14-15 227 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
REMOVE BLANK IN SEVENTH POSITION TOLERANCE

1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted
2 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
INSERT VALVE ANGULAR # 1/2 $
2
IN PLACE OF BLANK D
---
NAME: JAS
ASSY, SEAL FLATTENERS,

3-003466 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION FINGER STYLE
1 1 595580A2 SEAL, FINGER FLATTENER - LH
2 1 595580A1 SEAL, FINGER FLATTENER - R.H.
3 1 595341A2 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER R.H.
4 1 595341A1 GUARD, SEAL FLATTENER L.H.
5 2 36598A1 ASSY, CLEVIS
6 2 36568A1 LINK, CYLINDER
7 1 36553A2 MOUNT,LH
8 1 36553A1 MOUNT,RH
9 2 25416A1 CYLINDER, AIR FLAT
10 2 23668A1 RING, RETAINER "E"
11 4 21252AS1 RING, RETAINING 'E' 1/4 SHAFT, SS
12 4 200108A2 FITTING, ELBOW 1/4" TUBE X 10-32 UNF
4 3
13 4 10041AS1 WASHER, SPLIT LOCK NO.4 (SS) 1 1
14 2 10016JS1 NUT, HEX JAM 1/4-28 (SS)
17 2 3-003474 NUT, "T", FASTENER, LEGACY SEAL FLATTENERS, M6X1
18 4 2-002243 FITTING, REDUCER, 1/4 TUBE TO 5/32 TUBE
9 7 13 16 14 10 5 8 21 19 20 17
2 1 4 4 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
15
4
ITEMS NOT SHOWN

1 3-004882 KIT, TUBE ROUTING, SEAL FLATTENERS B
12 18
4 4
NOTES:
1
1 6 11 1 2
PORT "4A" USED 2 4 1 1
FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
IN UP POSITION
PORT "2B" USED

FOR SEAL FLATTENERS
IN DOWN POSITION
SECURE WYES TO FACEPLATE

STANDOFF BLOCK WITH ZIP-TIES
3
2
B JAS 11-16-16 832 TUBING REPLACED WITH TUBING KIT
SCALE 3/8 A JAS 10-14-15 227 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE BOM

R
REMOVE BLANK IN SEVENTH POSITION TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
2 3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
INSERT VALVE ANGULAR # 1/2 $
2
IN PLACE OF BLANK 4 D
---
NAME: JAS
2 CONSENT OF AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS INC.
ASSY, SEAL FLATTENERS,

3-003611 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION PADDLE STYLE
3-005297-075
1 1 595844A1 SWITCH, 4MM ROUND PNP W/QUICK DIS
2 1 36584A1 BUMPER, RUBBER 1.00"
3 2 27496B1 DECAL, DO NOT OPERATOR WITH GUARD REMOVED ICON
4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
10 5 1 3-005352-075 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER .75"
1
6 1 3-005351 ASSY, FUNNEL AIR CYLINDER W/ FITTINGS AND ROD PIVOT
7 2 3-005341 BLOCK, MOUNTING FUNNEL GUARD
8 1 3-005312-075 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER .75"
6 9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1
11 10 1 3-005283-075 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE .75"
1 C
C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
3
19
2
12 16
1 15 2
LEAVE .03-.06 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
NUT AND DOOR ATTACH WITH 3M SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)

2
SCOTCHWELD M2 X 0.4 2.5
1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1 7 M3 X 0.5 9.0
1 2
17 M4 X 0.7 21.0
1 M5 X 0.8 42.4
21 21 M6 X 1.0 72.1
5 2
2
1 M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
20 LOW STRENGTH
2 LOCTITE M12 X 1.75 604.1
18
6
13 9
1 1
8 C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
1 B CAS 9-12-17 1221

11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
INVERT 595844A1
A DAR 3-8-17 949 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE TABLE
14
R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

4 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10

1
C

ASSY, FUNNEL SQ ACCUM
3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - .75"
3-005297-100
2 1 36584A2 BUMPER STRIP
10 4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS
1 5 1 3-005352-100 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE LOWER 1.00"
8 1 3-005312-100 GUARD, FUNNEL ACCUMULATING SQUARE UPPER 1.00"
1 10 1 3-005283-100 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 1.00"
11
2 C C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
3
19
2
12 16
1 2
15
LEAVE .03-.06 2
GAP BETWEEN
NUT AND DOOR SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
2 ATTACH WITH 3M
M2 X 0.4 2.5
1 SCOTCHWELD
1 ADHESIVE # CA-40H M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
17 7 M4 X 0.7 21.0
1 2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
5 21 M6 X 1.0 72.1
21
1 2 M8 X 1.25 175.0
2
20 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2 M12 X 1.75 604.1
LOW STRENGTH 18
LOCTITE 6
13 9
1 1 C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
B CAS 9-12-17 1221
8 INVERT 595844A1

1
MATERIAL SEE TABLE

R
14
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
4 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
# .02
# .005
# 0,51
# 0,10
1
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION CE METRIC - 1.00"
3-005297-150
10
6
2 C
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS

19 2
2
12 2
LEAVE .03-.06 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)

GAP BETWEEN ATTACH WITH 3M
2 M2 X 0.4 2.5
NUT AND DOOR SCOTCHWELD
1 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H
1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
1 17
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
7 M5 X 0.8 42.4
2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
21
5 21 2 M8 X 1.25 175.0
1 2
M10 X 1.5 346.4
20 LOW STRENGTH
M12 X 1.75 604.1
2 LOCTITE
18
6
13 9
1 1 C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
B CAS 9-12-17 1221
8 INVERT 595844A1
1 A DAR 3-8-17 949 NEW DRAWING
MATERIAL SEE TABLE

R
4
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
1 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
3-005297-200
2 1 36584A4 BUMPER STRIP 2-1/4
10
6
9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1
C 10 1 3-005283-200 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 2.00"
11
2 C 11 2 2-002489-002 DECAL, HAND CRUSH/FORCE FROM RIGHT
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
2
19 2
2
12 16
1 2
LEAVE .03-.06 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
NUT AND DOOR ATTACH WITH 3M SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)

2
SCOTCHWELD
1 M2 X 0.4 2.5
ADHESIVE # CA-40H
1 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
17
1 7 M4 X 0.7 21.0
2 M5 X 0.8 42.4
5 21 M6 X 1.0 72.1
1 2
21 M8 X 1.25 175.0
20 2 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
M12 X 1.75 604.1
LOW STRENGTH
LOCTITE 18
6
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221

11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
INVERT 595844A1
MATERIAL SEE TABLE

R

13 1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
4 ANGULAR # 1/2 $
1
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
3-005297-250
10
6
9 1 3-005292 BUMPER, STOP FUNNEL DOOR M6
1
C
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
2
19
2
12
1
LEAVE .03-.06 15 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
GAP BETWEEN 2 MINIMUM TORQUE SHALL BE 85% OF LISTED MAXIMUM TORQUE.
NUT AND DOOR SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)

ATTACH WITH 3M M2 X 0.4 2.5
2
1 SCOTCHWELD
1 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H
1 M3 X 0.5 9.0
17
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
7
2 21 M5 X 0.8 42.4
2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
21 M8 X 1.25 175.0
20
2 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
LOW STRENGTH M12 X 1.75 604.1
5 18
LOCTITE
1 6
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
INVERT 595844A1
MATERIAL SEE TABLE

R

13 1 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5

Vaulted

4 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10

1
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
3-005297-300
10
11
C
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
2
19
2
12
1
LEAVE .03-.06
NUT AND DOOR 2 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
1 M2 X 0.4 2.5
ATTACH WITH 3M
1 2 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
SCOTCHWELD
1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H M3 X 0.5 9.0
17
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
7 21 M5 X 0.8 42.4
2 2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
21 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
M12 X 1.75 604.1
5 20 18
1 2 6
LOW STRENGTH
LOCTITE
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221 INVERT 595844A1
MATERIAL SEE TABLE

R
13
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted
4 2 PLACE DIMS
3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .02
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,51
# 0,10
1 DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
3-005297-350
2 1 36584A7 BUMPER STRIP 3-3/4
1
1 11 10 1 3-005283-350 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 3.50"
2 C
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
19 2
12 2
1
LEAVE .03-.06
2
GAP BETWEEN TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
NUT AND DOOR
ATTACH WITH 3M SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
2
1 SCOTCHWELD M2 X 0.4 2.5
1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H
1 M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
M3 X 0.5 9.0
17
1 M4 X 0.7 21.0
7 21 M5 X 0.8 42.4
2 2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
21 M10 X 1.5 346.4
2
20 M12 X 1.75 604.1
5
1 2 18
LOW STRENGTH 6
LOCTITE
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
B CAS 9-12-17 1221
8 INVERT 595844A1

1
14 MATERIAL SEE TABLE

R

1
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

4 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
1
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
3-005297-400
10 4 1 11005HFS100 SCREW, HEX HD CAP M8X100MM LG FULL THD, SS

6
11
2 C 10 1 3-005283-400 ASSY, FUNNEL SQUARE ACCUMULATING CE METRIC - BARE 4.00"
13 1 1-31163F NUT, HEX, M8X1.25, SS
3
19
12 2
1
LEAVE .03-.06 2 TIGHTEN ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
NUT AND DOOR 2 SIZE MAX TORQUE (IN-LBF)
1 M2 X 0.4 2.5
2 ATTACH WITH 3M
1 SCOTCHWELD M2.5 X 0.45 5.1
1
ADHESIVE # CA-40H M3 X 0.5 9.0
M4 X 0.7 21.0
17
1 7 M5 X 0.8 42.4
21
2 2 M6 X 1.0 72.1
M8 X 1.25 175.0
M10 X 1.5 346.4
20 21
2 M12 X 1.75 604.1
2
5 LOW STRENGTH 18
1 LOCTITE 6
9
1
C KJD 01-11-19 1784 2-002489-002 WAS 2-002425
11005HFS100 WAS 1-11163F-100,
8 B CAS 9-12-17 1221 INVERT 595844A1
14 MATERIAL SEE TABLE

1 R
13
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

4 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
1 DRAWING SIZE SCALE DRAWN BY BOM REFERENCE NUMBER
C

3-005297 C
THIRD ANGLE
1 1 595946A30 GUARD, FUNNEL ROUND 3 INCH
B 2 1 595945A30 PIVOT, FUNNEL DOOR 3" ROUND
3 1 595944A30 DOOR, FUNNEL 3" ROUND
4 1 595943A30 FUNNEL, WELDMENT ROUND BODY 3 IN.
4
1
-A-
1/16
TYP. 1
16
1/16 1/4-1/2
BUSHINGS TO BE PRESSED
FIT INTO HOLES.
McMASTER-CARR
P/N 6391K122 .87
1/4 OD X 3/16 ID X 1/4 THK -A-
BRONZE BUSHING (4) REQ'D
REAM TO DIA. .187/.190
2
1 B
1/16 1/4 -1/4

1/16 1/4 -1/4
1
3
1
1 FUNNEL DOOR MUST
MATE FLUISH WITH B KJD 7-26-17 1157
UPDATE TO STANDARD FORMAT
UPDATES TO PART NUMBER 595945A30
FUNNEL BODY OPENING A GHM 6-4-12 8272 NEW RELEASE
.020 GAP PERMISSIBLE FINISH N/A REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
AROUND PERMIMETER
MATERIAL SEE TABLE
R
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED PART MUST BE FREE OF BURRS AND SHARP EDGES
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

1. MAKE SURE THE WELD IS CONTINUOUS AROUND THE 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10

CYLINDER MOUNT BLOCKS.
C
595941A30
NAME: GHM
1/1
2. DO NOT GRIND AWAY ALL OF EACH EXTERIOR WELD. DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN
DATE: 06-04-12
Fabricated & Documented 3. FUNNEL IS TO BE HEAVY DUTY.

TITLE
ASS'Y, FUNNEL
595942A30 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUND 3" BASIC
C 1 1 595942A30 ASS'Y, FUNNEL ROUND BASIC 3'
2 1 595939A1 CLEVIS, CYLINDER MODIFIED
4 1 36051A1 BUMPER, STOP
5 2 27741A1 CONTROL, FLOW
6 1 26526A1 SCREW, SHOULDER
1 C 7 1 25436A1 SCREW, DOOR STOP
1
8 1 200599A1 PIN, ROD CLEVIS W/ SNAP RINGS
9 1 200598A1 CYLINDER, AIR COMPACT 3/4 BORE X 3/4 STK
10 1 10361A1 SCREW, SHOULDER 3/16 DIA X 1 LG
11 1 10015N1 NUT, FULL HEX 1/4-20
12 1 10014N1 NUT, HEX MACH #10-32
13 2 10011K1 NUT, HEX ELASTIC LOCK #8-32
13
9 2
1
10
1
3 5
1 2
12
1 6
1
2
1 8
1
C KJD 7-26-17 1157 UPDATES TO PART NUMBER 595942A30

36884A1, 10065A1, 10045A1,
B DAR 9-27-15 226 10015R5, 1X 10361A1 REMOVED.
A GHM 6-4-12 8272 NEW RELEASE
11 FINISH N/A REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION

1
MATERIAL SEE TABLE
R
7 1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: GHM3

KIT, FUNNEL
595941B30 C
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUND 3" CE
2 1 36885A35 ASSEMBLY, ROUND FUNNEL PURCHASED 3.5 IN.
2 3 1 36051A1 BUMPER, STOP
1 4 2 28134A1 DECAL, PINCH POINT, CAUTION
5 2 27741A1 CONTROL, FLOW
6 1 26526A1 SCREW, SHOULDER
7 1 25436A1 SCREW, DOOR STOP
8 1 21107A1 CLEVIS
9 1 200598A1 CYLINDER, AIR COMPACT 3/4 BORE X 3/4 STK
10 1 10361A1 SCREW, SHOULDER 3/16 DIA X 1 LG
B 11 1 10015N1 NUT, FULL HEX 1/4-20
12 2 10011K1 NUT, HEX ELASTIC LOCK #8-32
4
2
12
1
9
1
12
1
10
1
1 5
1 2
8
1 6
1
B KJD 08-09-17 1157 ADD 10015N1(1)

1
11 MATERIAL SEE BOM
1 B R
1 TOLERANCE
1 PLACE DIMS
INCHES
# .1
mm
# 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C
-
NAME: D ROMO

KIT, FUNNEL
595941B35 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION ROUND 3.5" CE
ITEM PART NO. QTY. DESCRIPTION
1 29279A8 1 CONNECTOR, MICRO‐FIT 3.0 CRIMP HOUSING 8 POSITION
2 28617A5 8 CONTACT,MICR.3.0,20‐24GA.FEM.
3 25817A8 10' CABLE, 8 CONDUCTOR, 22 AWG
QTY PART NO. DESCRIPTION ITEM 1 1 28028A1 ULTRASONIC SENSOR - EMITTER
1 3-003804 ASSY, CABLE, SUREFILL SENSOR, EMITTER/RECEIVER B 2 2 3-006575 BLOCK, SPACER SUREFILL
QTY
B 3 2 3-006573 BRACKET, MOUNTING, SENSOR SUREFILL
BALLOON
4 2 3-003741 T-NUT, MOUNTING, SURE-FILL
DESIGNATION
5 1 2-001970 SENSOR, RECEIVER, ULTRASONIC, PNP
6 2 2-001312 KNOB, M6 X 16MM LG STUD, SS
5
1
4 1
1
2
1 B
3
1 B 4
1
2 B
6 1
1
8 8
1 1
6
1
7
2
9
B 2 3
B 1
7
2
9
2
B
AB SERIES FRONT GUARD ASSEMBLY
3-006573 WAS 3-003740, ADDED 3-006575,

B LDC 05-11-18 1483 1-11159F-022M WAS 1-11159F-010M
A DMF 11-16-15 357 RELEASED
MATERIAL SEE B/M

R
TOLERANCE INCHES mm
1 PLACE DIMS # .1 # 2,5
Vaulted

3 PLACE DIMS # .005 # 0,10
ANGULAR # 1/2 $
C

ASSY,
3-003742 B
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION SURE-FILL
SCHEMATICS
Subject Page
AB2-500-PNE, Schematic, Pneumatic

AB 600 Rev C ......................................................................9-3
AB500/600 Electrical Schematic,
AB500/600-SCH-CE Sheet 2 Rev C ....................................9-4
AB500/600-SCH-CE Sheet 6A Rev C ..................................9-8
AB500/600-SCH-CE Sheet 6B Rev C ..................................9-9
AB500/600-SCH-CE Sheet 9 Rev C ..................................9-10
AB500/600-SCH-CE Sheet 10 Rev C ................................9-11
Decal, Main Machine Electrical Enclosure
Door 3-004523 Rev F.........................................................9-14
Page 9-1
BLANK PAGE
Page 9-2
WARNING: SOLENOID
PRINTER
MAY BE HOT! SEAL BAR HOME
VALVE MANIFOLD (OPTIONAL)
PRESSURE
SET MAIN AIR REGULATOR TO P1 = 80 PSI (0.55 MPa) SOLENOID DUMP COVER LABEL SENSOR 0V10 SEAL BAR
10V3
SET GREEN WINDOW IN GAUGE TO 75-85 PSI (0.52 - 0.59 MPa) VALVE NEAR FITTING:
0S9
VALVE
P1 0Z8-1 10Z1 1V1-2B
0Z6 0V7 5EA EXTEND
3V1/2 - STATION 3
4V1/2 - STATION 4
8V1/2 - STATION 8
PIPE LABEL P1 TUBE LABEL:
1V1 - STATION 1
2V1 - STATION 2
5V1 - STATION 5
6V1 - STATION 6
7V1 - STATION 7
9V1 - STATION 9
0Z4 NEAR FITTING: RESERVOIR 10A4 2 P1 11V1-1
TUBE LABEL:
0Z5
P1 0V7-2
0Z8 P 1 P1 11V1-2 1
PNEUMATIC 0V3 RESERVOIR
3EB
PRESSURE SUPPLY 5EA 4A 11V1
3E 2 1
SOURCE 0Z8-3 1P 2
P1 SEAL BAR
1P 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 3
P0 P1 2B CYLINDER
P0 P1 1P 3EB RETRACT
0Z1 4
FITTING
TUBE LABEL: 1
3E PRIMARY 1V4-1
P1 10V3-1P
REGULATED TUBE LABEL:
PRESSURE PRINTER VALVE 10V3-1P 0.6mm
P1 0V7-2 11V2
(OPTIONAL) IRIS
(NORMALLY PLUGGED)
TUBE LABEL: 10Z2
TUBE LABEL: 2
P1 0Z8-1 SEAL BAR INTERCEPT
0Z2 P1 0Z8-3
VALVE PILOT 1V2-82 4V2-2B HOME VALVE
FLOWLINES: n 4 X 0.7 P1
FLOWLINES (EXCEPT WHERE MARKED): 1/4 NPT SCH 40 BRASS (EXCEPT WHERE NOTED) TUBE LABEL:
HEAT BAR INTERCEPT
ALL TUBES IN THIS SECTION SHALL BE BLACK VALVE PILOT 2V2-82 P1 11V2-2
0V10
P1 3EB 5EA RESERVOIR 0V10
0V10 TUBE LABEL:
SUPPLY P1 P1 3EB 5EA STATION 7 TUBE LABEL:
P1 3EB 5EA P1 7A2-1
0Z8-3 (OPTIONAL) P1 7V1-4A
TUBE LABEL:
1Z3 1V2 7V1
TUBE LABEL: P1 1V2-2 SEAL FLATTENERS
TUBE LABEL:
TUBE LABEL: P1 1V2-1P 82 EXTEND (OPTIONAL)
P1 1A5-1
P1 1V1-4A EXTEND 7A2
STATION 4 1
3E
BLACK 2
STATION 1 2
EXTEND (CLAMP)
5EA 4A
4V1 TUBE LABEL:
1V1 1P 1P BLUE P1 7A2-2
BLACK 1A5 4V3
4Z5 2B RETRACT (UP)
1 3EB TUBE LABEL:
BLACK 5EA 4A BLACK BLACK BLUE P1 7A3-1
SEAL BAR SEAL BAR AIR GUIDE
SEAL BAR 1.6mm IRIS 1 2 1
BLUE
TUBE LABEL: 1
5EA 4A HOME CIRCUIT HOME CIRCUIT (1.0mm OPTION) 2
P1 7V1-2B
BLUE 2
1P 11V1-2 11V1-1 1P
2B 1 2
3EB BLUE 7A3
TUBE LABEL: RETRACT EXTEND
TUBE LABEL: 1V4 2B SEAL BAR HOME CIRCUIT 11V2-2
P1 1V1-2B P1 1A5-2
TUBE LABEL:
P 3EB P1 7A3-2
TUBE LABEL: BLUE
STATION 8
1S6 P1 4V2-2B
PRESSURE
4V2 8V1
SENSOR
4Z4
RESERVOIR TUBE LABEL:

5EA 4A BLACK 1
SUPPLY P1 2V2-2 TUBE LABEL: TUBE LABEL:
P1 P1 2A9-1 P1 5V1-4A
0Z8-3
EXTEND HEAT BAR TUBE LABEL:
TUBE LABEL: P1 5V5-1 TUBE LABEL: CYLINDER LABEL NEAR FITTING: TRIM NOZZLES
1P
P1 2V2-1P 1.0mm IRIS
1.0mm IRIS P1 5A4-2 P1 5A4-2 (OPTIONAL)
TUBE LABEL: BLACK EXTEND STATION 5 TUBE LABEL: 5V2
P1 2V1-4A 2Z3 2V2 1 2 1 2 (OPTIONAL) 5V5 P1 5V5-2 2B
2A9 RETRACT
1 2A6
BLACK
1 2
82 2V7 5V1 BLACK BLUE
STATION 2 TUBE LABEL:
2V4
1 2 1 2
3EB
2V1 P1 2A6-1 .040 IRIS 2 5A4
2 2 SUPPORT SHELF
EXTEND 1.0mm IRIS 1.0mm IRIS
3E
(OPTIONAL) 8V2
2 TUBE LABEL: 5EA 4A .040 IRIS 1
P1 2V2-2 1 2 1 2
1P
BLACK 1P
2V5 2B 1 2 1 2
2V8 3EB BLUE EXTEND
5EA 4A BLACK BLUE 5V6
TUBE LABEL: BLUE 5V3
1P
P1 5V6-2
2B CYLINDER LABEL NEAR FITTING:
3EB STATION 9
TUBE LABEL: P1 5A4-1
RETRACT TUBE LABEL: P1 5A4-1 9V1
5EA
P1 5V1-2B 1P
TUBE LABEL: 3EB

P1 5V6-1
STATION 3 TUBE LABEL: CYLINDER LABEL NEAR FITTING:
STATION 6 P3 6A6-2 P3 6A6-2
CHANGED SAFETY VALVES 1V2 AND 2V2 TO USE
(OPTIONAL) 6V2 TUBE LABEL: 6V4 EXTERNAL PILOT. ADDED PRESSURE SWITCH
3V1 G MDS 02-06-17 922 BEFORE 1V4. CORRECTED TUBE SIZES FOR
P3 6V2-2 RETRACT (OPEN) 2A6 AND 2A9.
3V3 6V1 BLACK CHANGED TRIM NOZZLES TO INDEPENDENT
3Z5 F MDS 11-10-16 823
P1 P3 VALVES, CORRECTED 7A2/3 EXTEND/RETRACT
REMOVED 2X LABELS AFTER 2V2, CORRECTED
5EA 4A BLACK BLACK 1 2 1 2 E MDS 09-27-16 768 CYLINDER FITTING CALLOUT IN HOME SECTION,
AIR PULSE / BLIP TUBE ADDED SUPPORT SHELF RESTRICTORS
1 2 1 D MDS 06-24-16 581C ADDED PNEUMATIC LABELS
ACCUMULATING 2 6A6 ADDED SAFETY VALVES 1V2 AND 2V2

C MDS 06-01-16 581A
5EA 4A BLACK CHANGED SEAL BAR ORIFICE (WAS 1.8mm)
1P FUNNEL B MDS 03-21-16 372
MODIFIED REGULATOR 1V2, CHANGED SEAL BAR
HOME VALVE FROM 8V1-4A TO 4VV2-2B
1P
2B (OPTIONAL) 1 A MDS 10-23-15 NEW SCHEMATIC
3EB BLUE
2B BLUE BLUE FINISH NONE REV BY DATE ECN DESCRIPTION
BLOWER / AIR KNIFE P1 P4 EXTEND
1 2 1 MATERIAL N/A
3EB 1 2 1 2
3Z6 MACHINE SURFACES TO BE NO GREATER THAN 125 [3,2]
R
3V4 BLUE
6V3 TUBE LABEL: 6V5
Under Review
P4 6V3-2 TOLERANCE INCHES mm
3V2 CYLINDER LABEL NEAR FITTING: 1 PLACE DIMS

2 PLACE DIMS
# .1
# .02
# 2,5
# 0,51 10175 PHILIPP PARKWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
TUBE LABEL: P4 6A6-1 3 PLACE DIMS
ANGULAR
# .005
# 1/2 $
# 0,10
SET REGULATORS TO P4 6A6-1

D
P3 = P4 = 0.31 MPa (45 PSI) AND IT SHALL NOT BE USED OR REPRODUCED OR ITS CONTENT
DISCLOSED, IN WHOLE OR PART, WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRITTEN N/A DATE: 10-23-15
SCHEMATIC, PNEUMATIC
G
THIRD ANGLE
to be RoHS Compliant INCH [MM] PROJECTION AB 500 AB2-500-PNE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3-007857
\CBL34282 _ ETHERNET CABLE
MAIN CONTROL BOARD (MCB) .----'\O"",==--~-► TO OPERATOR INTERFACE
MCB ETHERNET CONNECTION ORIENTATION
B1 TOUCH SCREEN, TABLET (REF SHT 34)
THE MCB IS LOCATED IN THE MAINE-BOX. THE MCB IS WHERE ALLTHE
I
PROCESSING OF THE SYSTEM SOFTWARE THAT CONTROLS AND MONITORS
2
3
ALL MACHINE FUNCTIONS TAKES PLACE. THE MOTOR CONTROL/DRIVE AND
VALVE MANIFOLD OUTPUTS ARE ALSO LOCATED ON THE MCB.
ETHERNET CABLE 3-004867
TO HEAT PC BOARD ◄:1---,>.r\~..,B..,L3.,.32'"'9:=.2 --,
(REF SHTS 5 & 33) D1
r~ PJ221
[hl][ti]
lBU®l
[ID]
LBlr®
Cl
D 3-004869 ETHERNET CABLE MCB J3 D

CBL221 1 ~, CUSTOMER OPTION MCB Jl MCB J2
4
~------+,--+--<,...._------,/
5 ENET II II
J:_ II II
1J, 0.f.
ro ro
R,0
6
J1 01 p J2
t Ja
01 -,
00
t
00
7 l_______J; gg 3-003479
I I oo CBL21021 _
8 J6 88P+--------~-
oo
TO EBCB-J6
00 (REF SHT 21)
DJ4 00
9 00
■o
,c_,
10 VYBRID
RS232 11------+----------------~
I 'a'6--
oo
JS 00
00 3-003480
11 LITHIUM ION 11----+-----, J10 00 CBL21022 _
12
BATTERY I 0 •·~
,Ii] J9
MCB
MAIN CONTROL BOARD J11
J■0
gg
J13 J12 88P+----------► TO EBCB-J12
00
00
- (REF SHT 21)
3-003391
TO DATAMAX PRINTER _ CBL37241 MCB - 4-001007.x.x.x
s~ -~c:.
00
ggo------,1
00
00
■ o. 3-003481
13 CONNECTION DIAGRAM ◄_t------,------------, ,-
00
,c_,
CBL21023 _
TO EBCB-J13
C TO HEAT PCB (REF SHT 6 & 37) J16 :. ■ O•
_, - (REF SHT 21) C
1-
14 3-003387
(REF SHTS 05 & 30) EBCB-J5
CBL14041 IITT
L . _ - - - - ~ J15 '----------1,gg ■0
•06"
00
15 (REF SHT 14) 00 J18 00 3-003483
a J11 ~I " 0 00
00 CBL22021 _
~ -
16 , .• J20 88P+---------► TO EBCB-J20
D55 ■0 00 (REF SHT 22)
ESTOP RELAY
- ~
00 00
00 00
17
+24VDC LOGIC 00 00 3-003482
POWER SUPPLY 0 0 0
~gggg J21
00
D56 ,a" CBL21024 _
TO EBCB-J18
18 REFLEX TRIM (REF SHT 10) 0 0 0 J19 •00,, - (REF SHT 21)
00
15VDC HEAT 00000
J22 3-003485
POWER SUPPLY - 3-005449 [EHL] DS7 ■ 0000 00
00
CBL22023 _
,~L-__
19 J23
J24 ggpt----------► TO EBCB-J24
600W
(REF SHT 10)
MCB ESTOP RELAY
TO EBCB-J36
_ CBL22141 ;;]
◄~1-----+<1'.~: J36
AUTOMATED PACKAGING SYSTEMS
FAB MAIN CONTROL
3-001815
- (REF SHT 22)
20 (REF SHT 22) 3-003484
CBL22022 ._
---------1~
21
PRINTER e-------,"
c_H---1.
- TO EBCB-J23
(REF SHT 22)
POWER SUPPLY - 48VDC MOTOR CROWBAR
0 ■
J26 J27 J28
22
(REF SHT 10) POWER SUPPLY
600W 2 MOTORS
BOARD
00
-~gg rgggg□ggg~, I ~000°0000 iI
6
.ggggggg~l
~ '
. J~9 . '~a
jggggggg~, J30 -~ggoigo~
23 (REF SHT 14) 00 0000000 ■
(REF SHTS 10 & 14) 00 I I • I I

'.----; D59 D510 D511 D512 ,■ o,
B 24 48VDC MOTOR J25 B

POWER SUPPLY
25 AC EMI FILTER 1000W/1500W 4 MOTORS
20 AMPS, 60 HZ (REF SHTS 10 & 14)
26 (REF SHT 10)
<LDIJERED>
27 ENCODER
3-005033
CBL20071
J31 ~~ J32 J33 ~~ J34
J35
28 100-250VAC SUPPLY ' ■ 0000·1 ~
1 00000 ~ ' ■ oooo' ~ ~ 1'■ 00001
~
~0000
00000
100000 00000
50/60 HZ, 1 PH. <RAISED>
29 15 AMPS MAX ENCODER
30
(REF SHT 10)
3-003542
CBL20071
SERVO
<L □ IJERED>
3-008031
(RAISED>
L <LDIJERED>
3-005032
<RAISED>
31 3-003407 3-003540 3-008029 3-003539 3-008030 3-003537 3-003486 3-003409 3-003538
CBL16071 CBL17071 CBL15071 CBL15221 CBL15072 CBL15222 CBL22024 CBL18071 CBL19071
~-~--~ UNWIND NIP ~-S-E-A~L_B_A_R~ , J
32 MAIN NIP DANCER MAIN NIP DANCER UNWIND SEAL BAR MTR
MOTOR POSITION MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
FEEDBACK FEEDBACK (OPTION) (OPTION) TO EBCB-J35 FEEDBACK (OPTION)
33 (REF SHT 16) (REF SHT 17 & 20) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 15) (REF SHT 22) (REF SHT 18) (REF SHT 19)
~~
A FUSE NO.
FHl
AMPS
SA
LED NO.
DSS
LED FUNCTION
FHl IS OK
FUSE FUNCTION
24VDC TO MAIN CONTROL BOARD
APS PART NUMBER
200507AS
A
36
FH2 2A DS6 FH2 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP VALVE PACK AND FOOT SWITCH OR PALM SWITCH 200507A2 TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37 FH3
FH4
2A
2A
DS7
DS8
FH3 IS BLOWN
FH4IS BLOWN
24VDC TO ESTOP CIRCUIT POWER 200507A2
PWMOUTPUTS-CURTAIN FANS AND PRINT HD SOL 200507A2
MOTOR 1 POWER - MAIN NIP
RI Automated
lliil\\tliil PACKAGING SYSTEMS
MAIN CONTROL BOARD
MCB
FHS lSA DS9 FHS IS BLOWN OR ESTOP 200507A15 DRAWN BY: DATE:
38 LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
FH6 lOA DSlO FH6 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP MOTOR 2 POWER - DANCER 200507A10 10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, DH 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 2 J
Vaulted
FH7 lOA DSll FH7 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP MOTOR 3 POWER- UNWIND 200507A10
39
FH8 lOA DS12 FH8 IS BLOWN OR ESTOP MOTOR 4 POWER - SEAL BAR 200507A10
AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ELECTRICAL BOX CONNECTOR BOARD (EBCB) 3-002003

2 THE EBCB RESIDES IN THE MAIN E-BOX, \,/HERE THE MAIN CONTROL BOARD <MCB), CONNECTS ALL I/0 TD IT,
THE EBCB IS RESPONSIBLE FDR I/0 DISTRIBUTION, LIMITED SIGNAL CONDITIONING, AND DISTRIBUTES +24VDC POw'ER
THROUGHOUT THE REMAINDER OF THE MACHINE,
3
4
D D
5
DATAMAX EMERGENCY
MAIN CONTROL CONNECT PLATE PRINTER STOP RELAY
6 3-003515 3-003490 PRINT HEAD
GPIO SAFETY RELAY
F □□T
Sw'. CBL37033 SOLENOIO
FOOT SWITCH 3-002820 (SEE NOTE 1 ) (REF SHT 37) (REF SHT 13)
7
OR PALM SWITCf CBL26361 3-003489 3-003902 (REF SHT 37)
#1 CBL26B121 CBL37031 CBL13211
8 (REF SHT 26B) PALM Sw', J26B031
3-004242 3-003389 SPARE
9 CBL26B031 SEE BOARD
PALM SWITCH CBL26B311 ➔) SCH. FOR
#2 DETAILS
10
(REF SHT 26B) 3-004243
I ,, I
0
PALM Sw',
11 J2~~311
3-003389
CBL26B321 JB Jll
- -
3-003480 SENSORS AND
12 VALVE STATION 3-003523
1-12 CBL26022
J7EB 3-005231
I ...... I CBL26021
,,
I r J14 0
"°7 ,__ -
(\J
7
CBL21022 INPUT SIGNALS
MCB-J18
(REF SHT 21)
13 J7EB P26021
I
14
(REF SHT 26A)
UFCB 3-003411
I I
3-003500
I
"
7
3-002003
~
-
0
7
- ~
CBL21021
MISCELLANEOUS
3-003479 INPUT SIGNALS
MCB-J6
C 15 INPUT SIGNALS CBL23042 I J1EB
...... I
,, CBL23041 - -
- - (REF SHT 21) C
- -"° -
UFCB-J1 3-003482 VALVE STATION
I I ~ 1-5
-
(REF SHT 23) CBL21024
16
- 7 CD FOOT/PALM SW.
~ n
7 0 7 MCB-J18
- (\J
17 UFCB 3-003533
+12V & +24VDC CBL24044 I J4EB
,, I
......
3-003497
CBL24043 +24VDC
MCB-J15 3-003387
~
7 3-003483 MISCELLANEOUS
CBL22021 OUTPUT SIGNAU
(REF SHT 21)
18 UFCB-J4
(REF SHT 24) I I CBL14041 If)
7 ..... 0 -
MCB-J20
(REF SHT 22) 3-003481 HIGH VOLTAGE
-
(REF SHT 14) - C") CBL21023 SENSOR
19
BJ
~
MCB-J13
20
TD UFCB 3-003501
PUTPUT SIGNAL~ CBL23043
UFCB-J2
I J~~B
,,
I -
er,
7
'<t
(\J -
7
~
(REF SHT 21)
(REF SHT 23) I I -

(\J 7 -
7
21
C")
3-003484 VALVE STATION
~
UFCB I/0 & 3-003413 3-003502
~
(\J CBL22022 6-12
22 J3EB C")
MCB-J23
E-STOP STRING CBL24042 ......
,, CBL24041 7
7
UFCB-J3 - If)
(REF SHT 22)
23 (REF SHT 24) C")
~
3-003485 E-STDP I/0

24 -
0 J36 J21 7
0 CBL22023 MCB-J24
(REF SHT 22)
25
B B
3-003486 CURTAIN FANS
26 E-STDP 3-005449 CBL22024 PRINT HEAD
STRING CBL22141 SOL. MCB-J35
27 MCB-P36 (REF SHT 22)
(REF SHT 22)
28
29 3-003488
3-003390 3-003394
30 ~01 - - - CBL30061 - - - - ----
CBL20262
J
AUX CONNECT PLATE ~EB J21EB J19EB
3-003517
31 (SEE NOTE 1) ~ ~ - - - ~~--- - - - ~ L
32 2-002140 3-005034 NOT ES1
<BY CUSTOMER) CBL20261 1. BULKHEAD CONNECTORS THROUGH
33 CONVEYOR SIGNALING DANCER ELECTRICAL BOX SIDE \,/ALL.
INTERFACE INTERFACE POSITION 2, ADDITIONAL FUSES NOT SHO\,/N
34 FEEDBACK ON REAR SIDE OF PCB.
(REF SHT 11) (REF SHT 30) (REF SHT 20)
35
A A
36
TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37
FUSE NO. AMPS LED NO. LED FUNCTION FUSE FUNCTION APS PART NUMBER RI Automated
lliil\\tliil PACKAGING SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL BOX CONNECTOR BOARD
EBCB
38 FHl 2A FUSE FHl IS BLOWN OR MISSING 24VDCTO EBCB AND UFCB BOARD 200507A2 DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, DH 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 Vaulted 2 3 4
39 NOTICE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND IT SHALL NOT BE 1--'-P'-"RO"'-DU'-"C-'-T-'-GR-'-'0-'-'UP-'-:----------1--"'-DR=AW=I=NG'--'N=U=MB=ER=:---t---=RE"-V'--:--1
¥/;~p~~c~~sOFco~iJiis::=N: :S?~N~~· WITHOUT AB500/ AB600 AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD (UFCB) 3-003198
NOTE• UFCB IS THE UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD,
3 THE UFCB IS LOCATED ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BAGGERJ ALL DEVICES FROM THE TOP OF THE MACHINE CONNECT TD THE UFCB,
THE UFCB THEN DISTRIBUTES THE I/D AND PD\./ER TD THE EBCB AND TD THE MAIN CONTROL BOARD <MCB),
4
D D
5 CYCLE EYE
SENSOR 3-003844
6 (REF SHT 27) CBL27332 ~ CBL27361
OR
7 FUNNEL OPEN BAG DETECT ANTI-JAM SEAL BAR OUT SUREFILL SEAL BAR OUT
& SENSOR REAR SENSOR & ANTI-JAM SENSORS PRESS.SENSOR
8 .,LOSED SENSORE NO. 1 SENSORS
(REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 27)
9 3-003894 3-003529 3-003672 3-003541 3-003804 3-003531
3-0052241
CBL28033 CBL28181 CBL28101 CBL28291 CBL28121 CBL28121 CBL27231
10 CBL28063 CBL28131 CBL28321 CBL28061
CBL28091 CBL28351
11 CLAMP SENSORS BAG DETECT COUNT PHOTO SEAL BAR OUT JOG FWD & REV 3-003534 LIGHT POLE
PHEUMATIC 3-003532 SENSORS SENSOR FRONT EYE & ANTI-JAM ROCKER CBL27031
12 PRESSURE CBL27031 NO. 2 SENSORS BUTTONS
(REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 27) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 28) (REF SHT 27)
TRANSDUCER
13 (REF SHT 27) 3-003403 3-003530 3-003806 3-003405
CBL28171 CBL28251 3-00~ CBL28211
CBL27132 CBL28032
CBL28201 CBL28062 CBL28241 3-003535 CURTAIN
14 HEAT BAR CBL27291 FANS
SENSORS
C 15 I I I
CBL27311
CBL27331 (REF SHT 27) C
~~o
,L,
(REF SHT 28) CBL27351
16 0 IJ30 I J29 I J28 J27 ( DJ~6 I ~ J24 MAIN CONTROL CONNECT PLATE
3-003515
-
3-003411 □
LIGHT CURTAIN 3-003913-T HIGH VOLTAGE 3-003404
I
~
17 BOARD CBL27101
TRANSMITTER CBL29081 .--t
3-003500 UPPER FRAME
(Y)
~
I/0 TO EBOX
~q
CBL23042 ...... CBL23041
18 (REF SHT 29) (REF SHT 27)
I -
7
3-003198 revD
0/ Jl I
I ,,, I CONNECTOR BD.
(REF SHT 23)
19 PNEUMATIC 3-003398 1
DUMP VALVE CBL27261
~~ J19 I J1s I J17 J16 I J15 I 3-003412 I I 3-003501 UPPER FRAME
20
21
(REF SHT 27)
I
-
0 0/ J2 ~q CBL23044 J~~B
,,
CBL23043 I/0 TO EBOX
CONNECTOR BD.
(REF SHT 23)
22
3-003547
MUTING LED CBL27231 I ~ I J12 II Jll JlO J9 11 J8 I I
~q
3-0034131
23 LIGHT CURTAIN 3-003913-R

RECEIVER CBL29211
(REF SHT 29)
i
.::!;
7 L J _J 0/ J3 CBL24042 I J~~B I
I ,, I
3-003502
CBL24041
UPPER FRAME
I/0 TO EBOX
CONNECTOR BD.
(REF SHT 24)
-
24
pl
(REF SHT 29)
QJ:] I I
B 25 QI J7 I J32 I 80 J5 \qo 3-0035331
CBL24044 J~~B
3-003497 UPPER FRAME
CBL24043 POWER TO EBOX
CONNECTOR BD. B
26
27 3-003546
\ LJ (REF SHT 24)
ESTOP GUARD
CBL12131
BULKHEAD FITTINGS THRU
SWITCHES ELECTRICAL BOX
CBL12132 3-004623
28 CBL12133 3-005230 3-005230 3-005496 SIDE \./ALL
(REF SHT 12) CBL27021 CBL27061 CBL13321 CBL34241
29 VALVE ANT -JAM VALVE ANT-JAM HEAT BOARD HMI CONNECTOR
SAFETY, (SEAL SAFETY, (HEAT INTERFACE BOARD, HMI PUSH
FRONT SAFETY 3-004912 BUTTONS
30 GUARD SWITCH CBL12134
(REF SHT 27) (REF SHT 13 & 33) (REF SHT 12 & 34)
(REF SHT 27)
3-001858
31 (REF SHT 12) JUMPER PLUG
32 {OPTIONAL} 3-005588
EXTERNAL CBL12271
33 E-STOP CABLE 3-001858
(REF SHT 12) 3-004624 HMI CONNECTOR
JUMPER PLUG CBL34301 BOARD, HMICB
34 POWER
(REF SHT 34)
35 RIGHT REAR 3-003527
DANCER THREAD
A E-STOP BUTTON~
CBL12331
3-001858
A
36 (REF SHT 12 & 27) JUMPER PLUG TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD
37
LEFT REAR 3-003528 ~Autonmted
PACKAGING SYSTEMS
UFCB
38 DANCER THREAD CBL12333 DRAWN BY: I DATE: I LIFECYCLE STATE: IPREV SHT:I SHEET: NEXT SHT:
E-STOP BUTTONS 3-001858 10175 PHILIPP PARKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, DH 44241 J.BIRD I7/18/2017 I Vaulted I 3 I 4 5
(REF SHT 12 & 27) JUMPER PLUG
39 N011CE: THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION AND IT SHALL NEITHER PRODUCT GROUP: I DRAWING NUMBER: REV:
ABS00/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
3
4 HMI CONNECTOR BOARD (HMICB) 3-004312 CROWBAR BOARD 3-001999 HEAT WIRE CONTROL BOARD 3-005590
D NOTE• HMICB IS THE HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE CONNECTOR BOARD,
THE HMICB IS THE CONNECTION POINT FDR ALL I/D AND PDIJER DISTRIBUTION THE CRDIJBAR BOARD IS LOCATED IJITHIN THE MAIN E-B □ X, THE HEAT IJIRE CONTROL BOARD IS LOCATED ON THE
D
5
BETIJEEN THE HM! AND THE UPPER FRAME CONNECTOR BOARD (UFCB), IJHILE IT CONTROLS THE +48V MOTOR VOLTAGE, IJHEN THE UNDERSIDE OF THE BAGGER, IT CONTROLS THE TEMERATURE
ALSO PROVIDING ETHERNET CONNECTION BETIJEEN THE TABLET AND THE MAIN 3-PHASE DC BRUSHLESS ABRUPTLY HALT, AN UNIJANTED OF THE HEA TIJIRE LDCA TED ON THE SEALBAR, THE HIJCB
6 E-BDX, THIS MAKES THE HM! MORE MODULAR AND GREATLY SIMPLIFIES 'BACK-EMF' VOLTAGE IS FED BACK TD THE MOTOR PDIJER RECEIVES ETHERNET COMMANDS FROM THE MCB, MAIN
INST ALLA TIDN, SUPPLY, IJHEN THAT VOLTAGE EXCEEDS +48VDC PLUS 5V, CONTROL BOARD, TD SET THE HEATIJIRE TEMPERATURE, THE
7 THE 'CB' ENABLES A CAPACITIVE AND RESISTIVE LOAD, HIJCB PULSES CURRENT THROUGH DNBDARD TRANSISTORS TD
PULSING THE LOAD EVERY l00MSEC REDUCING THE MOTOR THE HEA TIJIRE,
8 VOLTAGE LEVEL TD THE NOMINAL +48V,
9
ETHERNET
10 TO MAIN
LAN CONNECTIONS TO
(BOT) TABLET SERVO MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD J1 E-STOP INTERFACE & 3-005494 13.5-24VDC
11 ITO E-STOP HM! PUSH BUTTONI (REF SHT 2 & 33) LOGIC POWER INPUT
(REF SHEET 12-28,34-19) (REF SHEET 34-07,17) +48VDC CBL33O31 POWER INPUT FROM
(REF SHEET 10-10 & 14-26) 3-005596 FROM MCB/UFCB POWER SUPPLY
12 3-004614 (REF SHTS 13 & 33)
BOT 3-004621 CBL33291 (REF SHTS 10 & 33)
CBL12251 CBL34141
13
14 TO GND CONNECTION
TO RESET PUSH BUTTON I
IUSB CONNECTION TOI
TABLET
(REF SHEET 34-07)
3-003694
CBL14251
t I 3-005496
CBL13321 D
•
ON HMI FACEPLATE 3-006787
C 15 (REF SHEET 34-18) (REF SHEET 34-19) C
CBL34O61 J503
3-0046221 3-004615
16 CBL34191 ~ -
I I
17
• IMVT~11 r , r7 4 •rlJ J612 J608
Lo
u oJ I . ·•I~•
:::J ....
CROWBAR BOARD I FH1 I
18 J606
3
:.·1
1
1· :. ·1
' I
s
~
I. I • • -, 3-001999
....
4
19 J602 HM! CONNECTOR BOARD 0 ••••
20
J607
I I,
()
••••
•••• (HMICB) 1
()
•••• C
0 3-004312 HEAT WIRE CONTROL BOARD
1
0 •••• •··. I
~
•••• 0
- -
21 (HWCB)
·, • ••• C 8
••••••••
J605 1
..
J603
.
• •07 3-005590
.• 5
22 J609
23
• ,o 1} ••••••• II
'tt'
, ,
II J611
HMI-BUTTONS
J■1
....
L_J
HMI r
■l
-~604~ •
24 I I
I I
j I 3-004616
25 CBL34112
B 13-004623
TO CYCLE START/STOP
B
USB CONNECTION TO CBL34241
26 PUSH BUTTON HMI IJs10I
EXTERIOR OF HMI IE-STOP I/0 TO UFCB-J5 I FRONT PANEL J506
(REF SHEET 12-33, 34-24)
•
ENCLOSURE J504 J505
•~nki
27 (REF SHEET 34-19) 3-004617
BOT 3-004866 CBL34211
28 3-004624
CBL34281 CBL343O1 POWER CONNECTIONS TO
29 ANDROID TABLET
LAN CONNECTIONS TO
MAIN EBOX, MCB-J1
I +24V HMI FROM UFCB-J61 (REF SHEET 34-15) 3-003393 3-005497
3-005495
D
3-005495
(REF SHEET 34-29) CBL14261 CBL33241
30 (REF SHEET 2, 34-23) CBL33O32 CBL33O32
SERVO MOTORS POWER THERMOCOUPLE
31 CONNECTION +48VDC "AMBIENT" HEAT WIRE POWER OUTPUT TO
(REF SHEET 14-25) (REF SHT 33) VOLTAGE FEEDBACK HEAT WIRE
32 (REF SHT 33) (REF SHT 33)
33
34
35
A A
36
TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37 HMICB, CROWBAR BOARD
& HEAT CONTROL BOARD
38 DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
10175 PHILIPP PARKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 18 201 Vaulted 4 5 6A
39
AB5OO/6OO-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 TO PRINT HEAD
RIBBON SENSOR
4 (REF SHT 36)
D 3-003887
TO THERMAL
PRINTHEAD J2
D
5 CBL36291
0 0 0 (REF SHT 36)
6 3-007561
0 0
<t:
0 CBL36022
0
~
0
3-003489
7 PRINTER GP I/0 . ....I
rn
0
8
TO EBCB J14
(REF SHT 37)
CBL37031
--
0
1-1
c..
UJ
....I
....I
<t:
J 12 0 3-007318
(!)
a:
<t:
0 c..
9 0
DJ11 J5
J2
10 ---------++---------! J1
[Il 0 RIBBON CABLE TO 3 -003888 □ J10 3-004290
PRINTER DISPLAY 1--C_B_L_3_6_3 7_ l--+----+t 0 0 0 CBL36021
11
12
--
0
1-1
c..
(REF SHT 36) J4 0
(!)
0
ul ~ 3-003883
PRINT HEAD DRIVER BOARD,
(PRIMARY SIDE VIEW,
m~
13 TO PRINTER POWER CBL35321 INTERNAL TO PRINTER EBOX)
14 iul
(.)
SUPPLY BD - J3
(REF SHT 35)
JS
C 15
0 0 TO PRINTER POWER 3-003884 C
3-003391 ....I SUPPLY BD - J5 CBL35231 J7
16 PRINTER GP I/0 (.)
<t:
TO MAIN PCB J 16 CBL37241 :;;; 1-1 (REF SHT 35) 0
0 a:
(REF SHT 37) (.) UJ
17 Cl)
0 0
0 0
18
19 BACKPLANE BOARD BACKPLANE BOARD

(FRONT VIEW, VISIBLE/ACCESSIBLE (REAR VIEW, INSIDE
20
FROM REAR OF PRINTER EBOX, EBOX PRINTER EBOX)
21 PRINTER CARD COVER REMOVED)
22
23
24
25
B B
26
0 0
>=c5
27 J5 3-003884
CBL35231 TO PRINTER
BACKPLANE PCB J7 3-008025
28 (REF SHT 35) 0 0
29 J2 3-008032 3-007562 TO THERMAL

CBL35050
-----------+1Jl J 2t+-_C_BL_3_5_05_1----I PRINT HEAD
30 (REF SHT 35)
J3 3-003883
CBL35321 TO PRINTER 0 0
31 2-002075 BACKPLANE PCB JB
115VAC PRINTER CBL10201
POWER (REF SHT 35)
32 3-007560-R PRINT HEAD POWER
(REF SHT 10) 3-007560-L FILTER BOARD,
CBL35151 TO PRINT HEAD
STEPPER MOTOR (PRIMARY SIDE VIEW,
33 INTERNAL TO PRINTER EBOX)
0 (REF SHT 35)
34
35 POWER SUPPLY BOARD

A (SIDE VIEW, INTERNAL TO A
36
PRINTER EBOX) TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37 DATAMAX H-CLASS PRINTER
10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 Vaulted s 6A se
39
AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 TO PRINT HEAD
RIBBON SENSOR
4 (REF SHT 36)
D 3-003887 TO THERMAL
PRINTHEAD J2
D
5 CBL36291
0 0 0 (REF SHT 36)
6 3-007561
0 0
<t:
0
0 CBL36022
~
0
3-003489
7 PRINTER GP I/0 . ....I
rn
0
8
TO EBCB J14
(REF SHT 37)
CBL37031
--
0
1-1
c..
UJ
....I
....I
<t:
J 12 0 3-007318
a:
9
(!)
0
<t:
c.. NOTE:OPTIONAL CABLE ASSY AND HOUSING
FOR REMOTE PRINTER DISPLAY
DJ11 J5 0
J2
10 ,------------7 ttt----+------++---------1J1
[Il 0 I
I
TO REMOTE
PRINTER DISPLAY
3-006270
CBL 36 B371
I DJ 10 0 0 0
3-004290
CBL36021
11
12
--
0
1-1
c.. L__ ~R::~3:~ _ _ _ _ JD J9

J4 0
(!)
0
ul ~ 3-003883 PRINT HEAD DRIVER BOARD,
m~
13 TO PRINTER POWER (PRIMARY SIDE VIEW,
CBL35321
14 iul
(.)
SUPPLY BD - J3
(REF SHT 35)
JS INTERNAL TO PRINTER EBOX)
C 15
0 0 TO PRINTER POWER 3-003884 C
3-003391 ....I SUPPLY BD - J5 CBL35231
PRINTER GP I/0 (.)
<t:
J7
16 CBL37241 (REF SHT 35) 0
TO MAIN PCB J 16 :;;; 1-1
a:
(REF SHT 37) 0 UJ
(.)
17 Cl)
0 0
0 0
18
19 BACKPLANE BOARD BACKPLANE BOARD

20
(FRONT VIEW, VISIBLE/ACCESSIBLE (REAR VIEW, INSIDE
FROM REAR OF PRINTER EBOX, EBOX PRINTER EBOX)
21 PRINTER CARD COVER REMOVED)
22
23
24
25
B B
26
0 0
>=c5
27 J5 3-003884
CBL35231 TO PRINTER
BACKPLANE PCB J7 3-008025
28 (REF SHT 35) 0 0
29 J2 3-008032 3-007562 TO THERMAL

CBL35050 CBL35051
Jl J2 PRINT HEAD
30 (REF SHT 35)
J3 3-003883
CBL35321 TO PRINTER 0
31 2-002075 BACKPLANE PCB JB 0
115VAC PRINTER CBL10201
POWER (REF SHT 35)
32 (REF SHT 10) 3-007560-R PRINT HEAD POWER
3-007560-L TO PRINT HEAD FILTER BOARD,
CBL35151 (PRIMARY SIDE VIEW,
33 STEPPER MOTOR
0 (REF SHT 35) INTERNAL TO PRINTER EBOX)
34
35 POWER SUPPLY BOARD

A (SIDE VIEW, INTERNAL TO A
36
PRINTER EBOX) TITLE: CONNECTION DIAGRAM
37 DATAMAX H-CLASS PRINTER
WITH OPTIONAL REMOTE PRINTER DISPLAY ASSY
10175 PHILIPP P/\RKIJAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 18 2017 Vaulted 6A 6B 7
39
AB500/600-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
'' -+
11 11 LL_UI< , _ L I __ U J _ , f-1 If H-'f- f:, II

-FJW =711~- II, I I.I II 'Ill :ir::JU ] IU: 11
II I- I f" ,,If
3-Jr:r3S:::
I ll', ll I'::
~1 - If ' -1_ 11 i -II Ii'
II l.i:illL I 'I I] I =--, C DL - J

-u~. IJL, [1[ ~ I
~ l k l 1111 I llf - :11 ,11

If- I kl 111 I •- Ill -', -I I, 1H'. I 11->-, l:i
-00'.J
11
1;:
11 I - 1- F= - F
1-
I~ ,II T 111,--
f-' f
r
J- __le =,I -+---- U III I =np
I -[HJI-~ I PFEF FFn -

1~= □- 1- B_':' I[ 2
_1 _I~ -
;:1
f-•=" _f- b,f' tt::' _f- JL JI'
◄
JI,·, -
1111
I ,l L Jr__ U_UI _ J'_J ll _l~_c _ JIJ _1 J!L'.
,I I I- ,I f .I I f-f I 'I l'I ' , 11 ( I I

-'l," _)n i=-
HJ --ll lJ IJI l IJJ - JI I_-= 1_ ,,L= J- JUJti:=
,·f,·, ljj, 'I
FF
- c,[ I- I I I
F- _Jl 11 □-□ F =J U :UFL 3:'[C-J[ I.' 1'11 - I[ ,D T ,I I= - . 1 j,
=nl -~L GF □ l_ ID
11 11111 I' I :Iii II ,
TITLE: II IF .T, ,,1_,-,F·-
E! Automated
- PACKAGING SYSTEMS DRAWN BY:
f-'-',_,[f(_
DATE:
H 11 I
LIFECYCLE STATE:
f-(_I
PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:

Ill ''I; I I 11 --1-c'-I- Hi-[ - IC I 1[ ,-, 9
llul -- L_ PRODUCT GROUP: DRAWING NUMBER: REV:
'-< II ,1 I• ''-, I - i'f- r'I,
T [ •, I -T[I I ,: ,- ': [I IT ,: - -I_IT'.: 1.1~ T[[: - _,: -_,-
1 C:T[ ,r:. I J·-=- AB500/600-SCH-CE C
-+ L
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
01
3-003503-001 ~ 3-003503-002 PCB10021
A.C. MOY BOARD 3-003503-015
LINE CORD
PSRC10021 LF10021 MAINS FUSE LF10022 3 003503 014 BRN l2A\IG 8
L < EL ti
CBL10021
I BLK(BRN)
~--=...;..;;..~-~. FU10021 ___ ..;;;;;.."'-'-'=---~ -BRN_12AIIG 3 - 001215 LOUT 1 ;>------10023
TB1
p~ t:~~~~~~
02
p 10021~~~~~\IG O O L-IN LOUT 2 ~•NC
03 I o PE
. 21014AI4121014A10 10032~
BLU_12A\IG N LINE
~100364 N-1N
L.0AD N'
N ouT 1 HolfgiG 6
~ 3-004183-010 TB 1
N< I WHT BLU 3-004183-001 N OUT 2 1/■NC
04 •NC~
N I N PE L.:©:.__ _..l,lLlllll[:.i,__ __ _ . EARTH
D 3-003505-001 EMI LINE FILTER 6 D
05 I 3-003505-002 27355A1 GRN-YEL_l2A\IG T8 1 N
3 003505 015 f.I\
06 EARTH < E
I GRN GRN GRN-YEL_12A\IG
EGND_LB>-U-SBA-R~=~~-uE""G_N_D__B_U_S_BAR
- - ~N-YEL 12A\IG I
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---c~JE-G_N_D_-B_U_S_BA_R_ ____,,u----+----+---~3=-0~0=35~0=5-=00=3----.I------+~ V INTERNALLY F'USED AT 16A L AND N. v- 10015
TB 1
1 ~to 33-05
\/HT_IOA\IG
HEAT POWER OVDC
LINE PLUG
07 CUSTOMER'S PJ10021
I \IHT_IOAIIG
PD'v/ER I
08 RECEPTACLE WARNING• POIJER IS ALIJAYS LIVE TD • NOTE• PLACE 22140A1 ON
I
LINE FILTER, CONTACTORS, AND POIJER NC TERMINALS OF ASSY 3-007215 I
SERVO MOTOR FUSE ~ L UID
09 SIJITCH, UNPLUG AND USE CAUTION 8 BRN_l2A\IG I BRN_l2A\IG FU10101 -
A\IG
IJHEN SERVICING, c >-----10023-----:;-I l-:;--10101 L v+ 10103-c::]-10102 to 14-26

10 TB 1 3-003503-006 3 4 3-003503-001 1%,i~1 FUSED +48VDC
MOTOR POWER SUPPLY BW_I0 A\IG
11 3-003506-002
6 2~~1 ~3
N PS10101
12 TB1
GRN-YEL..12A\IG
I >-------+----+----~ -------+ft!@
3-003505-004 INTERNALLY F'USED AT 16A L AND N. v- • to 14-28
13 EGND_BUSBAR
6 8 '--------------------' GND
\/HT_IOA\IG
14 TB1 TB1 3-003506-004
3-004183-005
3-003503-008
C 15 C
16 1 4
17
DIN RAIL ASSEMBLY
(SH □ ~N FDR REFERENCE ONLY)
SS10161
POWER SWITCH, 20A
1y;--
I
- -~ 5
SWITCHED POIJER BELOW THIS RUNG,
3-003503-009
SR13171 2-001868 ;::: 7

18 PRINIER POWER SUPPLY EXTERNALLY ACCESSABLE
3-004183-006 0 TB1 IEC POWER CABLE POIJER SIJITCH
PRINlER POWER SUPPLY CBL 10201 PJ10202
19
5 7 FU10201 PJ10201 ~---+-------------~
0 10172----c:::J--10207: 18
1 (cc1, - - - - f - '=LK~. L
20 TB1 TB1
3-~~;~~10 ~o~~ I 'I
21
3-003503-011 I I Jl ffl1SUPPLY
PRINTER 2
5 I 1/WHT
PS10201
2 (2 7 N
22 TB1
REF. PRINIER CONNECTIONS SHT. 32
7 E
EGND_BUSBAR 3-003505-005
23 29113A1 2-002075
24
24VDC POWER SUPPLY 3-004184-001
25 7 FU 10251 BRNJ2A\IG
JUMPERS (2-002474)
B TBl-1 TD TBl-2
l>----10172-----r::::1----10251
TB 1 BRNJ2A\IG 5A SLOW 3-003503-013
L B
26 TBl-2 TD TBl-3 3-003503-012 27014A8 V+
BAGGER POWER SUPPLY
27 5 24~o6r' 3-004185-001
N PS10251
TB1 IIHT_18A\IG
28
l>-EG_N_D___
BU_S_BA_R-------------------.,,......,.,..,..,,.,.,,.....,..,...,..-
.__ ________________
@ v- __. I-{
3
>-----'-to
TB1
10051
OVDC
14-06
29
3-003505-007
GRN-YEL..12A\IG
30
31
32
33
34
35
A A
36
TITLE:
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
37 115VAC POWER AND EARTHING
10175 PHILIPP PARK\IAY - STREETSB□R□, □H 44241 J.BIRD 7/18/2017 Vaulted 9 10 11
39
ABSOO/6OO-SCH-CE C
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
01
02 (SEE CONVEYOR DRIVE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS)

J11041
IEC RECEPTAClf LF11041 HORlt~Tu\iNVEYOR
03 LINE CORD, 3/18 AWG 200525A1 SINGlf CONVEYOR BAGGER E-STOP LINE ALTER DRV11041
CBL11041 2-001869 DUAL CONVEYOR 200698A1 29510A1 CONVEYOR MOTOR
PSRC11041 29496A1(29497A1
BRN (BLK) L L CONV TB CR11181 FIJ 1041 LINE LOAD POWER CABlf PJ11046
04 11045CBL1104¥RED
L<+--+----'-----'---<.~-=----------=-----<J1<-==,---,--,=:--11041-{ l-"'------.....-1 I JlRN J4AWG 1 1 0 4 2 ~ 1 1 0 4 3 ~ E + - P - - - - - - - - ~ P , - e ~ ) - - - - · ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR POWER
D ~ I D
BRN_14AWG -1 ff
05 I\., BLU (WHT) N N CONV TB CR 11181
11054CBL1104¥WHT TO CONVEYOR MOTOR POWER
N' ~
100;11 VAC N<+--+---'----'---<.~-'-'----------....:..:....--<11<-:::-:BL-:-:U_-1
:-:4A:-::W:::G:--1105 _2 ,~a~--11052 )
(! N
I
,-,I
BLU_14AWG
50GLE60 HZ. 11-35
06 SIN PHASE EARTH<+--PG...,RN""'-"......,=U-<€-E_ _ _ _ _ _ ____:E=---<tE--------, 11061 CBL1104)tBLK ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR POWER
PE
07 11071 CBL11042tGRNC!'.EL ) TO CONVEYOR MomR POWER
7
EGND_BUSBAR EGND_BUSBAR EGND_BUSBAR
08
GRN-YEL 14AWG
09
d 1
~1092
ORIENTAL MOTOR
SIGNAL CABlf
11093CBL1109YYEL ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
10
11
L_
---7 CONVEYOR BOX WALL
1~I'" sccw
X2
SSTOP MODE
11101CBL1109YBRN
11111 CBL1109}1RED
)
)
TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
TO CONVEYOR MOroR FEEDBACK

0,
0 X3
12 11121 CBL1109YORG TO CONVEYOR MOroR FEEDBACK
13
CONVEYOR DRIVE PROGRAMMING:
I SNC
X4
11131CBL1109YGRN
)
TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK

1. SWITCHING DIRECTION SALM RESET )
XS
14 A. Press "MODE" until "F/R" LED is illuminated.
B. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to toggle direction.
I RED_22AWG
Cl
IN-COMO
G
11141CBL1109YDRAIN ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
C 15 C. "For" is displayed for forward, "rEv" is displayed for reverse. C

16
D. Press "SIT" to conform selection. Display will blink. I
2. REMOTE OPERATION
17 A. Press "MODE" until "LO/RE" LED is illuminated. I
18
B. Press UP or DOWN arrow keys to toggle input signal setting.
C. "rE" is displayed for external input signals.
D. Press "SIT" to conform selection. Display will blink. I I
OPTIONAL SECOND CONVEYOR
BAGGER E-STOP
200698A1
LF11221
LINE ALTER
29510A1
(SEE CONVEYOR DRIVE PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS)
7
19
CR11201 2949 97Al6Alafi,
LINE LOAD
CONVEYOR MOTOR
POWER CABlf
PJ11223 I
20
I I BRN l4AWG rg--11221~11222~E+-P--------~p•-e~)----· 11224 CBL1122YRED
) TO CONVEYOR MomR POWER
21
22 I I
- CR11201
BLU_14AWG 11 _r 11231 BLU_14AWG ~ N N' ~
11233 CBL1122YWHT
11241CBL1122ysLK
)
)
TO CONVEYOR MOroR POWER
TO CONVEYOR MomR POWER

I
PE
I
23
I I EGND_BUSBAR EGND_BUSBAR
11251 CBL1122yGRNC!'.EL ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR POWER
24
25
IL __ GRN-YEL 14AWG
CR11161
□ ~11273
ORIENTAL MOTOR
SIGNAL CABlf
11271CBL1127}1YEL ) TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK
I
I
B
26 L, 7 1--~fruN sccw
X2
11281 CBL1127YBRN ) TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK
B
27
I N
..... SSTOP MODE
X3
11291CBL1127YRED > TO CONVEYOR MomR FEEDBACK I
AUX CONNECT PLATE N
28 (MAIN E-BOX)
3-003517 ~NC
11301 CBL1 myoRG ) TO CONVEYOR MOroR FEEDBACK I
29
I ~ALM RESET 11311 CBL1127YGRN ) TO CONVEYOR MOTOR FEEDBACK
EBCB-J17 EBCB-P17
30
+24VDC MANAGED
1>
~R_E....cD_2=---2A_W_G_ _~IN-COMO 11321 CBL1 my DRAIN ) TO CONVEYOR MOroR FEEDBACK I
{EBCB F41) I Cl G
31 CONVEYOR RUN
32
CONVEYOR START/STOP 2 >
GND 3 >
29313A1
~g11-09 L _ _ _ _ _J
33 4) >4 ~~~?R RUN I
34 ~g11-27 _J
CONV
35 BAGGER E-STOP
~--<--+---+----<E-----<Q)T_B=--_ _
BLU_22AWG
A (
1 1 -5 13202:----..---,-1+-; 200698A1 NOTE: EXIT CONVEYORS ARE OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT. YOUR MACHINE MAY NOT BE EQUIPPED WITH CONVEYORS. A
36 CONVEYOR 24VDC CONTROL ~g11-04,11-05 TITLE: ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
CBL11121
I
37 3-004159
CABlf, ABBOO E-BOX TO CONVEYOR E-BOX BAGGER [-STOP I hlAutomated EXIT CONVEYOR DRIVES
ONE OR lWO EXIT CONVEYOR(S) OPTION
200698A1 lliiilt/iil FW:KAGING SYSTEMS
38 I N011-22,11-23
NC
I 10175 PHI UPP PNI.KWAY - STREETSBORO, OH 44241
DRAWN BY:
J.BIRD
DATE:
18 201
LIFECYCLE STATE:
Vaulted
PREV SHT:
10
SHEET:
11
NEXT SHT:
12
39 -- --
OPTIONAL SECOND CONVEYOR
I AB500/600-SCH-CE A
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-+
~1~1, L_I l , _JIL_l I,
. E
I' I' I I
;-,11
.JJl
fl L· 1, L.
1''111
11r -, rnllT +
II 0 11 I '.rh,- r Iii,
C
11
I c- l''.
L ~ ," I _ I _ I ' 11 I _ I...: , ~ _ ~JI 11 U~ I 1J I I c0
':'II' '',I'-' II II , 11 l:!L_: L
I I I r)I' ' I )\I, l, I I, nl I
UL _ 11- T] ==
nIL= == c:• Jr-,-=== I i::uc: -JI i=-( =
Iii
f---( __ : (::J::J:: ~ ,: '. I

F,I 'C 11
1 _I
UI; I.I,,',_ ol IL ,LJ,J
cl :
1:1,
1 _,
.JJl IT[ [ILI_I=-~~-" -
~I
( INSIDE) (OUTSIDE) ◄
D815 CONNECTION
THRU EBOX SIDEWALL
PIN EBCB
NUMBER SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL TYPE FUSE
3 PRINTER BUSY F22
5 SIGNALING SPARE INPUT 1 F33
8 SIGNALING SPARE INPUT 2 INPUT F20
9 FEEDER OK/CYCLE BAGGER F21
14 INHIBIT CYCLE F23
2 2 BAGGER OK/READY TO LOAD Q90/Q91, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
4 PRINTER OK TO PRINT Q16/Ql7, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
6 SIGNALING SPARE OUTPUT 1 Q92/Q93, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
7 +24VDC
OUTPUT Q23, 0.26A CURRENT LIMIT
13 +24VDC
10 BAGGER STOP/ERROR Q68/Q69, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
11 BAGGER HOLD Q70/Q71, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
12 AUTO MODE STATE Q6/Q7, 21mA CURRENT LIMIT
1 GND GND
15 GND GND
TITLE: F-T:.1, - .-ff I T'
E! Automated
=-1
NOTE: SINK OR SOURCE MAX 21MA OUTPUTS ONLY* J, 'I -1 I 11 I/
11 IE~T 1~
*24VDC CURRENT LIMIT= 260MA MAX. - PACKAGING SYSTEMS DRAWN BY: DATE: LIFECYCLE STATE: PREV SHT: SHEET: NEXT SHT:
11'1 1'11 'I' I II IE!: [ - I:: ~' - I 11-' ;, J 30
THI'.:, EW C'.:- T'II< l'Fc-::01:y::-, =-~:;,l.l'Tlul PRODUCT GROUP: DRAWING NUMBER: REV:
~=- F=T'F~-11 =-r; ~::-, 1-: ,~,~
IL H' I 1u,, ,_,1_,U AB500/600-SCH-CE C
-+
GLOSSARY
A
Accumulating Funnel. Optional bagger accessory which holds
product during the bagger cycle and opens into the bag.
Adjustment. To fit or make exact.
Air Pressure. Pressure of atmospheric or compressed air.
AIR PULSE. Displays the amount of time (in seconds) the air pulse is
activated to open each bag for loading.
Amp. Amperes.
AUTO. Automatic mode.
AutoTouch Control Screen. Main interface between the user and the
bagger unit.
Aux. Auxiliary.
AUXILIARY OPTION. Optional equipment installed on the unit.
B
Bag. Receptacle to hold product.
Bag Deflator. Removes air before bag is sealed.
Bar. Metric Unit of pressure.
baud. Rate of communication speed.
Belt. Item that transmits power by friction contact between teeth.
Bolt. Item used to fasten or secure an assembly.
BPM. Bags Per Minute.
-1
C
C. Centigrade.
CW. Clockwise.
CCW. Counter Clockwise.
Caster. Wheel free to swivel about an axis.
CFM. Cubic Feet per Minute.
cm. Centimeters.
cmm. Cubic Centimeters per Minute.
CMS. Cubic Meters per Second.
Cycle. Revolution of a certain period of time, which re–occurs in the
same order
D
Dancer. Apparatus used to keep bags under consistent tension.
dB. Decibels.
Display. Digital screen that shows operating and set–up functions.
Drive Motor Belt. Belt by which machinery is driven by a motor.
E
E–Box. Electrical box.
Earth Ground. Protective device that grounds the unit to zero
potential.
EBCB. E-BOX Connector Board
ESD. Electrostatic Discharge
ESDS. Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive
F
F. Fahrenheit. Temperature in degrees. The sum of 32 plus 9/5 the
temperature in degrees Celsius.
FAB. Flagship Auto Bagger
Fuse. Expandable device for opening an electric circuit when the
current inside becomes excessive.
FRL. Filter Regulator Lubricator.
Glossary-2
H
H. Height. Perpendicular distance between horizontal lines or planes
passing through the top and bottom of an object.
Hz. Hertz.
Heat Range. Temperature of sealer bar to seal bags.
HMI. Human Machine Interface.
HWCB. Heat Wire Control Board
I
I/O. Input and output.
Imprinter. Printing unit that imprints from a printer ribbon onto a bag.
in. Inches.
K
kg. Kilograms.
L
L. Length or liters.
LED. Light Emitting Diode. Emits light when an electric current is
applied.
lb. Pound.
LOTO. Lockout/Tagout
M
MAC. Media Access Control
MCB. Main Control Board.
Micron. One millionth of a meter.
Mil. A unit of measurement equaling a thousandth of an inch
mm. Millimeter.
N
Nip Roll. Rollers used to hold bags in place.
N–m. Newton meter.
-3
O
OD. Outside diameter.
Ohms. Unit of electrical resistance.
P
P/N. Part number.
PACE RATE. Used to set the number of bags to be sealed per
minute.
PCB. Printed Circuit Board.
PID. Proportional Integral Derivative loop also known as a feedback
loop.
Polyethylene. A polymerized ethylene resin used to produce bags.
Power Cycle. Turning the power OFF then back ON to reset the
machine.
Power Supply. Connects the main power source to the system.
Power Switch. Turns system On/Off.
Powered Unwind. Apparatus used to keep bags under consistent
pressure.
psi. Pounds per square inch.
Pulse. A single burst of air.
R
RECALL. Used to store and recall information.
RESET. Used to display the type of Hold or RESET condition.
Rubber Drive Roll. Rollers used to move bags.
S
Scotch-Brite™. Trademark for abrasive products produced by 3M.
Seal Flatteners. Holds bag flush for sealing.
SEC. Seconds.
SEAL POINT. Used to set the distance between the opening of the
bag and the bag seal.
SEAL TIME. Used to set the amount of time the pressure bar
presses against sealer bar to seal the bag.
Sensor. A device that senses value or change.
Serial Port. Type of communication type used to connect computer
to machine.
Glossary-4
T
Teflon™. Trademark for polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), used as a
coating to prevent sticking.
Threading Diagram. Diagram indicating how the bag web should be
threaded through the unit and attached auxiliary equipment.
Trim Seal. Removes trim to make seal flush with top of bag.
U
UFCB. Upper Frame Control Board
V
V. Volts.
VAC. Volts Alternating Current.
VDC. Volts Direct Current.
VL Shelf. Equipment temporarily supports heavily loaded bags.
W
W. Width.
Web. Sheets of bags
-5
BLANK PAGE
Glossary-6

Autobag 500 and 550 User Manual ENGLISH

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autobag 500 and 550 User Manual ENGLISH

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autobag® 500™and 550™

10175 Philipp Parkway, Streetsboro, OH 44241

Toll Free: 1-800-527-0733

Línea gratuita: 1-800-527-0733

Correo electrónico: info@autobag.com

Línea gratuita: 1-800-527-0733

Correo electrónico: info@autobag.com

Línea gratuita: 1-800-527-0733

Correo electrónico: info@autobag.com

Telefone: +55 11 3231 0956

Free Phone: 0800 731 3643

Kostenlose Hotline: 0800 526 526 0

Бесплатная горячая линия: 0800 526 526 0

Эл. адрес: kontakt@autobag.de

Kostenlose Hotline: 0800 526 526 0

Telefon: +44 (0) 1684 891 400

Puhelin: +44 (0) 1684 891 400

Kostenlose Hotline: 0800 526 526 0

Τηλέφωνο: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Free Phone: 0800 731 3643

Telefono: +32 0(2)725 31 00

El. paštas: kontakt@autobag.de

Telefon: 0531 263050

Telefone: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Teléfono: +32 0(2)725 31 00

Correo electrónico: info@autobag.be

Telefon: +44 0 1684 891 400

Section 5: Technical Support

Section 6: Theory of Operation

Section 8: Mechanical Drawings

Safety .................................................................................. 1-3

Only trained personnel shall operate and/or maintain this machine.

Engineering changes may have been completed following the publication

This is an example of a warning. Warnings will directly precede the item

This is an example of a note. Notes are to be used to give more

Indicates relevant information for use of the product is available

Avoid injury. Do not reach into the machine during operation.

Avoid machinery damage. Read manual for proper service

Hearing protection required in this area. Exposure to loud noises

Avoid injury. It alerts the user to potential injury hazard.

TABLE 1-1. MACHINE AND MANUAL LABELS

Avoid injury. Do not place fingers or hands in the feed rollers

The following symbol identifies the protective earth ground to the

Reset decal. This decal denotes the bagger reset button.

Start/Stop/Cycle decal. This decal denotes the bagger

TABLE 1-1. MACHINE LABELS (CONTINUED)

Air Blower decal. These decals denote the Air Blower

Bag Feed decal. These decals denote the AutoThread™ switch.

TABLE 1-1. MACHINE LABELS (CONTINUED)

Operation of this machine with any guard or cover removed will be

• Modifications that are not approved by Automated Packaging Systems

• Failure to follow all instructions contained within this manual

• Allowing untrained or unauthorized personnel to operate and/or maintain the machine

Sound level test results

MACHINE MODEL A-WEIGHTED READINGS C-WEIGHTED READINGS

TABLE 1-2. SOUND LEVEL TEST RESULTS

General Description............................................................. 2-3

Do not operate machine in potentially explosive atmosphere.

The machine is intended for indoor use only.

FIGURE 2-1. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION

TABLE 2-1. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION

The machine must be placed into service by an authorized Automated

The warranty period may only be started by an authorized Automated

FIGURE 3-1. HMI SCREEN